CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic with Solutions and marking scheme Set 1 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

1. This question paper contains two parts, A and B.
2. Both Part A and Part B have internal choices.

Part-A:
1. It consists of two sections, I and II.
2. Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.
3. Section II has 4 questions on case study. Each case study has 5 case-based sub-parts. An examinee is to attempt any 4 out of 5 sub-parts.

Part-B:
1. It consists of three sections III, IV and V.
2. In section III, Question Nos. 21 to 26 are Very Short Answer Type questions of 2 marks each.
3. In section IV, Question Nos. 27 to 33 are Short Answer Type questions of 3 marks each.
4. In section V, Question Nos. 34 to 36 are Long Answer Type questions of 5 marks each.
5. Internal choice is provided in 2 questions of 2 marks, 2 questions of 3 marks and 1 question of 5 marks.

Part – A
Section-I

Section I has 16 questions of 1 mark each. Internal choice is provided in 5 questions.

Question 1.
Express 5005 as a product of its prime factors.
Solution :
5005 = 5 × 7 × 11 ×13
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 1

Question 2.
Find the zeroes of the quadratic polynomial 6x2 – 3 – 7x
Solution :
Here, p (x) = 6x2 – 3 – 7x = 6x2 – 7x – 3
= 6x2 – 9x + 2x – 3 = 3x (2x – 3) + 1  (2x – 3) +1 (2x- 1)
(2x – 3) (3x + 1)
=\(6\left(x-\frac{3}{2}\right)\left[x-\left(-\frac{1}{3}\right)\right]\)
∴ Zeroes of p (x) are \(\frac{3}{2} \text { and }-\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 3.
H.C.F and L.C.M of two numbers is 9 and 459 respectively. If one of the two numbers is 27. Find the other number. If  \(\frac{241}{4000}=\frac{241}{2^{m} 5^{n}}\) find the values of m and n, where m and n are non negative integers. Hence write its decimal expansion without actual division.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 2
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 3

Question 4.
Find whether the pair of equations
6x – 3y + 10 = 0
and 2x-y + 9 = 0 are consistent or inconsistent.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 4.

Question 5.
Two numbers are in the ratio 21 : 17. If their HCF is 5, find the numbers. 1
Solution :
Let numbers be 21x and 17 x So, common factors of 21 x and 17 x = x
Also, HCF = 5
⇒ x = 5
∴ Numbers are 21 x 5 and 17 x 5 i.e.: 105 and 85.

Question 6.
In a circle of radius 21 cm, an arc subtends an angle of 60° at the centre. Find the area of sector formed by the arc.      OR
A horse is tied to a peg at one comer of a square shaped grass field of side 15 m by means of a 5 m long rope. Find the area of that part of the field in which the horse can graze.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 5

OR
Length of the rope = Radius, r = 5 m
Angle of sector = 90°
Area of the field that can graze
\(=\frac{\pi r^{2} \theta}{360^{\circ}}=\frac{22}{7} \times \frac{5 \times 5 \times 90^{\circ}}{360^{\circ}}\)
= 19.64 sq. m

Question 7.
If one diagonal of a trapezium divides the other diagonal in the ratio 1 : 2. Prove that one of the parallel sides is double the other.
OR
In ΔABC, D and E are points on sides AB and AC respectively such that DE || BC and AD : DB = 3:1. If EA = 6.6 cm then find AC.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 6
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 7

Question 8.
Two friends Mohan and Sohan drive a car. The shaded portion of the given figure represents an area swept by the wiper of the car. If OA = 7 cm and AB = 21 cm then Mohan said that area swept by the wiper is 192.5 cm2. Is he right? Explain.
Solution :
Let r = 7 cm be the radius of the sector OAD and R = 7 + 21=28cm be the radius of sector OBC.
The area swept by the wiper
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 8
= Area of the shaded portion = Area of the sector OBC – Area of the sector OAD
\(=\pi \mathrm{R}^{2} \frac{\theta}{360^{\circ}}-\pi r^{2} \frac{\theta}{360^{\circ}}\)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 9

Question 9.
The ratio of the height of a tower and the length of its shadow on is the angle of elevation of the sun?
Solution :
Let
AB = height of the tower,
BC = length of the shadow and
∠ACB = θ = Angle of elevation of the sun
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 10
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 11

Question 10.
A metallic sphere of radius 4.2 cm is melted and recast into the shape of a cylinder of radius 6 cm. Find the height of the cylinder.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 12

Let the height of the cylinder = h
Radius of the cylinder (R) = 6 cm
∴ Volume of the cylinder = πR2 h = n x (6)2 x h
Since, Volume of the cylinder = Volume of the sphere
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 13

Question 11.
Find the mode for the frequency distribution table

Class 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 Total
Frequency 8 16 36 34 6 100

Solution :
The highest frequency is 36, which belongs to class 20 – 30.
So, it will be a modal class.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 14

Question 12.
Draw a circle and two lines parallel to a given line such that one is a tangent and the other a secant to the circle.
Solution :
We have the required figure.
Here, l is the given line and a circle with centre O is drawn.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 15

The line PT is drawn which is parallel to l and tangent to the circle.
Also, AB is drawn parallel to line l and is a secant to the circle.

Question 13.
For what value of p, the pair of linear equations
px = 2y
2x – y + 5 = 0 has unique solution?
OR
For what value of k, does the given equation (k + 1 )x2 – 2(k – 1 )x + 1 = 0 have real and equal roots?
Solution :
We have:
px = 2y ⇒ px – 2y = 0
2x—y + 5=0 ⇒  2x-y = -5
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 16

OR
(k + 1 )x2 – 2(k – 1) x + 1 = 0 ⇒ a = k + 1, b = -2(k – 1), c = 1
For equal roots, b2 – 4ac = 0 ⇒ [-2(k – 1)]2 – 4 x (k + 1) x 1=0
⇒ 4(k – 1)2 – 4{k + 1) = 0 ⇒ 4{k2 + 1 – 2k) -4k-4 = 0
⇒ 4k2 + 4 – 8k – 4k – 4 = 0 ⇒ 4k2-12k = 0 ⇒ 4k(k – 3) = 0
Either  4k = 0 ⇒ k = 0 or k- 3 = 0 = k = 3
Hence k= 0 or k = 3.

Question 14.
Two dice are thrown at the same time and the product of numbers appearing on them is noted. Find the probability that the product is a prime number.
OR
Two dice are thrown at the same time. Find the probability of getting different numbers on the dice.
Solution :
Now for the product of the numbers on the dice is a prime number can be in these possible ways—(1, 2), (2, 1), (1, 3), (3, 1), (5, 1), (1, 5)
So, number of possible ways = 6
∴ Required probability \(=\frac{6}{36}=\frac{1}{6}\)
OR
Since the two dice are thrown simultaneously.
Total number of outcomes = 6 x 6 = 36
Number of outcomes for getting same numbers on both dice = 6
⇒ P (same numbers) = \(\frac{6}{36}=\frac{1}{6}\)
Now, P (different numbers) + P (same numbers) = 1
⇒ P (different numbers) = 1 – P (same numbers)
\(=1-\frac{1}{6}=\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 15.
A ladder long just reaches the top of a vertical wall. If the ladder makes an angle of with the wall find the height of the wall
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 17

Question 16.
It is given that a group of 3 students, the probability of 2 students not having the same birthday is 0.992. What is the probability that the 2 students have the same birthday?
Solution :
We have P(E) + P(not E) = 1 ⇒ P(E) + 0.992 = 1
∴ P(E) = 1 – 0.992 = 0.008.

Section-II

Case study-based questions are compulsory. Attempt any 4 sub-parts from each question. Each sub-part carries 1 mark.

Case Study Based-1

Question 17.
For going to city B from city A, there is a route via city C such that AC ⊥ CB, AC = 2x km and CB = 2(x + 7) km. It is proposed to construct a 26 km highway which is directly connect the two cities A and B. In solving such problem authority of the cities have some questions in his mind. Give answer to his following questions:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 18

(i) Which theorem will you use to solve this problem?
(a) Pythagoras theorem
(b) Basic proportionality theorem
(c) Factor theorem
(d) Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic

(ii) What is the distance of AC?
(a) 15 km
(b) 18 km
(c) 10 km
(d) 20 km

(iii) What is the distance of BC?
(a) 12 km
(b) 10 km
(c) 20 km
(d) 24 km

(iv) Find how much distance will be saved in reaching city B from city A after the construction of the highway.
(a) 6 km
(b) 8 km
(c) 10 km
(d) 12 km

(v) If ∠A is supposed to be 30°, then ∠B = ?
(a) 30°
(b) 45°
(c) 60°
(d) 90°
Solution :
(i) (a): Pythagoras theorem

(ii) (c): 10 km
AC2 + BC2 = AB2 ⇒ (2x)2 + 22[x + 7]2 = (26)2
⇒ 4x2 + 4(x2 + 14x + 49) = 676
⇒  x2 + 1x – 60 = 0
⇒  (x + 12)(x – 5) = 0
x = -12 or 5(x = -12 neglected as distance cannot be negative).
AC = 2x = 2 x 5 = 10 km.

(iii) (d): 24 km
x = 5
BC = 2(x + 7)
= 2(5 + 7) = 24 km

(iv) (b): 8 km
AC + CB = 10+ 24 = 34 km  AB = 26 km
Difference = 34 km – 26 km = 8 km

(v) (c): 60°
AC ⊥ BC ⇒∠C = 90°
∴ ∠A + ∠B = 90°
⇒ 30° + ∠B = 90°
∠B = 90° – 30° = 60°

Case Study Based-2

Question 18.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 19
In a classroom, 4 friends have decided to seat at the points A, B, C and D as shown in fig. Champa and Chameli walk into the class and after observing for a few minutes Champa asks Chameli some questions which are as follows:

(i) What is the coordinates of A and B?
(a) A(3, 4), B(6, 7)
(b) A(4,3), B(7,6)
(c) A(-3, -4), B(-6, -7)
(d) A( 3, -4), B(-6, -7)

(ii) What is the coordinate of C and D?
(a) C (4, 9), D(l, 6)
(b) C (9,4),D(6,1)
(c) C (-9, -4), D(-6, -1)
(d) C(9, -4). D(6, -1)

(iii) What is the distance between AB?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) \(2 \sqrt{3}\)
(d) \(3 \sqrt{2}\)

(iv) What is the distance between AC?
(a) 6
(b) 4
(c) 8
(d) 10

(v) What is the distance between BD?
(a) 4
(b) 6
(c) 8
(d) 10
Solution :
(i) (a): A(3, 4), B(6, 7)
(ii) (b): C(9, 4), D(6, 1)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 20

Case Study Based-3

Question 19.
Due to sudden floods, some welfare associations jointly requested the government to get 100 tents fixed immediately and ordered to contribute 50% of the cost. If the lower part of each tent is of the form of a cylinder of diameter 4.2 m and height 4 m, and a conical upper part of same diameter and height 2.8 m. The canvas to be used costs ? 100 per sq. m. Find the amount that the associations will have to pay.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 21
(i) Find the formula to find the volume of the cylinder.
(a) \(\pi r^{2} h\)
(b) \(\pi r^{3} h \)
(c) \(\pi r^{2} h^{2} \)
(d) \(\frac{1}{3} \pi r^{2} h\)

(ii) What is the formula for the lateral surface of the conical portion of the tent?
(a) \(\frac{1}{3} \pi r^{2} h\)
(b) \(\pi r^{2} h\)
(c) \(πrl\)
(d) \(2πrh\)

(iii) What is the volume of the tent?
(a) 85.66 cu.m
(b) 100 cu.m
(c) 225.66 cu.m
(d) 125.66 cu.m

(iv) What is the curved surface area of the tent?
(a) 75.9 sq.m
(b) 85.6 sq.m
(c) 65.9 sq.m
(d) 95.9 sq.m

(v) What is the cost of canvas to be used to cover 100 such tents from all around?
(a) ₹  580,000
(b) ₹ 379,500
(c) ₹ 448,000
(d) ₹ 279,500
Solution :
(i) (a) : \(\pi r^{2} h\)
(ii) (c): πrl
(iii) (d): 125.66 cu.m
Volume of the tent = Volume of cylindrical portion of the tent + volume of conical portion of the tent.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 22

(iv)
(a) Curved surface area of the tent
= Lateral surface area of conical portion + curve surface area of the cylindrical portion of the tent.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 23

Case Study Based-4

Question 20.
Due to heavy storm and rainfall, electric wire broke down on a chauraha and it disturbed the traffic. One piece of the wire is shown in the figure which followed some mathematical shape. Answer the following questions below:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 24
(i) Find the coordinates where does the graph cut the x-axis.
(a) (-5, 0), (-2, 0), (2, 0)
(b) (-5, 0), (-2, 0), (0, 2)
(c) (-2, 0), (0, 2), (2, 0)
(d)  (-5, 0), (0, 2), (2, 0)

(ii) Find number of zeroes of the graph y =f(x)
(a)  0
(b)  2
(c) 1
(d) 3

(iii) Find the zeroes of the graph y =f(x)
(a) -5, 0,    2
(b)  -5, -2, 2
(c) -2, 0, 2
(d) -5,   -2, 0

(iv) What will be the expression of the polynomial?
(a)  x3 +  5x2 – 4x – 20
(b) x3 +    5x2 + 4x – 20
(c)  x3 +   5x2 + 4x + 20
(d) x3 –     5x2 + 4x + 20

(v) What is the value of the polynomial if x = -5?
(a) -125
(b) 125
(c) 0
(d)  1
Solution :
(i) (a) : (-5, 0), (-2, 0), (2, 0)

(ii) (d) : 3
Since the graph v =f(x) crosses the x-axis at three different points. So, numbers of zeroes is 3.

(iii) (b): -5, -2, 2
Here graphy -fix) intersects the x-axis in (-5, 0), (-2, 0) and (2, 0). So, zeroes of f (x) are x-coordinate of these points.
∴ Zeroes of y(x) are -5, -2 and 2.

(iv) (a): x3 + 5x2 – 4x – 20
∵  Zeroes of f(x) are -5, -2 and 2.
So, factors of f(x) are (x + 5)(x + 2) and (x – 2)
∴ Expression of the polynomial
= (x + 5)(x + 2)(x – 2)
= x3 + 5x2 – 4x – 20.

(v) (c): 0
Put  x = -5 in /(x) = x3 + 5x2 – 4x – 20
⇒ A-5) = (-5)3 + 5(-5)2 – 4( 5) -20
= -125+ 125 + 20-20 = 0

Part-B
Section-III

All questions are compulsory. In case of internal choices, attempt anyone.

Question 21.
Find the fourth vertex D of a parallelogram ABCD whose three vertices are A(-2, 3), B(6, 7), and C(8, 3).
OR
If the distances of P(x,y) from the points A(3, 6) and B(-3,4) are equal, prove that 3x + y = 5.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 25

Question 22.
In the given figure, AB || DE and BD || EF. Prove that DC2 = CF x AC.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 26

Question 23.
Prove that the parallelogram circumscribing a circle is a rhombus.
Solution :
Since ABCD is a ||gm
∴ AB = CD and AD = BC
∵  Tangents from an external point to a circle are equal,
∴ AP = AS
BP = BQ RC = QC DR = DS
⇒ (AP + PB) + (RC + DR) = (AS + DS) + (BQ + QC)
⇒ AB + CD = AD + BC
⇒  2 AB = 2 AD ⇒  AB = AD
i.e., ABCD is a rhombus.

Question 24.
Draw a line segment of length 7.6 cm and divide it in the ratio 5 : 8. Measure the two parts.
Solution :
Steps:
(i) Draw AB = 7.6 cm.
(ii) Draw ray AX making any suitable angle with AB.
(iii) Draw ray BY parallel to ray AX by making alternate angles BAX and ABY equal.
(iv) Since 5 + 8=13, from AX cut thirteen equal segments AA1 A1A2, A2A3, …, a12a13.
(v) Also,from BY cut 13 equal segments (of the same size as taken in step (iv) BB1, B1B2, B2B3,…, B12B13.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 28
(vi) Join A5 with B8.
Line joining A5 and B8 cuts line segment AB at point P
∴ P is the required point such that AP : PB = 5 : 8.
On measuring we find: AP = 2.9 cm and BP = 4.7 cm

Question 25.
Find the value of other t-ratios if \(\tan \theta=\frac{2 m n}{m^{2}-n^{2}}\)
OR
If \(\cot \theta=\frac{7}{8}\) , then what is the value of \(\frac{(1+\cos \theta)(1-\cos \theta)}{(1-\sin \theta)(1+\sin \theta)}\)
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 29

Question 26.
Find the sum of the first 51 terms of an AP whose second term is 2 and fourth term is 8. 2
Solution :
Given, a2= 2 = a + d
and a4 = 8 = a + 2d
From (i) and (ii),
2 d – 6 ⇒ d = 3
and a = – 1
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 30

Section – IV 

Question 27.
Prove that \(2 \sqrt{3}-7\) is an irrational.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 31

Question 28.
If two tangents inclined at an angle 60° are drawn to a circle of radius 5 cm, then find the length of each tangent.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 32
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 33

Question 29.
A number consists of two digits, where the number is divided by the sum of its digits, the quotient is 7. If 27 is subtracted from the number, the digits interchange their places, find the number.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 34
Solving for x and y, we get x = 3 and y = 6
Number = 63.

Question 30.
A school has five houses, A, B, C, D and E. A class has 23 students, 4 from house A, 8 from house B, 5 from house C, 2 from house D and rest from house E. A single student is selected at random to be the class monitor. Find the probability that the selected student is not from A, B and C.
OR
A card is drawn at random from a well-shuffled deck of playing cards. Find the probability that the card drawn is:
(i) a jack or a king
(ii) a non-ace
(in) a red card
Solution :
T(E) = 23
F(E) = not from A, B, C i.e. = 23 – (4 + 8 + 5)
F(E)= 23 – 17 = 6
\(P(F)=\frac{6}{23}\)
OR
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 35

Question 31.
A circus tent is cylindrical to a height of 3 m and conical above it. If its base radius is 52.5 m and slant height of the conical portion is 53 m, find the area of the canvas needed to make the tent.                                                                          Solution :
For cylindrical part:
We have, radius (r) = 52.5 m
Curved Surface area = 2πrh

For the conical part:
Slant height (l) = 53 m
Radius (r) = 52.5 m
Curved surface area = nπl
Area of the canvas = 2nπh + πrl = πr (2h + l)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 36

Question 32.
Prove that: tan2 A – tan2 B =\(\frac{\sin ^{2} A-\sin ^{2} B}{\cos ^{2} A \cdot \cos ^{2} B}\)
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 37

Question 33.
Find two numbers whose sum is 27 and product is 182.
OR
The two numbers differ by 2 and their product is 360. Find the numbers.
Solution :
Here, sum of the numbers is 27.
Let one of the numbers be x.
∴ Other number = 21 -x According to the condition,
Product of the numbers = 182 ⇒
⇒  x (27 – x) = 182
⇒ 27x – x2 = 182
⇒ -x2 + 27x – 182 = 0
⇒ x2 – 27x+ 182 = 0
⇒ x2 – 13x – 14x + 182 = 0 ∵ – 27 = (- 13) + (- 14) and (- 13) x (- 14)= 182
⇒ x(x- 13)- 14 (x- 13)= 0
Either x – 13 = 0 ⇒ x = 13
or x – 14 = 0 ⇒ x = 14
when first number is 13, then other number = 27-13 = 14
and when first number is 14 then other number is 27 – 14 = 13.
Thus, the required numbers are 13 and 14.
OR
Let the two numbers be x and x + 2 According to the questions,
x(x + 2) = 360
⇒ x2 + 2x = 360 ⇒ x2 + 2x – 360 = 0
Splitting the middle term, we get
x2 + 20x -18x – 360 = 0 ⇒ x(x + 20) – 18(x + 20) = 0
⇒(x + 20)(x — 18) = 0 ⇒ x = -20 or x = 18
When x = -20, x + 2 = -20 + 2 = -18
When x = 18,x + 2 = 18 + 2 = 20
Hence, the required numbers are -20, -18 or 18, 20.

Section-V

Question 34.
A tree breaks due to a storm and the broken part bends so that the top of the tree touches the ground making an angle 30° with it. The distance between the foot of the tree to the point where the top touches the ground is 8 Find the height of the tree.
OR
A moving boat is observed from the top of a 150 m high cliff moving away from the cliff. The angle of depression of the boat changes from 60° to 45° in 2 minutes. Find the speed of the boat in m/min.
Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 38
Let the original height of the tree = OP.
It is broken at A and its top is touching the ground at B.
Now, in right Δ AOB, we have
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 39
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 40
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 41
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 42

Question 35.
If the sum of first 7 terms of an A.P. is 49 and that of first 17 terms is 289, find the sum of n
Solution :
Let the first term = a and the common difference = d.
Using  \(S_{n}=\frac{n}{2}[2 a+(n-1) d]\)
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 44

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 45

Question 36.
The mean of the following frequency distribution is 57.6. and the number of observations is 50. Find the missing frequencies f1 and f2.

Class 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120
Frequency 7 f1 12 f2 8 5

Solution :
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 46
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Maths Basic Set 1 with Solutions 47

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 1 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science with Solutions and marking scheme Set 1 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 1 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

(i) Question paper comprises five Sections – A, B, C, D and E. There are 32 questions in the question paper. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section A – Question no. 1 to 16 are Objective Type Questions of 1 mark each.
(iii) Section B – Question no. 17 to 22 are short answer type questions, carrying 3 marks each. Answer to each question should not exceed 80 words.
(iv) Section C – Question no. 23 to 26 are source based questions, carrying 4 marks each.
(v) Section D – Question no. 27 to 31 are long answer type questions, carrying 5 marks each. Answer to each question should not exceed 120 words.
(vi) Section E – Question no. 32 is map based, carrying 5 marks with two parts, 32.1 from History (2 marks) and 32.2 from Geography (3 marks).
(vii) There is no overall choice in the question paper. However, an internal choice has been provided in few questions. Only one of the choices in such questions have to be attempted.
(viii) In addition to this, separate instructions are given with each section and question, wherever

Section-A

Question 1.
Identify the correct statement about the liberal nationalists of Europe from the options given below.
(a) They emphasised the concept of government by the consent of the people.
(b) They criticized the glorification of science.
(c) They created a sense of collective heritage.
(d) They did not stood for the freedom of markets.
Answer:
(a) They emphasised the concept of government by the consent of the people.

Question 2.
What did Germania symbolise?
(a) French nation
(b) German nation
(c) British nation
(d) Greek nation
Answer:
(b) German nation

Question 3.
What does Satyagraha mean?
(a) Fight against injustice
(b) Complete independence
(c) Following the path of truth and non-violence
(d) All of these
Answer:
(c) Following the path of truth and non-violence

Question 4.
Fill in the blank:
India is the …………. largest producer of sugar in the world.
Or
Tourism in ………… has grown over the last three decades.
Answer:
second
Or
India

Question 5.
Choose the correctly matched pair about the ports of India from the following options:
(a) Kandla – Rajasthan
(b) Marmagao – Kerala
(c) Paradwip – Odisha
(d) Tuticorin – West Bengal
Answer:
(c) Paradwip – Odisha

Question 6.
Fill in the blank:
Tea and coffee: Laterite soils, Maize and pulses: Arid soils, …………….. : Black soils
(a) Rubber and coconut
(b) Barley and spices
(c) Cotton and jowar
(d) Wheat and cinchona
Answer:
(c) Cotton and jowar

Question 7.
Identify the crop with the help of the following features.

  • A tropical as well as a sub-tropical crop.
  • Grows well in hot and humid climate.
  • India is the second largest producer after Brazil.

Answer:
Sugarcane

Question 8.
The first jute mill was set up near Calcutta (now Kolkata) at Rishra in
(a) 1955
(b) 1947
(c) 1855
(d) 1856
Answer:
(c) 1855

Question 9.
The …………… is a national party.
(a) Aam Aadmi Party
(b) Rashtriya Janata Dal
(c) Samajwadi Party
(d) Bharatiya Janata Party
Answer:
(d) Bharatiya Janata Party

Question 10.
Which community was relatively rich and powerful in Belgium?
Or
Why is power sharing good?
Answer:
The minority French-speaking community was relatively rich and powerful in Belgium.
Or
Power sharing reduces the possibility of conflict between different social groups.

Question 11.
Why do parties sometimes launch movements?
Or
Which form of government is considered the best?
Answer:
Parties sometimes launch movements for the resolution of problems faced by people.
Or
Democracy is the most popular form of government in the contemporary set up.

Question 12.
Read the given data and find out which country is at the top regarding GNI and HDI rank in
the world.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 1 with Solutions 1

Source: Human Development Report, 2018, United Nations Development Programme, New York
(a) Nepal
(b) India
(c) Pakistan
(d) Sri Lanka
Answer:
(d) Sri Lanka

Question 13.
Read the information given below and select the correct option.

Kanta works in an office. She attends her office from 9:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. She gets her salary regularly at the end of every month. In addition to the salary, she also gets provident fund as per the rule laid down by the government. She also gets medical and other allowances. Kanta does not go to office on Sundays. This is a paid holiday. When she joined work, she was given an appointment letter starting all the terms and conditions of work.
Like Kanta, people who work in the organised sector-
(a) do not worry about medical benefits and pensions
(b) do not get security of employment
(c) do not get overtime
(d) are not sure about their paid leaves, medical benefits, etc.

Or

Many people work in the unorganised sector. Which of the following statements about this sector is correct?
(a) It provides medical benefits.
(b) It ensures security of employment.
(c) It is one where the terms of employment are regular.
(d) Jobs are low paid and some kind of work is seasonal in nature.
Answer:
(a) do not worry about medical benefits and pensions

Or

(d) Jobs are low paid and some kind of work is seasonal in nature.

Question 14.
Who supervises the functioning of formal source of loans?
(a) Reserve Bank of India
(b) State Bank of India
(c) Central Bank of India
(d) Moneylenders
Answer:
(a) Reserve Bank of India

Question 15.
Read the following statements in context of the ‘foreign trade’ and choose the correct
option.
(a) Foreign trade implies exchange of goods and services across the countries.
(b) It helps to expand the size of market for producers.
(c) Producers and consumers can get commodities produced in any part of the world.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 16.
In the question given below, there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason
(R) Read the statements and choose the correct option:
Assertion (A): MNCs have been attracted towards the Indian market.
Reason (R): The Government of India has allowed flexibility in labour laws.
Options:
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is true.
Answer:
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.

Section-B

Question 17.
Who had designed the ‘swaraj flag’ by 1921? Explain the main features of this ‘swaraj flag’.
Answer:
By 1921, Mahatma Gandhi had designed the ‘swaraj flag’.
During the Swadeshi movement in Bengal, a tricolour flag (red, green and yellow) was designed. It had eight lotuses representing eight provinces of British India and a crescent moon, representing Hindus and Muslims. In 1921, the Gandhiji’s designed swaraj flag was again a tricolour (red, green and white) and had a shining wheel at the centre, that representating the Gandhian ideal of self-help. Carrying the ‘swaraj flag’, holding it aloft, during marches became a symbol of defiance.

Question 18.
Describe the events of the French Revolution which had influenced the people belonging to
other parts of Europe.
Or
Why in the years after 1848, the autocrats of Central and Eastern Europe began to introduce the changes that had already taken place in Western Europe before 1815? Explain.
Answer:

  • When the news of the events in France reached the different cities of Europe, students and other members of educated middle-classes began setting up Jacobin clubs.
  • Their activities and campaigns prepared the way for the French armies which moved into Holland, Belgium, Switzerland and much of Italy in the 1790s.
  • With the outbreak of the revolutionary wars, the French armies began to carry the idea of nationalism abroad.

Or

  • Though conservative forces were able to suppress liberal movements in 1848, they could not restore the old order. Monarchs were beginning to realise that the cycles or revolution and repression could only be ended by granting concessions to the liberal-nationalist revolutionaries.
  • Hence, in the years after 1848, the autocratic monarchies of Central and Eastern Europe began to introduce the changes that had already taken place in Western Europe before 1815.
  • Thus, serfdom and bonded labour were abolished both in the Habsburg dominations and in Russia. The Habsburg rules ganted more autonomy to the Hungarians in 1867.

Question 19.
Classify industries according to their main role.
Answer:
According to their main role, industries are of two types:

  1. Basic or Key:
    Industries which supply their raw materials to manufacture other goods. Example: Iron and steel, copper smelting, aluminium smelting.
  2. Consumers:
    Industries produce goods for direct use by consumers. Example: Sugar, toothpaste, paper, sewing machines, etc.

Question 20.
What led to tensions between the Dutch-speaking and French-speaking communities in Belgium during the 1950s and 1960s? Where was this tension more acute, and why?
Or
What were the majoritarian measures taken in Sri Lanka to establish Sinhala supremacy?
Answer:

  • The minority French-speaking community in Belgium was relatively rich and powerful. This was resented by the Dutch-speaking community who got the benefit of economic development and education much later.
  • This led to tensions between the Dutch-speaking and French-speaking communities during the 1950s and 1960s.

This tension between the two communities was more acute in Brussels. It was so, because, the Dutch-speaking people constituted majority in the country, but minority in the capital, i.e. Brussels.

Or

When Sri Lanka emerged as an independent country in 1948, the leaders of the Sinhala community tried to dominate over the government by virtue of their majority. In order to establish their supremacy they took some ‘majoritarian measures’ which are given below:

  • In 1956, an Act was passed which declared Sinhala as the only official language, thus disregarding Tamil.
  • Preferences were given to Sinhala applicants for university positions and government jobs.
  • A new Constitution stipulated that the state shall protect and promote Buddhism. All these government measures, coming one after the other, gradually strained the relationship between the two communities.

Question 21.
Do you think the classification of economic activities into primary, secondary and tertiary is useful? Explain how?
Answer:
Yes, the classification of economic activities into primary, secondary and tertiary is very useful because of the following reasons:
(i) On account of the information it provides we come to know how and where the people of ,a country are employed.

(ii) It helps in ascertaining as to which sector of economic activity contributes more or less to the country’s GDP and per capita income.

(iii) If the tertiary sector is developing much faster than the primary sector, it implies that agriculture is depleting, and the government must take measures to rectify this. The knowledge that the agricultural profession is becoming unpopular or regressive can only come if we know which sector it belongs to. Hence, it is necessary to classify economic activities into these three basic sectors for smooth economic administration and development.

Question 22.
In recent years how our markets have been transformed? Explain with examples.
Answer:
Until the middle of the twentieth century, production was largely organised within countries.What crossed the boundaries of these countries were raw materials, food stuffs and finished goods. Trade was the main channel connecting distant countries. But with the emergence of multinational corporations (MNCs), things have been changed.

These MNCs are spreading their production and interacting with local producers in various countries across the globe. Foreign trade integrates markets. It creates an opportunity for the producers to reach beyond the domestic markets.

Producers can sell their produce not only in markets located within the country but can also compete in markets located in other countries. Similarly, for the buyers, import of goods produced in another country is one way of expanding the choice of goods beyond what is domestically produced.

Section-C

Question 23.
Read the source given below and answer the questions that follows. (4 x 1 = 4)

The first clear expression of nationalism came with the French Revolution in 1789. France, as you would remember, was a full-fledged territorial state in 1789 under the rule of an absolute monarch. The political and constitutional changes that came in the wake of the French Revolution led to the transfer of sovereignty from the monarchy to a body of French citizens. The revolution proclaimed that it was the people who would henceforth constitute the nation and shape its destiny. From the very beginning, the French revolutionaries introduced various measures and practices that could create a sense of collective identity amongst the French people. The ideas of lapatrie (the fatherland) and le citoyen (the citizen) emphasised the notion of a united community enjoying equal rights under a constitution.

A new French flag, the tricolour, was chosen to replace the former royal standard. The Estates General was elected by the body of active citizens and renamed the National Assembly. New hymns were composed, oaths taken and martyrs commemorated, all in the name of the nation. A centralised administrative system was put in place and it formulated uniform laws for all citizens within its territory. Internal customs duties and dues were abolished and a uniform system of weights and measures was adopted. Regional dialects were discouraged and French, as it was spoken and written in Paris, became the common language of the nation.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 23.1.
When did the French Revolution take place? (1)
(a) In 1889
(b) In 1789
(c) In 1788
(d) In 1751
Answer:
(b) In 1789

Question 23.2.
Identify the purpose of the French revolutionaries from the following options:
(a) To establish republic
(b) To provide equal rights for all
(c) To create a sense for collective responsibility
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.3.
What does the idea of la patrie mean?
(a) The fatherland
(b) The motherland
(c) The citizen
(d) The Constitution
Answer:
(a) The fatherland

Question 23.4.
Which of the following measures was not adopted by the French revolutionaries?
(a) Ideas of la patrie and le citoyen
(b) The tricolour French flag
(c) Hymns composed
(d) Regional dialects were encouraged
Answer:
(d) Regional dialects were encouraged

Question 24.
Read the text given below and answer the following questions. (4 x 1 = 4)

Planning is the widely accepted strategy for judicious use of resources. It has importance in a country like India, which has enormous diversity in the availability of resources. There are regions which are rich in certain types of resources but are deficient in some other resources. There are some regions which can be considered self sufficient in terms of the availability of resources and there are some regions which have acute shortage of some vital resources. For example, the states of Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh and Madhya Pradesh are rich in minerals and coal deposits.

Arunachal Pradesh has abundance of water resources but lacks in infrastructural development. The state of Rajasthan is very well endowed with solar and wind energy but lacks in water resources. The cold desert of Ladakh is relatively isolated from the rest of the country. It has very rich cultural heritage but it is deficient in water, infrastructure and some vital minerals. This calls for balanced resource planning at the national, state, regional and local levels.

Resource planning is a complex process which involves : (i) identification and inventory of resources across the regions of the country. This involves surveying, mapping and qualitative and quantitative estimation and measurement of the resources, (ii) Evolving a planning structure endowed with appropriate technology, skill and institutional set up for implementing resource development plans, (iii) Matching the resource development plans with overall national development plans.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 24.1.
…………… of is not …………… essential for a developed region.
(a) Availability; resources
(b) Valuation; resources
(c) Utilisation; resources
(d) Valuation; planning
Answer:
(b) Valuation; resources

Question 24.2.
There are some regions of India where availability of resources is sufficient, but in some regions, these are acute shortage of important resources. Identify which of the following belongs to:

Regions

Features

a. Jharkhand 1. Endowed of solar energy
b. Rajasthan 2. Abundance of water resources
c. Ladakh 3. Coal deposits
d. Arunachal Pradesh 4. Deficient in water resources

Choose the correct option:
(a) a – 2, b – 4, c – 1, d – 3
(b) a – 4, b – 2, c – 3, d -1
(c) a – 3, b – 1, c – 4, d – 2
(d) a – 2, b – 3, c – 1, d – 4
Answer:
(c) a – 3, b – 1, c – 4, d – 2

Question 24.3.
The state of Rajasthan lacks in
(a) Water resources
(b) Soil resources
(c) Biotic resources
(d) Potential resources
Answer:
(a) Water resources

Question 24.4.
Which of the following processes is involved in Resource Planning?
(a) Identification and inventory of resources across the regions of the country
(b) Evolving a planning structure with suitable technology
(c) Matching the resource development plans with overall national development plans
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 25.
Read the given extract and answer the following questions. (4 x 1 = 4)

The Constitution of India originally provided for a two-tier system of government, the Union Government or what we call the Central Government, representing the Union of India and the State governments. Later a third tier of federalism was added in the form of Panchayats and Municipalities. As in any federation, these difference tiers enjoy separate jurisdiction. The Constitution clearly provided a three-fold distribution of legislative powers between the Union Government and the State Governments. Thus, it contains three lists.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 25.1.
The Indian Constitution provides
(a) Two-tier system of government
(b) Three-tier system of government
(c) Four-tier system of government
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Three-tier system of government

Question 25.2.
What is the first-tier of government in India called?
(a) District Government
(b) Provincial Government
(c) Central Government Municipalities are set up in
(d) Community Government
Answer:
(c) Central Government Municipalities are set up in

Question 25.3.
Municipalities are set up in ……………….
(a) houses
(b) towns
(c) villages
(d) metropolitan cities
Answer:
(b) towns

Question 25.4.
Which government legislates on residuary subjects?
(a) State Government
(b) Local Government
(c) Community Government
(d) Union Government
Answer:
(d) Union Government

Question 26.
26. Read the source given below and answer the following questions. (4 x 1 = 4)

The value of final goods and services produced in each sector during a particular year provides the total production of the sector for that year. And the sum of production in the three sectors gives what is called the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) of a country. It is the value of all final goods and services produced within a country during a particular year. GDP shows how big the economy is. In India, the mammoth task of measuring GDP is undertaken by a central government ministry. This Ministry, with the help of various government departments of all the Indian states and union territories, collects information relating to total volume of goods and services and their prices and then estimates the GDP.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate answer. 

Question 26.1.
How is GDP calculated?
(a) The value of intermediate goods and services produced in each sector during a particular year and the sum of production in the three sectors.
(b) The value of intermediate goods and services produced in each sector during a particular year provides the approximate production of the sector for that year.
(c) The value of final goods and services produced in each sector during a particular year provides the total production of sector for that year, and the sum of production in the three sectors.
(d) The value of final goods and services produced in each sector during last three years provides the total production of the sector for that year.
Answer:
(c) The value of final goods and services produced in each sector during a particular year provides the total production of sector for that year, and the sum of production in the three sectors.

Question 26.2.
What do final goods and services mean?
(a) Production of goods and services
(b) Those goods and services that finally reach the consumers
(c) Those goods and services that are out of reach of consumers
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Those goods and services that finally reach the consumers

Question 26.3.
In how many sectors does the sum of production give GDP of a country?
(a) Two
(b) Five
(c) Four
(d) Three
Answer:
(d) Three

Question 26.4.
Who is responsible for collecting data for the GDP in India?
(a) Central Government ministry
(b) State Government ministry
(c) Mayor
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Central Government ministry

Section-D

Question 27.
What steps did the French revolutionaries take to create a sense of collective identity among
the French people?
Or
Choose some examples to show the contribution of culture to the growth of nationalism in Europe.
Answer:
The first clear cut expression of nationalism came in France with the French Revolution. To make the Revolution a success it was very important to instill a sense of unity in every citizen. To achieve it, various measures and practices were followed:

  • A new French flag, the tricolour, was chosen to replace the former royal standard.
  • The Estate General was elected by the body of active citizens and renamed the National Assembly.
  • The ideas of la patrie (the fatherland) and le citoyen (the citizen) emphasised the nation of a united community enjoying equal rights under a Constitution.
  • New hymns were composed, oaths were taken and martyrs were commemorated, all in the name of the nation.
  • A centralised administrative system practising uniform laws for all citizens within its territory was set up.
  • Internal custom duties and dues were abolished and a uniform system of weights and measures was adopted.
  • Regional languages were discouraged and French was adopted as the common language of the nation.

Or

(i) Culture played a vital role in creating the idea of the nation, viz, art and poetry, stories and music helped to express and arouse nationalist feelings. Romantic artists and poets made deliberate efforts to create a sense of shared collective heritage, a common cultural past as the basis of a nation.

(ii) The German philosopher Johann Gottfried Herder stated that true German culture was to be discovered among the common people. It was through folk songs, folk poetry and folk dances that the true spirit of nation was popularised. So collecting and recording these forms of folk culture was essential to the project of nation-building.

The French painter Delacroix depicted an incident through his painting in which about 20,0 Greeks were assumed to have been killed by Turks. By dramatising the incident and focusing on the suffering of women and children Delacroix wanted to appeal to the emotions of the spectators and create sympathy for the Greeks.

Karol Kurpinski celebrated the national struggle through his operas and music, turning folk dances like the polonaise and mazurka into nationalist symbols.

(iii) Language played an important role in developing nationalist sentiments. Regional languages had always been an obstacle in the unification of a country. To overcome it, a common national language was adopted. The Polish language was forced out of schools and the Russian language was made obligatory everywhere.

(iv) In 1831, an armed rebellion against Russian rule took place but it was crushed. After the failure of this rebellion, members of the clergy in Poland began to use language as a weapon of national resistance. Polish became a common language in church gatherings and all religious instruction. As a result, several priests and bishops were put in jail by the Russian authorities as punishment for their refusal to preach in Russian. The use of Polish came to be seen as a symbol of the struggle against Russian dominance.

(v) Conservatives were able to suppress liberal movements in 1848.

Question 28.
What do you know about agriculture? Give its significance.
Or
Describe the types of farming practised in India.
Answer:
(i) Agriculture is a primary activity which produces most of the food that we consume. Two- thirds of India’s population is engaged in agricultural activities.

(ii) Agriculture has been in practice in India for thousands of years and continuous use of land without well-matched techno-institutional reforms have slowed the pace of agricultural development. Most of the farmers in large parts of the country still depend upon monsoon and natural fertility of soil. Also rapid growth in population put pressure on the agricultural production as more than 60 percent of India’s population depends on agriculture.

(iii) Agriculture in India produces raw materials for various industries, e.g., paper industry, textile industry, etc.

(iv) Agriculture contributes a lot to the national economy, employment and output. It provides employment and livelihood to about 63% of population. All other sectors of Indian economy heavily depend on agriculture for their growth.

Or

Two-thirds of India’s population is engaged in agricultural or farming activities. Different types of farming are in practice here:
(i) Primitive Subsistence Farming:
It is still practised in a few parts of India on small patches of land with the help of primitive tools like hoe, dao and digging sticks. It depends upon monsoon, natural fertility of the soil and suitability of other environmental conditions to the crops grown. It is also known as ‘Slash and Bum’ agriculture.

In this type of farming, farmers clear a patch of land and produce cereals and other food crops to sustain their family and when the soil fertility decreases, the farmers shift and clear a fresh patch of land for cultivation. It helps in allowing nature to reload the fertility of the soil through natural processes. Land productivity in this type of agriculture is low as the farmer does not use fertilisers or other modem inputs.

(ii) Intensive Subsistence Farming:
It is practised in areas where population pressure on land is high. High amount of biochemical inputs and irrigation are used for higher production. It is practised in West Bengal, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh. Farm size is small and uneconomical due to the division of land. The farmers take maximum output from the limited land.

(iii) Commercial Farming:
In such farming there is a use of higher doses of modem inputs, e.g. high yielding variety (HYV) seeds, chemical fertilisers, insecticides and pesticides in order to obtain higher productivity. The degree of commercialisation of agriculture varies from one region to another. For example, rice is a commercial crop in Haryana and Punjab, but in Odisha, it is a subsistence crop.

(iv), Plantation Farming: It is a type of commercial farming where single crop is grown on a large area. The plantation has an interface of agriculture and industry. The production is mainly for market and all the produce is used as raw material in respective industries. It requires well-developed network of transport and communication to connect the plantation areas, processing industries and markets together. In India, tea, coffee, mbber, sugarcane, bananas, etc. are important plantation crops. This type of farming is practised in Assam and North Bengal (tea), and Karnataka (coffee).

Question 29.
How does democracy produce an accountable, responsive and legitimate government?
Answer:
(i) Accountable Government:
Democracy refers to an accountable government because it is the government of the people, by the people and for the people. The representatives elected by the people are responsible to them. If the people are not happy with the government they can change the leaders in coming elections.

(ii) Responsive Government:
A citizen who wants to know if a decision was taken through the correct procedures can find this out. He has the right and the means to examine the process of decision-making. This type of transparency is not available in non-democratic government.

(iii) Legitimate Government:
There is one aspect in which democratic government is certainly better than its alternatives: democratic government is legitimate government. It may be slow, less efficient, not always very responsive or clean but a democratic government is people’s own government. So people wish to be ruled by representatives elected by them. They favour democracy as a government.

Question 30.
Give a comparative study of the ways in which the Belgian and Sri Lankan governments dealt with the problem of cultural diversities.
Or
What lessons do we leam from the principles of majoritarianism and accommodation followed in Sri Lanka and Belgium respectively?
Answer:
Sri Lanka is an island nation, just a few km off the southern coast of Tamil Nadu. It has about two crore people, about the same as in Haryana. Sri Lanka has a diverse population. Belgium is a small country in Europe, smaller in area than the state of Haryana. It has borders with France, the Netherlands, Germany and Luxembourg.

It has a population of a little over one crore, about half of the population of Haryana. The ethnic composition of Belgium is very complex. The Belgian leaders, in order to solve the problem of cultural diversities, adopted a compromising path. They amended their Constitution four times so as to work out an arrangement that would enable everyone to live together peacefully within the same country.

It was declared that no single community can make decisions unilaterally. Brussels has a separate government in which both the communities enjoy equal representation. These measures helped to avoid civic strife between the two communities and a possible division of the country on linguistic lines. Sri Lanka presents a different story.

The leaders of the majority community namely the Sinhala adopted a series of majoritarian measures to establish Sinhala supremacy. An Act was passed in 1956 which recognised Sinhala as the only official language, thus disregarding Tamil. The government followed preferential policies that favoured Sinhala applicants for university positions and government jobs.

These measures gradually increased the feeling of alienation among the Sri Lankan Tamils. Their relations with the Sinhala community got strained over time which finally resulted in civil war.

Or

Lessons learnt from Belgium:
In Belgium, the leaders realised that unity of the country could be maintained by respecting the feelings and interests of the different communities living in the country. So they worked on the principle of accommodation whereby mutually acceptable arrangement of sharing power were evolved. A possible division of the country on linguistic lines was also avoided.

Lessons from Sri Lanka:
In a country if a majority community learns to face its dominance over others and refuses to share power it can undermine the unity of the country.

Question 31.
“Different people can have different developmental goals.” Support the statement with examples.
Or
What does sustainability of development mean? How can sustainable development be achieved?
Answer:
The statement ‘different people have different goals of development’ is as because:

  • People come from different background.
  • Different people have different dreams of aspirations.
  • People set their goals according to the changing circumstances and the prevailing situations.
  • People may change the goal with the change in situation which could be contradictory to previous goal. For example, a person willing to go for higher education but will change his goal and go for employment because weak economic situation of the family.
  • People seek things that are most important for them i.e. things that can fulfill their aspiration or desires.
  • Examples:
    • Development for a farmer might be proper irrigation facilities.
    • For an urban youth, it may be employment.
    • For a landless labourer, it may be land.
    • For a girl, it might be mean of gender equality or more freedom.

Or

Sustainability of development means that development which is not only for the present time but is also for the future generations. Sustainability is the capacity to use the resources judiciously and maintain the ecological balance.

Sustainable development can be achieved through:
(i) Every generation wants to get the maximum benefits from the available resources but such a thing would be quite disastrous because the available resources shall be exhausted within a short time and the coming generations will be deprived of such resources.

(ii) Environmental degradation can be observed in different ways. Deforestation, falling levels of groundwater, soil erosion, water pollution, burning of fossil fuels, the hole in the ozone layer and combustion from automobiles causing extreme air pollution especially in urban areas are some of the examples of environmental degradation.

Sustainable development can be achieved by judicious use of both renewable and non-renewable resources and without disturbing the balance of environment keeping in mind the requirement for present and future generations.

Section-E

Map Skill Based Question

Question 32.1
Two places A and B have been marked on the given outline map of India. Identify and write their correct names on the lines drawn near them.
(A) The place where the Indian National Congress Session was held.
(B) The place where cotton mill workers organised Satyagraha.

Question 32.2
On the same outline map of India locate and label any THREE of the following with suitable symbols.
(a) Salal Dam
(b) Bokaro Iron and Steel Plant
(c) Ramagundam Thermal Power Plant
(d) West Bengal – the largest producer of rice
(e) Jawaharlal Nehru Port
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 1 with Solutions 2
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 1 with Solutions 3

 

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Hindi Course A Set 4 for Practice

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Hindi with Solutions and marking scheme Course A Set 4 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Hindi Course A Set 4 for Practice

निर्धारित समय : 3 घंटे
अधिकतम अंक : 80

सामान्य निर्देश:
(क) इस प्रश्न-पत्र के दो खंड हैं- ‘अ’ और ‘ब’।
(ख) खंड ‘अ’ में कुल 10 वस्तुपरक प्रश्न पूछे गए हैं। सभी प्रश्नों में उपप्रश्न दिए गए हैं। दिए गए निर्देशों का पालन करते हुए प्रश्नों के उत्तर दीजिए।
(ग) खंड ‘ब’ में कुल 7 वर्णनात्मक प्रश्न पूछे गए हैं। प्रश्नों में आंतरिक विकल्प दिए गए हैं। दिए गए निर्देशों का पालन करते हुए प्रश्नों के उत्तर दीजिए।

खंड ‘अ’- वस्तुपरक प्रश्न ( अंक 40)

अपठित गद्यांश (अंक 5)

प्रश्न 1.
निम्नलिखित गद्यांश को पढ़कर पूछे गए प्रश्नों के लिए सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 5 = 5)
संघर्ष के मार्ग में अकेले ही चलना पड़ता है। कोई बाहरी शक्ति आपकी सहायता नहीं करती है। परिश्रम, दृढ़ इच्छा शक्ति व लगन आदि मानवीय गुण व्यक्ति को संघर्ष करने और जीवन में सफलता प्राप्त करने का मार्ग प्रशस्त करते हैं। दो महत्वपूर्ण तथ्य स्मरणीय हैं- प्रत्येक समस्या अपने साथ संघर्ष लेकर आती है।

प्रत्येक संघर्ष के गर्भ में विजय निहित रहती है। एक अध्यापक ने अध्ययन छोड़ने वाले अपने छात्रों को यह संदेश दिया था- तुम्हें जीवन में सफल होने वे लिए समस्याओं से संघर्ष करने का अभ्यास करना होगा। हम कोई भी कार्य करें, सर्वोच्च शिखर पर पहुँचने का संकल्प लेकर चलें।

सफलता हमें कभी निराश नहीं करेगी। समस्त ग्रंथों और महापुरुषों के अनुभवों का निष्कर्ष यह है कि संघर्ष से डरना अथवा उससे विमुख होना अहितकर है, मानव धर्म के प्रतिकूल है और अपने विकास को अनावश्यक रूप से बाधित करना है। आप जागिए, उठिए दृढ़-संकल्प और उत्साह एवं साहस के साथ संघर्ष रूपी विजय रथ पर चढ़िए और अपने जीवन के विकास की बाधाओं रूपी शत्रुओं पर विजय प्राप्त कीजिए।

(i) मनुष्य को संघर्ष करने और जीवन में सफलता प्राप्त करने का मार्ग प्रशस्त करते हैं
(क) निर्भीकता, साहस, परिश्रम
(ख) परिश्रम, लगन, आत्मविश्वास
(ग) साहस, दृढ़ इच्छाशक्ति, परिश्रम
(घ) परिश्रम, दृढ़ इच्छाशक्ति व लगन
उत्तर
(घ) परिश्रम, दृढ़ इच्छाशक्ति व लगन

(ii) प्रत्येक समस्या अपने साथ लेकर आती है
(क) संघर्ष
(ख) कठिनाइयाँ
(ग) चुनौतियाँ
(घ) सुखद परिणाम
उत्तर
(क) संघर्ष

(iii) समस्त ग्रंथों और अनुभवों का निष्कर्ष है
(क) संघर्ष से डरना या विमुख होना अहितकर है।
(ख) मानव-धर्म के प्रतिकूल है।
(ग) अपने विकास को बाधित करना है।
(घ) उपर्युक्त सभी
उत्तर
(घ) उपर्युक्त सभी

(iv) ‘मानवीय’ शब्द में मूल शब्द और प्रत्यय है
(क) मानवी + य
(ख) मानव + ईय
(ग) मानव + नीय
(घ) मानव + इय
उत्तर
(ख) मानव + ईय

(v) संघर्ष रूपी विजय रथ पर चढ़ने के लिए आवश्यक है
(क) दृढ़ संकल्प, निडरता और धैर्य
(ख) दृढ़ संकल्प, उत्साह एवं साहस
(ग) दृढ़ संकल्प, आत्मविश्वास और साहस
(घ) दृढ़ संकल्प, उत्तम चरित्र एवं साहस
उत्तर
(ख) दृढ़ संकल्प, उत्साह एवं साहस

अथवा

मानव-जाति को अन्य जीवधारियों से अलग करके महत्व प्रदान करने वाला जो एकमात्र गुरु है, वह है उसकी विचार-शक्ति। मनुष्य के पास बुद्धि है, विवेक है, तर्कशक्ति है अर्थात उसके पास विचारों की अमूल्य पूँजी है। अपने सविचारों की नींव पर ही आज मानव ने अपनी श्रेष्ठता की स्थापना की है और मानव-सभ्यता का विशाल महल खड़ा किया है।

यही कारण है कि विचारशील मनुष्य के पास जब सविचारों का अभाव रहता है तो उसका वह शून्य मानस कुविचारों से ग्रस्त होकर एक प्रकार से शैतान के वशीभूत हो जाता है। मानवीय बुद्धि जब सद्भावों से प्रेरित होकर कल्याणकारी योजनाओं में प्रवृत्त रहती है तो उसकी सदाशयता का कोई अंत नहीं होता, किंतु जब वहाँ कुविचार अपना घर बना लेते हैं तो उसकी पाशविक प्रवृत्तियाँ उस पर हावी हो उठती हैं।

हिंसा और पापाचार का दानवी साम्राज्य इस बात का द्योतक है कि मानव की विचार-शक्ति, जो उसे पशु बनने से रोकती है, उसका साथ देती है।

(i) मानव-जाति को महत्व देने में किसका योगदान है?
(क) शारीरिक शक्ति का
(ख) परिश्रम और उत्साह का
(ग) विवेक और विचारों का
(घ) मानव-सभ्यता का
उत्तर
(ग) विवेक और विचारों का

(ii) विचारों की पूँजी में शामिल नहीं है-
(क) उत्साह
(ख) विवेक
(ग) तर्क
(घ) बुद्धि
उत्तर
(क) उत्साह

(iii) मानव में पाशविक प्रवृत्तियाँ क्यों जागृत होती हैं?
(क) हिंसा-बुद्धि के कारण
(ख) असत्य बोलने के कारण
(ग) कुविचारों के कारण
(घ) स्वार्थ के कारण
उत्तर
(क) हिंसा-बुद्धि के कारण

(iv) ‘मनुष्य के पास बुद्धि है, विवेक है, तर्कशक्ति है।’ रचना की दृष्टि से उपर्युक्त वाक्य है
(क) सरल
(ख) संयुक्त
(ग) मिश्र
(घ) आज्ञावाचक
उत्तर
(क) सरल

(v) गद्यांश का उपयुक्त शीर्षक हो सकता है
(क) मनुष्य का गुरु
(ख) विवेक-शक्ति
(ग) दानवी शक्ति
(घ) पाशविक प्रवृत्ति
उत्तर
(ख) विवेक-शक्ति

अपठित पद्यांश (अंक 5)

प्रश्न  2.
निम्नलिखित पद्यांश को पढ़कर पूछे गए प्रश्नों के लिए सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 5 = 5)

दो टूक कलेजे के करता पछताता,
पथ पर आता।
पेट पीठ दोनों मिलकर हैं एक,
चल रहा लकुटिया टेक,
मुट्ठी भर दाने को, भूख मिटाने को
मुँह फटी पुरानी झोली का फैलाता
दो टूक कलेजे के करता पछताता पथ पर आता।

साथ दो बच्चे भी हैं सदा हाथ फैलाए,
बाएँ से वे मलते हुए पेट को चलते,
और दाहिना दया-दृष्टि पाने की ओर बढ़ाए।
भूख से सूख ओठ जब जाते
दाता-भाग्य विधाता से क्या पाते?
घुट आँसूओं के पीकर रह जाते।
चाट रहे जूठी पत्तल कभी सड़क पर खड़े हुए,
और झपट लेने को उनसे कुत्ते भी हैं अड़े हुए!

(i) कविता में किस पर व्यंग्य किया गया है
(क) आर्थिक न्याय पर
(ख) राजनीतिक सत्य पर
(ग) सामाजिक विषमता पर
(घ) मध्यवर्गीय जीवन पर
उत्तर
(ग) सामाजिक विषमता पर

(ii) भिखारी की इच्छा है
(क) सोना पाने की
(ख) पैसा पाने की
(ग) अनाज पाने के लिए
(घ) कपड़ा पाने की
उत्तर
(ग) अनाज पाने के लिए

(iii) बच्चे भिखारी के साथ क्यों हैं?
(क) घूमने के लिए
(ख) भीख माँगने के लिए
(ग) रास्ता ढूँढ़ने के लिए
(घ) पिता के साथ के लिए
उत्तर
(ख) भीख माँगने के लिए

(iv) भिखारी के बच्चों से कुत्ते क्यों होड़ करते हैं?
(क) जूठी पत्तल छीनने के लिए
(ख) चिढ़ाने के लिए
(ग) लड़ने के लिए
(घ) भागने के लिए
उत्तर
(क) जूठी पत्तल छीनने के लिए

(v) इस काव्यांश का शीर्षक होगा
(क) विषमता
(ख) बेबसी
(ग) गरीबी
(घ) भिक्षुक
उत्तर
(ख) बेबसी

अथवा

माटी तुझे प्रणाम।
मेरे पुण्य देश की माटी तू कितनी अभिराम।
तुझे लगा माथे से सारे कष्ट हो गए दूर
क्षण भर में ही भूल गया मैं शत्रु मंत्रणा क्रूर
सुख-स्फूर्ति का इस काया में हुआ पुनःसंचार
लगता जैसे आज युगों के बाद मिला विश्राम।
माटी तुझे प्रणाम।
तुझसे बिछुड़ मिला प्राणों को कभी न पल-भर चैन
तेरे दर्शन हेतु रात-दिन तरस रहे थे नैन

धन्य हुआ तेरे चरणों में आकर यह अस्तित्व
हुई साधना सफल, भगत को प्राप्त हो गए राम।
माटी तुझे प्रणाम।
अमर मृत्तीके लगती तू पारस से बढ़कर आज
कारा-जड़-जीवन सचेत फिर, तुझको छूकर आज
मरणशील हम, किंतु अमर तू है, अमर्त्य यह धाम
हम मर-मरकर अमर करेंगे तेरा उज्ज्व ल नाम।

(i) इस कविता को कवि किस मनोदशा में लिख रहा है?
(क) मातृभूमि से दूर विदेशी भूमि से
(ख) मातृभूमि से दूर विदेशी शत्रुओं के चुंगल में रहकर
(ग) बहुत दिनों बाद विदेशी शत्रुओं के चुंगल से मुक्त होकर
(घ) विदेश यात्रा से अनेक वर्षों बाद लौटकर
उत्तर
(ग) बहुत दिनों बाद विदेशी शत्रुओं के चुंगल से मुक्त होकर

(ii) ‘अभिराम’ का तात्पर्य है
(क) उपजाऊ
(ख) सुंदर
(ग) कष्ट उठा-उठाकर
(घ) बलिदान दे-देकर
उत्तर
(ख) सुंदर

(iii) ‘हम मर-मरकर अमर करेंगे तेरा उज्ज्वल नाम’ में मर-मर का क्या तात्पर्य है?
(क) दुर्बल निर्मल होकर
(ख) परास्त होकर
(ग) कष्ट उठा-उठाकर
(घ) बलिदान दे-देकर
उत्तर
(घ) बलिदान दे-देकर

(iv) कवि ने मिट्टी को पारस के समान क्यों कहा है?
(क) वह बहुत उपजाऊ है
(ख) वह हरी-भरी है
(ग) वह माँ की गोद-सी ममता देने वाली है
(घ) वह फसलों के रूप में सोना उगाती है
उत्तर
(घ) वह फसलों के रूप में सोना उगाती है

(v) कवि माटी के प्रति किस भावना से परिपूर्ण है?
(क) भक्ति भावना से
(ख) कृतज्ञता से
(ग) जन्मजात प्रेम से
(घ) धन्यवाद भाव से
उत्तर
(ख) कृतज्ञता से

व्यावहारिक व्याकरण (अंक 16)

प्रश्न 3.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों को पढ़कर किन्हीं चार प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 4 = 4)
(i) हमारे निकलते ही वर्षा होने लगी वाक्य है
(क) सरल वाक्य
(ख) मिश्र वाक्य
(ग) संयुक्त वाक्य
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(क) सरल वाक्य

(ii) मुझे विश्वास है कि आप आवश्य आएँगे। रेखांकित उपवाक्य है
(क) संज्ञा उपवाक्य
(ख) सर्वनाम उपवाक्य
(ग) क्रिया उपवाक्य
(घ) विशेषण उपवाक्य
उत्तर
(क) संज्ञा उपवाक्य

(iii) संयुक्त वाक्य है
(क) वहाँ जाकर जल्दी आ जाना।
(ख) वहाँ जाना और जल्दी आ जाना।
(ग) जब जाओगे तब जल्दी आना।
(घ) जाकर जल्दी आओ।
उत्तर
(ख) वहाँ जाना और जल्दी आ जाना।

(iv) मिश्र वाक्य है
(क) यहाँ आएँ और सुनें।
(ख) यहाँ आकर सुनो।
(ग) जब यहाँ आना तब सुनना।
(घ) आओ और सुनो।
उत्तर
(घ) आओ और सुनो।

(v) ‘मैंने एक फूल देखा, जो खिल रहा था।’ वाक्य में प्रधान उपवाक्य है
(क) जो खिल रहा था
(ख) मैंने एक फूल देखा
(ग) फूल जो खिल रहा था।
(घ) एक फूल देखा
उत्तर
(ख) मैंने एक फूल देखा

प्रश्न 4.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों को पढ़कर किन्हीं चार प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए।( 1 x 4 = 4)

(i) इनमें भाववाच्य है
(क) दूधवाले ने दूध दिया।
(ख) चोर पकड़ा गया।
(ग) दादी जी से बोला नहीं जाता।
(घ) फोर्स द्वारा घुसपैठिए पकड़े गए।
उत्तर
(ग) दादी जी से बोला नहीं जाता।

(ii) कर्तृवाक्य है
(क) चिड़िया से उड़ा जाएगा।
(ख) मुझसे यों चुपचाप नहीं बैठा जाता।
(ग) हर्ष इस समय गीत गा रहा है।
(घ) आओ साथ मिलकर खेला जाए।
उत्तर
(ग) हर्ष इस समय गीत गा रहा है।

(iii) आज हमें गणित पढ़ाया गया।वाच्य है
(क) कर्तृवाक्य
(ख) कर्मवाक्य
(ग) भाववाक्य
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(ख) कर्मवाक्य

(iv) कर्मवाच्य है
(क) मैं कहानी पढ़ता हूँ।
(ख) माली द्वारा फूल तोड़े गए।
(ग) माली फूल तोड़ेगा।
(घ) उससे सोया नहीं जाता।
उत्तर
(ख) माली द्वारा फूल तोड़े गए।

(v) मैंने घोड़ा खरीदा। वाच्य है
(क) कर्तृवाक्य
(ख) कर्मवाक्य
(ग) भाववाक्य
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(क) कर्तृवाक्य

प्रश्न 5.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों को पढ़कर किन्हीं चार प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 4 =4 )

(i) योगिता मंदिर में गाना गाती है। रेखांकित का पद-परिचय है
(क) व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञा, स्त्रीलिंग, एकवचन, कर्ता कारक
(ख) जातिवाचक संज्ञा, स्त्रीलिंग, एकवचन, कर्ता कारक
(ग) जातिवाचक संज्ञा, पुल्लिंग, एकवचन, कर्म कारक
(घ) भाववाचक संज्ञा, स्त्रीलिंग, एकवचन, कर्ता कारक
उत्तर
(क) व्यक्तिवाचक संज्ञा, स्त्रीलिंग, एकवचन, कर्ता कारक

(ii) ‘आज तुमने थोड़ा-सा ही दूध क्यों पीया?’ इस वाक्य में थोड़ा-सा’ का पद-परिचय होगा
(क) निश्चित परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, पुल्लिंग, एकवचन, ‘दूध’ विशेष्य का विशेषण
(ख) अनिश्चित परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, स्त्रीलिंग, बहुवचन, दूध’ विशेष्य का विशेषण
(ग) अनिश्चित परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, पुल्लिंग, एकवचन, ‘दूध’ विशेष्य का विशेषण
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(ग) अनिश्चित परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, पुल्लिंग, एकवचन, ‘दूध’ विशेष्य का विशेषण

(iii) ‘वह कहीं चला गया है।’ वाक्य में ‘कहीं’ का पद-परिचय क्या है?
(क) कालवाचक क्रियाविशेषण, ‘चला गया है’ क्रिया की विशेषता बता रहा है।
(ख) स्थानवाचक क्रियाविशेषण, ‘चला गया है’ क्रिया की विशेषता बता रहा है।
(ग) रीतिवाचक क्रियाविशेषण ‘चला गया है’ क्रिया की विशेषता बता रहा है।
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(ख) स्थानवाचक क्रियाविशेषण, ‘चला गया है’ क्रिया की विशेषता बता रहा है।

(iv) मल्लिका पत्र लिखवाती है। ‘लिखवाती है’ का पद-परिचय है
(क) अकर्मक क्रिया, एकवचन, स्त्रीलिंग, वर्तमान काल
(ख) सकर्मक क्रिया, एकवचन, स्त्रीलिंग, भूतकाल
(ग) प्रेरणार्थक क्रिया, एकवचन, स्त्रीलिंग, वर्तमान काल
(घ) एककर्मक क्रिया, संयुक्त क्रिया, एकवचन, वर्तमान काल
उत्तर
(ग) प्रेरणार्थक क्रिया, एकवचन, स्त्रीलिंग, वर्तमान काल

(v) प्रांजल दो किलो आम लाया।’ यहाँ ‘दो किलो’ का पद-परिचय है
(क) संख्यावाचक विशेषण, एकवचन, पुल्लिंग, आम विशेष्य
(ख) परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, एकवचन, पुल्लिंग, आम विशेष्य
(ग) गुणवाचक विशेषण, एकवचन, पुल्लिंग, आम विशेष्य
(घ) परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, बहुवचन, स्त्रीलिंग, आम विशेष्य
उत्तर
(ख) परिमाणवाचक विशेषण, एकवचन, पुल्लिंग, आम विशेष्य

प्रश्न 6.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों को पढ़कर किन्हीं चार प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 4 = 4)

(i) बिकल सब रोवहिं रानी, रूपु सिलु बलु तेजु बखानी, करही विलाप अनेक प्रकारा, परिहीं भूमि ताल बारहिं बारा। इन पंक्तियों में कौन सा रस है?
(क) वीर रस
(ख) रौद्र रस
(ग) अद्भुत रस
(घ) करुण रस
उत्तर
(घ) करुण रस

(ii) उस काल मारे क्रोध के, तन काँपने उसका लगा। मानो हवा के ज़ोर से, सोता हुआ सागर जगा।। इन पंक्तियों में किस रस का स्थायी भाव है?
(क) हास
(ख) उत्साह
(ग) शोक
(घ) रौद्र
उत्तर
(घ) रौद्र

(iii) चींटी चढ़ी पहाड़ पे मरने के वास्ते, नीचे खड़े कपिल देव कैच लेने के वास्ते। इन पंक्तियों में कौन-सा रस है?
(क) करुण
(ख) हास्य
(ग) वीर
(घ) वात्सल्य
उत्तर
(ख) हास्य

(iv) शोक किस रस का स्थायी भाव है?
(क) वीभत्स
(ख) करुण
(ग) हास्य
(घ) वीर
उत्तर
(ख) करुण

(v) शृंगार रस का उदाहरण है
(क) जथा पंख बिनु खग अति दीना। मनि बिनु फन करिबर कर हीना।।
अस मम जीवन बंधु बिन तोही। जौ जड दैव जियावह मोही।।

(ख) कहत नटत रीझत खिझत, मिलत खिलत लजियात,
भरे भौन में करत है, नैननु ही सौ बात

(ग) कनक भूधराकार सरीरा, समर भयंकर अतिबल बीरा।

(घ) मैया मोरी दाऊ बहुत खिजायो।
मोसों कहत मोल की लीन्हो तू जसुमति कब जायो।
उत्तर
(ख) कहत नटत रीझत खिझत, मिलत खिलत लजियात,
भरे भौन में करत है, नैननु ही सौ बात

पाठ्यपुस्तक (अंक 14)

प्रश्न 7.
निम्नलिखित गद्यांश को पढ़कर पूछे गए प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 5 = 5)
इन सबके ऊपर, मैं तो मुग्ध था उनके मधुर गान पर – जो सदा सर्वदा ही सुनने को मिलते। कबीर के सीधे-सादे पद, जो उनके कंठ से निकलकर सजीव हो उठते। आषाढ़ की रिमझिम है। समूचा गाँव खेतों में उतर पड़ा है। कहीं हल चल रहे हैं; कहीं रोपनी हो रही है। धान के पानी-भरे खेतों में बच्चे उछल रहे हैं। औरतें कलेवा लेकर मेड़ पर बैठी हैं। आसमान बादल से घिरा; धूप का नाम नहीं। ठंडी पुरवाई चल रही।

ऐसे ही समय आपके कानों में एक स्वर-तरंग झंकार-सी कर उठी। यह क्या है – यह कौन है। यह पूछना न पड़ेगा। बालगोबिन भगत समूचा शरीर कीचड़ में लिथड़े, अपने खेत में रोपनी कर रहे हैं। उनकी अंगुली एक-एक धान के पौधे को पंक्तिबद्ध, खेत में बिठा रही हैं।

उनका कंठ एक-एक शब्द को संगीत के जीने पर चढ़ाकर कुछ को ऊपर, स्वर्ग की ओर भेज रहा है और कुछ को इस पृथ्वी की मिट्टी पर खड़े लोगों के कानों की ओर! बच्चे खेलते हुए झूम उठते हैं; मेड़ पर खड़ी औरतों के होंठ काँप उठते हैं, वे गुनगुनाते लगती हैं; हलवाहों के पैर ताल से उठने लगते हैं, रोपनी करनेवालों की अंगुलियाँ एक अजीब क्रम से चलने लगती हैं! बालगोबिन भगत का यह संगीत है या जादू!

(i) लेखक भगत के किस गुण पर मुग्ध था?
(क) मधुर गान पर
(ख) उनके भोलेपन पर
(ग) सरल हृदय पर
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(क) मधुर गान पर

(ii) खेतों में बच्चे क्या कर रहे थे?
(क) बच्चे उछल रहे थे ।
(ख) गा और नाच रहे थे
(ग) खेत में धान रोप रहे थे
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(क) बच्चे उछल रहे थे ।

(iii) बालगोबिन भगत के गीतों का लोगों पर क्या प्रभाव पड़ता है?
(क) बच्चे खेलते हुए झूम उठते हैं
(ख) मेड़ पर खड़ी औरतों के होंठ काँप उठते हैं
(ग) हलवाहों के पैर ताल से उठने लगते हैं
(घ) उपर्युक्त सभी
उत्तर
(घ) उपर्युक्त सभी

(iv) आषाढ़ में खेतों में क्या चल रहा था?
(क) आसमान में बादल घिर आए
(ख) धूप नहीं दिख रही
(ग) दोनों सही
(घ) दोनों गलत
उत्तर
(ग) दोनों सही

(v) हिंदी के किस महीने के नाम का उल्लेख उपर्युक्त गद्यांश में किया गया है?
(क) सावन
(ख) जेठ
(ग) आषाढ़
(घ) फागुन
उत्तर
(क) सावन

प्रश्न 8.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 2 = 2 )

(i) लेखक सेकंड क्लास डिब्बे में क्यों बैठा?
(क) वह एकांत में कहानी लिखना चाहता था।
(ख) वह सेकंड क्लास का आनंद लेना चाहता था
(ग) वह नवाबी अंदाज़ दिखाना चाहता था।
(घ) उपर्युक्त में से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(क) वह एकांत में कहानी लिखना चाहता था।

(ii) बालगोबिन भगत किसके पद गाया करते थे?
(क) रहीम के
(ख) सूरदास के
(ग) कबीर के
(घ) तुलसीदास के
उत्तर
(ग) कबीर के

प्रश्न 9.
निम्नलिखित पद्यांश को पढ़कर पूछे गए प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए। (1 x 5 = 5)
कितना प्रामाणिक था उसका दुख ।
लड़की को दान में देते वक्त
जैसे वही उसकी अंतिम पूँजी हो ।
लड़की अभी सयानी नहीं थी।
अभी इतनी भोली सरल थी

कि उसे सुख का आभास तो होता था
लेकिन दुख बाँचना नहीं आता था
पाठिका थी वह धुंधले प्रकाश की
कुछ तुकों और कुछ लयबद्ध पंक्तियों की

(i) काव्यांश में किसके दुख को प्रामाणिक बताया गया है?
(क) बेटी के
(ख) माँ के
(ग) दोनों सही
(घ) दोनों गलत
उत्तर
(क) बेटी के

(ii) माँ को अपनी बेटी अंतिम पूँजी क्यों लग रही थी?
(क) वह उसको छोड़कर जा रही थी
(ख) उसकी सुख-दुख की साथी थी
(ग) उपर्युक्त दोनों कथन सत्य
(घ) माँ-बेटी का रिश्ता अटूट था ।
उत्तर
(ग) उपर्युक्त दोनों कथन सत्य

(iii) लड़की को अभी दुनियादारी की समझ नहीं है।’ यह भाव किस पंक्ति में व्यक्त होता है?
(क) वही उसकी अंतिम पूँजी थी
(ख) लड़की अभी सयानी नहीं थी
(ग) इतनी भोती सरल थी।
(घ) दुख बाँचना नहीं आता था
उत्तर
(ख) लड़की अभी सयानी नहीं थी

(iv) उपर्युक्त काव्यांश में किस रस की अनुभूति होती है?
(क) करुण रस
(ख) शांत रस
(ग) अद्भुत रस
(घ) वीर रस
उत्तर
(ख) शांत रस

(v) ‘पाठिका थी वह धुंधले प्रकाश की’ का भाव है
(क) वह बहुत सीधी थी।
(ख) उसे जीवन का कोई अनुभव नहीं था
(ग) उसका कभी दुख से सामना नहीं हुआ था
(घ) सभी कथन सही
उत्तर
(घ) सभी कथन सही

प्रश्न 10.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर विकल्पों में से चुनकर लिखिए।। (1 × 2 = 2)
(i) भ्रमरगीत में किसके माध्यम से उद्धव पर व्यंग्य किया गया है?
(क) पक्षियों के माध्यम से
(ख) भ्रमर अर्थात भँवरा के माध्यम से
(ग) बादलों के माध्यम से
(घ) इनमें से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(ख) भ्रमर अर्थात भँवरा के माध्यम से

(ii) कविता में निराला जी किसके माध्यम से उत्साह लाना चाहते हैं?
(क) नदी के माध्यम से
(ख) हवा के माध्यम से
(ग) बादल के माध्यम से
(घ) उपर्युक्त में से कोई नहीं
उत्तर
(ग) बादल के माध्यम से

खंड ‘ब’- वर्णनात्मक प्रश्न (अंक 40)

पाठ्यपुस्तक एवं पूरक पाठ्यपुस्तक (अंक 20)

प्रश्न 11.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर लगभग 25-30 शब्दों में लिखिए। (2 x 4 = 8)
(क) बालगोबिन भगत की दिनचर्या लोगों के अचरज का कारण क्यों थी?
(ख) ‘नम आँखों को गिनना स्याही फैलाना है’ आशय स्पष्ट कीजिए।
(ग) ‘लखनवी अंदाज़’ पाठ में निहित व्यंग्य को स्पष्ट कीजिए।
(घ) पान वाले का रेखाचित्र प्रस्तुत कीजिए।

प्रश्न 12.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर लगभग 25-30 शब्दों में लिखिए। (2 x 3 = 6)
(क) गोपियों ने उद्धव से योग की शिक्षा कैसे लोगों को देने की बात कही?
(ख) ‘कन्यादान’ कविता में माँ ने बेटी को क्या-क्या सीख दी?
(ग) परशुराम के क्रोध का क्या कारण था?

प्रश्न 13.
निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों में से किन्हीं दो प्रश्नों के उत्तर लगभग 40-50 शब्दों में लिखिए। (3 x 2 = 6)
(क) ‘माता का अँचल’ पाठ में माता-पिता का बच्चों के प्रति जो वात्सल्य व्यक्त हुआ है, उसे अपने शब्दों में लिखिए।
(ख) झिलमिलाते सितारों की रोशनी में नहाया गंतोक लेखिका को किस प्रकार सम्मोहित कर रहा था?
(ग) ‘नई दिल्ली में सब था… सिर्फ नाक नहीं थी।’ इस कथन के माध्यम से लेखक क्या कहना चाहता है?

लेखन (अंक 20)

प्रश्न 14.
निम्नलिखित विषयों में से किसी एक विषय पर दिए गए संकेत-बिंदुओं के आधार पर लगभग 80 से 100 शब्दों में अनुच्छेद लिखिए। (5 x 1 = 5)
(क) कंप्यूटर- आज की आवश्यकता
संकेत-बिंदु-

  • कंप्यूटर एक विचित्र उपकरण
  • बढ़ता उपयोग
  • इंटरनेट और कंप्यूटर
  • प्रयोग की सावधानियाँ।

(ख) विज्ञापनों का प्रभाव
संकेत-बिंदु-

  • विज्ञापन का अर्थ
  • विज्ञापनों का बोलबाला
  • विज्ञापन के लाभ
  • हानियाँ
  • विज्ञापनों का

हमारी जेब पर प्रभाव।

(ग) आतंकवाद- एक विश्वव्यापी समस्या
संकेत-बिंदु-

  • आतंकवाद का अर्थ
  • वैश्विक समस्या
  • आतंकवाद का उद्देश्य
  • रूप
  • उदाहरण
  • निष्कर्ष।

प्रश्न 15.
अपने क्षेत्र में पेड़-पौधों की अनियंत्रित कटाई को रोकने के लिए जिलाधिकारी को लगभग 80-100 शब्दों में एक पत्र लिखिए। (5 x 1=5)
अथवा
वाद-विवाद प्रतियोगिता में प्रथम आने पर मित्र को 80-100 शब्दों में बधाई पत्र लिखिए।

प्रश्न 16.
सम्राट पेन की बिक्री बढ़ाने के लिए प्रचार हेतु लगभग 25-50 शब्दों में एक विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए। (5 x 1 = 5)
अथवा
आपके मोहल्ले में एक नया पब्लिक स्कूल खुला है। उसके लिए 20-25 शब्दों में एक विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए।

प्रश्न 17.
कोरोना वैश्विक महामारी से बचाव हेतु मित्र को संदेश 30-40 शब्दों में लिखिए। (5 x 1 = 5)
अथवा
मुख्यमंत्री की ओर से गणतंत्र दिवस पर शुभकामना संदेश 30-40 शब्दों में लिखिए।

Electric Charges and Fields Class 12 Important Extra Questions Physics Chapter 1

Here we are providing Class 12 Physics Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields. Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Physics Chapter 1 Important Extra Questions Electric Charges and Fields

Electric Charges and Fields Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What is the value of the angle between the vectors \(\vec{p}\) and \(\vec{E}\) for which the potential energy of an electric dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{p}\), kept in an external electric field \(\vec{E}\), has maximum value.
Answer:
P.E. = –pEcos θ
P.E. is maximum when cos θ = – 1, i.e.
θ = 180°

Question 2.
Define electric field intensity at a point.
Answer:
Electric field intensity at a point is defined as the force experienced by a unit test charge placed at that point. Mathematically
we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 1
Question 3.
Two equal point charges separated by 1 m distance experience force of 8 N. What will be the force experienced by them, if they are held in water, at the same distance? (Given: Kwater = 80) (CBSE Al 2011C)
Answer:
The force in water is given by
Fw = \(\frac{F_{\text {air }}}{K}=\frac{8}{80}\) = 0.1 N

Question 4.
A charge ‘q’ is placed at the center of a cube of side l. What is the electric flux passing through each face of the cube? (CBSE AI 2012) (CBSE Sample Paper 2019)
Answer:
Φ = q/6ε0

Question 5.
Why do the electric field lines not form closed loops? (CBSE Al 2012C)
Answer:
It is due to the conservative nature of the electric field.

Question 6.
Two equal balls having equal positive charge ‘q’ coulomb are suspended by two insulating strings of equal length. What would be the effect on the force when a plastic sheet is inserted between the two? (CBSE AI 2014)
Answer:
It decreases because force ∝= \(\frac{1}{k}\) and k > 1.

Question 7.
What is the electric flux through a cube of side l cm which encloses an electric dipole? (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
Zero

Question 8.
Why are electric field lines perpendicular at a point on an equipotential surface of a conductor? (CBSE Al 2015C)
Answer:
So that no net force acts on the charge at the equipotential surface and it remains stationary.

Question 9.
What is the amount of work done in moving a point charge Q. around a circular arc of radius ‘r’ at the centre of which another point charge ‘q’ is located? (CBSE Al 2016)
Answer:
Zero.

Question 10.
How does the electric flux due to a point charge enclosed by a spherical Gaussian surface get affected when its radius is increased? (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
No change, as flux does not depend upon the size of the Gaussian surface.

Question 11.
Draw the pattern of electric field lines, when a point charge –Q is kept near an uncharged conducting plate. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The pattern is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 2
Question 12.
Draw a plot showing the variation of the electric field with distance from the center of a solid conducting sphere of radius R, having a charge + Q on its surface. (CBSE Delhi 2017C)
Answer:
The plot is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 3
Question 13.
Draw a graph to show the variation of E with perpendicular distance r from the line of charge (CBSE Delhi 2018)
A
Answer:
E = \(\frac{\lambda}{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r}\)
E ∝ \(\frac{1}{r}\)

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 4
The graph between E and r is as shown.

Question 14.
Define the term ‘electric flux’. Write its S.I. unit. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Electric flux: It is the measure of the number of electric field lines crossing a given area normally.

Mathematically the electric flux passing through an area \(\vec{dS}\) is given by
dΦ = \(\vec{E}\) . \(\vec{dS}\)

SI unit of electric flux is Nm2C-1 or Vm.

Question 15.
Why can the interior of a conductor have no excess charge in the static situation? (CBSE Ai 2019)
Answer:
Since the electric field inside the conductor is zero, electric flux through the closed surface is also zero. Hence by Gauss’s law, there is no net charge enclosed by the closed surface.

Question 16.
Two field lines never cross each other. Why?
Answer:
It is because at the point of intersection two perpendiculars can be drawn. Thus there will be two directions of the electric field at that point which is not possible.

Question 17.
In an electric field, an electron is kept freely. If the electron is replaced by a proton, what will be the force experienced by the proton?
Answer:
The magnitude of force will be the same but the direction will be reversed.

Question 18.
Consider the situation shown in the figure given below. What are the signs of q1 and q2?
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 5
q1 is negative and q2 is positive.

Question 19.
In the figure given below, at which point electric field is maximum?
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 6
The electric field is maximum at point C.

Question 20.
An uncharged insulated conductor A is brought near a charged insulated conductor B. What happens to the charge and potential of B?
Answer:
On bringing uncharged conductor A near a charged conductor B, charges are induced on A as shown in the figure below. As a result, the potential of conductor B is slightly lowered but the charge on it remains unchanged.

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 7

Question 21.
In a medium the force of attraction between two point electric charges, distance ‘d’ apart, is F. What distance apart should these be kept in the same medium so that the force between them becomes 3F?
Answer:
Let the new distance be ‘d’, since F ∝\(\frac{1}{r^{2}}\) ,
therefore \(\frac{F}{3 F}=\frac{r^{2}}{d^{2}}=\frac{1}{3} \Rightarrow r=\frac{d}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Question 22.
Find the value of an electric field that would completely balance the weight of an electron.
Answer:
mg = eE ⇒ E = \(\frac{m g}{e}\)
= \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 9.8}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}=5.57 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{Vm}^{-1}\)

Question 23.
Two charges, one +5 µC, and the other -5 µC are placed 1 mm apart. Calculate the electric dipole moment of the system.
Answer:
p = q × 2a = 5 × 10 -6 × 10-3 = 5 × 10-9 Cm

Question 24.
Two-point charges of+3 µC each are 100 cm apart. At what point on the line joining the charges will the electric intensity be zero?
Answer:
At the mid-point of the line joining the two point charges.

Question 25.
Four charges of came magnitude and same sign are placed at the corners of a square, of each side 0.1 m. What is electric field intensity at the center of the square?
Answer:
Zero.

Question 26.
Why should the electrostatic field be zero ‘ inside a conductor? (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
Because it does not contain any charge.

Question 27.
A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R1 and outer radius R2. A charge Q is placed at the center of the shell. What will be the surface charge density on the (i) inner surface, and (ii) the outer surface of the shell? (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
On inner surface
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 8
On the outer surface,
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 9
Question 28.
An arbitrary surface encloses a dipole. What is the electric flux through this surface? (NCERT Exemplar)
Answer:
Zero.

Electric Charges and Fields Important Extra Questions  Short Answer Type

Question 1.
(a) Electric field inside a conductor is zero. Explain.
(b) The electric field due to a point charge at any point near it is given as
E  =
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 10
what is the physical significance of this limit?
Answer:
(a) By Gauss theorem \(\phi \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d S}=\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\). Since there is no charge inside a conductor therefore in accordance with the above equation the electric field inside the conductor is zero.
(b) It indicates that the test charge should be infinitesimally small so that it may not disturb the electric field of the source charge.

Question 2.
Define the electric line of force and give its two important properties.
Answer:
It is a line straight or curved, a tangent to which at any point gives the direction of the electric field at that point.
(a) No two field lines can cross, because at the point of intersection two tangents can be drawn giving two directions of the electric field which is not possible.
(b) The field lines are always perpendicular to the surface of a charged conductor.

Question 3.
Draw electric field lines due to (i) two similar charges, (ii) two opposite charges, separated by a small distance.
Answer:
(a) The diagram is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 11
(b) The diagram is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 12
Question 4.
An electric dipole is free to move in a uniform electric field. Explain what is the force and torque acting on it when it is placed
(i) parallel to the field
Answer:
When an electric dipole is placed parallel to a uniform electric field, net force, as well as net torque acting on the dipole, is zero and, thus, the dipole remains in equilibrium.

(ii) perpendicular to the field
Answer:
When the dipole is placed perpendicular to the field, two forces acting on the dipole form a couple, and hence a torque acts on it which aligns its dipole along the direction of the electric field.

Question 5.
A small metal sphere carrying charge +Q. is located at the center of a spherical cavity in a large uncharged metallic spherical shell. Write the charges on the inner and outer surfaces of the shell. Write the expression for the electric field at the point P1(CBSE Delhi 2014C)
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 13
Charge on inner surface – Q.
Charge on outer surface + Q,
Electric field at point P = E = k\(\frac{Q}{r_{1}^{2}}\)

Question 6.
Two-point charges q and –2q are kept ‘d’ distance apart. Find the location of the point relative to charge ‘q’ at which potential due to this system of charges is zero. (CBSE Al 2014C)
Answer:
Let the potential be zero at point P at a distance x from charge q as shown
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 14
Now potential at point P is
V = \(\frac{k q}{x}+\frac{k(-2 q)}{d+x}\) = 0

Solving for x we have
x = d

Question 7.
Two small identical electrical dipoles AB and CD, each of dipole moment ‘p’ are kept at an angle of 120° as shown in the figure. What is the resultant dipole moment of this combination? If this system is subjected to the electric field (\(\vec{E}\)) directed along +X direction, what will be the magnitude and direction of the torque acting on this? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 15
Answer:
The resultant dipole moment of the combi-nation is
PR = \(\sqrt{p^{2}+p^{2}+2 p^{2} \cos 120^{\circ}}\) = p

since cos 120° = -1/2
This will make an angle of 30° with the X-axis, therefore torque acting on it is
τ=PE sin 30° = pE/2 (Along Z-direction)

Question 8.
A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R1 and outer radius R2. A charge Q is placed at the center of the spherical cavity. What will be surface charge density on (i) the inner surface, and (ii) the outer surface? (NCERT Exemplar)
Answer:
The induction of charges is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 16
Therefore surface charge density on the inner and the outer shell is on the outer surface is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 17
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 18

Question 9.
If the total charge enclosed by a surface is zero, does it imply that the electric field everywhere on the surface is zero? Conversely, if the electric field everywhere on a surface is zero, does it imply that the net charge inside is zero. (NCERT Exemplar)
Answer:
No, the field may be normal to the surface. However, the converse is true i.e. when the electric field everywhere on the surface be zero then the net charge inside it must be zero.

Electric Charges and Fields Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
(a) State Gauss theorem in electrostatics. Using it, prove that the electric field at a point due to a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet is independent of the distance from it.
Answer:
It states, “The net electric flux through any Gaussian surface is equal to \(\frac{1}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) times the net electric charge enclosed by the surface.

Mathematically, Φ =\( \phi \vec{E} \cdot d \vec{A}=\frac{q_{i n}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Consider an infinite plane sheet of charge. Let a be the uniform surface charge density, i.e. the charge per unit surface area. From symmetry, we find that the electric field must be perpendicular to the plane of the sheet and that the direction of E on one side of the plane must be opposite to its direction on the other side as shown in the figure below. In such a case let us choose a Gaussian surface in the form of a cylinder with its axis perpendicular to the sheet of charge, with ends of area A.

The charged sheet passes through the middle of the cylinder’s length so that the cylinder’s ends are equidistant from the sheet. The electric field has a normal component at each end of the cylinder and no normal component along the curved surface of the cylinder. As a result, the electric flux is linked with only the ends and not the curved surface.

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 19
Therefore by the definition of eLectric flux, the flux Linked with the Gaussian surface is given by
Φ = \(\oint_{A} \vec{E} \cdot \vec{\Delta} A\)
Φ = EA + EA = 2EA … (1)

But by Gauss’s Law
Φ = \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{\sigma A}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) [∵ q = σA] … (2)

From equations (1) and (2), we have
2EA = \(\frac{\sigma A}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) … (3)
E = \(\frac{\sigma}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\) …. (4)

This gives the electric field due to an infinite plane sheet of charge which is independent of the distance from the sheet.

(b) How is the field directed if (i) the sheet is positively charged, (ii) negatively charged? (C8SE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
(a) directed outwards
(b) directed inwards.

Question 2.
Use Gauss’s law to derive the expression for the electric field (\(\vec{E}\) ) due to a straight uniformly charged infinite line of charge λ Cm-1. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 20
Consider an infinitely Long, thin wire charged positively and having uniform Linear charge density λ. The symmetry of the charge distribution shows that must be perpendicular to the tine charge and directed outwards. As a result of this symmetry, we consider a Gaussian surface in the form of a cylinder with arbitrary radius r and arbitrary Length L. with its ends perpendicular to the wire as shown in the figure. Applying Gauss’s theorem to curved surface ΔA1 and circular surface ΔA2.

Φ EΔA1 cos 0°+ EΔA2 cos 90° = \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) = \(\frac{\lambda l}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) [∵ λ = \(\frac{q}{e}\)]
Or
E . 2πrl = \(\frac{\lambda l}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) ⇒ E = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\lambda}{r}\)

This is the expression for the electric field due to an infinitely long thin wire.
The graph is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 21
Question 3.
Obtain the expression for the potential energy of an electric dipole placed with its axis at an angle (θ) to an external electric field (E). What is the minimum value of the potential energy? (CBSE 2019C)
Answer:
The torque x acting on an electric dipole of dipole moment p placed in a uniform electric field E is given by:
τ = pEsinθ …(i)
where θ is the angle made by the dipole with the electric field E. The torque tends to align the dipole along the direction of the field. If the dipole is rotated through a small angle dθ against the torque, work has to be done, which is stored in the form of the potential energy of the dipole.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 22
Work done in rotating the dipole through the angle dθ against the torque τ is given by dw = τ dθ = pE sin θ dθ

If the dipole is rotated from θ1 to θ2, then
Total work is done,
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 23
W = – pE(cos θ2 – cos θ1)

This work done is stored as potential energy U.

U = – pE(cos θ2 – cos θ1)
If the dipole is rotated from θ1 = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) to θ2 =θ, then

U = – pE(cos θ – cos \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) )
= – pE(cos θ – 0)

U = – pE cos θ
minimum value of potential energy
U = – pE When θ = 0°

Question 4.
Why does the electric field inside a dielectric decrease when it is placed in an external electric field?
Answer:
When a dielectric is placed in an electric field (E0), it gets polarised, i.e. within the dielectric, an electric field (E) is induced in a direction opposite to that of the external field. Therefore, the net field within the dielectric decreases to \(\vec{E}_{0}\) – \(\vec{E}\)

Question 5.
Two-point charges +q and -2q are placed at the vertices ‘B’ and ‘C’ of an equilateral triangle ABC of side ‘a’ as given in the figure. Obtain the expression for (i) the magnitude and (ii) the direction of the resultant electric field at vertex A due to these two charges. (CBSE Al 2014 C)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 24
Answer:
The electric fields due to the two charges placed at B and C are inclined at an angle θ = 120° as shown
Now in magnitude, we have

EB = k\(\frac{q}{a^{2}}\) and
EC = k\(\frac{2q}{a^{2}}\) = 2 EB
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 25
Hence E = \(\sqrt{E_{B}^{2}+E_{c}^{2}+2 E_{B} E_{c} \cos \theta}\)
Or E = \(\sqrt{E_{B}^{2}+\left(2 E_{B}\right)^{2}+2 E_{B}\left(2 E_{B}\right) \cos 120^{\circ}}\)

On Solving we have
E = \(\sqrt{3} E_{B}\) = \(\sqrt{3} \frac{k q}{a^{2}}\)

Direction
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 26
Therefore B = 90°, the resultant is inclined at an angle of 90° with EB.

Question 6.
Four-point charges Q, q, Q, and q are placed at the corners of a square of side ‘a’ as shown in the figure.Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 27
Find the
(a) the resultant electric force on a charge Q and
(b) the potential energy of this system. (CBSEAI, Delhi 2018)
Answer:
(a) Let us find the force on charge Q at point C.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 28
Force due to charge Q placed at point A is
FA = k\(\frac{Q^{2}}{(a \sqrt{2})^{2}}\) =k\(\frac{Q^{2}}{2 a^{2}}\) along AC

Force due to the charge q placed at D
FD = k\(\frac{q Q}{a^{2}}\) alongDA

Force due to the charge q placed at B
FB = k \(\frac{q Q}{a^{2}}\) along BC

The resuLtant of FD and FB is
FBD = K\(\frac{q Q \sqrt{2}}{a^{2}}\) along AC

∴ net force of charge Q placed at point C is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 29
(b) PotentiaL energy of the system
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 30
Question 7.
A charge +Q is uniformly distributed within a sphere of radius R. Find the electric field, distant r from the center of the sphere where: (1) r < R and (2) r > R. (CBSEAI 2016C)
Answer:
For a solid sphere p = \( \frac{q}{\frac{4}{3} \pi R^{3}}\) = \(\frac{q}{\text { volume }}\)

Case 1. 0 < r < R The point Lies within the sphere.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 31
Using Gauss’s theorem
Let Q’ be the charge encLosed by Gaussian’s surface of radius r < R.

E(4πr²)=\(\frac{Q^{\prime}}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{Q^{\prime}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\)

From (i) and (ii)
E = \(\frac{Q r^{3}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2} R^{3}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q r}{R^{3}}\)

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 32

Case 2. For r > R
\(\oint \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\) = \(\frac{q_{\text {enclosed }}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

E(4πr²) = \(\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
E = \(\frac{Q}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\)

Question 8.
(a) An electric dipole is kept first to the left and then to the right of a negatively charged infinite plane sheet having a uniform surface charge density. The arrows p1 and p2 show the directions of its electric dipole moment in the two cases. Identify for each case, whether the dipole is in stable or unstable equilibrium. Justify each answer.Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 33
Answer:
p1: stable equilibrium, p2: unstable equilibrium. The electric field, on either side, is directed towards the negatively charged sheet and its magnitude is independent of the distance of the field point from the sheet. For position P1 dipole moment and electric field are parallel. For position p2, they are antiparallel.

(b) Next, the dipole is kept in a similar way (as shown), near an infinitely long straight wire having uniform negative linear charge density. Will the dipole be in equilibrium at these two positions? Justify your answer. (CBSE Sample Paper 2018-2019)

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 34
Answer:
The dipole will not be in equilibrium in any of the two positions.
The electric field due to an infinite straight charged wire is non-uniform (E ∝ 1/r).
Hence there will be a net non-zero force on the dipole in each case.

Question 9.
Two large parallel plane sheets have uniform charge densities +σ and -σ. Determine the electric field (i) between the sheets, and (ii) outside the sheets. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Let us consider two parallel planes charged conductors A and B carrying +ve and -ve charge density σ (charge per unit area). According to Gauss’ theorem, the electric intensity at P due to the charge on sheet A is

EA = \(\frac{\sigma}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\) (From A and B)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 35
The electric field at P due to charge on sheet B is
E= \(\frac{\sigma}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\) (From A to B)

The electric field at P is
E = EA + EB
= \(\frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Question 10.
Define electric flux and write its SI unit. The electric field components in the figure shown are : Ex = αx, Ey = 0, Ez = 0 where α = 100N/cm. Calculate the charge within the cube, assuming a = 0.1 m. (CBSE Sample Paper 2019)Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 36
Or
An electron falls through a distance of 1.5 cm in a uniform electric field of magnitude 2.0 × 104 N/C (figure a)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 37
(a) Calculate the time it takes to fall through this distance starting from rest.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 38
(b) If the direction of the field is reversed (figure b) keeping its magnitude unchanged, calculate the time taken by a proton to fall through this distance starting from rest. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
Electric Flux is the dot product of the electric field and area vector.
Φ = \(\oint \vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)

SI Unit: Nm2/C or Vm

For a given case
Φ = Φ1 – Φ2 = [Ex(atx= 2a) – Ex (atx = a)]a2
= [α(2a)-α(a)]a2 = αa3
= 104 × (0.1 )3 = 10 Nm2/C
But
Φ = \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

∴ q = ε0Φ = 8.854 × 10-12 × 10 C = 8.54 pC
Or
We have
F = qE

Acceleration, a = \(\frac{q E}{m}\)

Also
s = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) at2 [u = 0]
∴ t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 s}{a}}\)

(i) For the electron
a = \(\frac { eE}{ m }\)

∴ t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 s m}{e E}}\)

∴ t = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \times 10^{-2} \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 2.0 \times 10^{4}}}\) = 2.92 ns

(ii) for proton
t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 1.5 \times 10^{-2} \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 2 \times 10^{4}}}\)
= -.125 μs

Question 11.
What will be the total flux through the faces of the cube (figure) with the side of length ‘a’ if a charge q is placed at
(a) A: a corner of the cube.
(b) B: mid-point of an edge of the cube.
(c) C: center of the face of the cube.
(d) D: mid-point of B and C. {NCERJ Exemplar)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 39
Answer:
(a) The charge wilt is shared by eight cubes if it has to be enclosed. Therefore the flux through the cube will be one-eighth of the total flux. Φ = q/8ε0
(b) The charge will be shared by four cubes if it has to be enclosed. Therefore the flux through the cube will be one-fourth of the total flux. Φ = q/ 4ε0
(c) The charge will be shared by two cubes if it has to be enclosed. Therefore the flux through the cube will be one-half of the total flux. Φ = q/ 2ε0
(d) The charge will be shared by two cubes if it has to be enclosed. Therefore the flux through the cube will be one-half of the total flux. Φ = q/ 2ε0

Question 12.
Two charges q and -3q are placed fixed on the x-axis separated by distance ‘d’. Where should a third charge 2q be placed such that it will not experience any force? (NCERT Exemplar)
Answer:
The situation is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 40
Let the charge 2q be placed at a distance ‘x’ from charge q. For the charge 2q to experience zero force we have
\(\frac{2 q^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} x^{2}}=\frac{6 q^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}(d+x)^{2}}\)
(d + x)2 = 3x2

Solving for x we have
x = \(\frac{d}{2} \pm \frac{\sqrt{3} d}{2}\)
(-ve sign would be between q and -3q and hence is unacceptable.)

Therefore, we have
x = \(\frac{d}{2}+\frac{\sqrt{3} d}{2}=\frac{d}{2}(1+\sqrt{3})\) to the left of q.

Question 13.
(a) State Gauss’s law. Use it to deduce the expression for the electric field due to a uniformly charged thin spherical shell at points (i) inside and (ii) outside the shell. Plot a graph showing the variation of the electric field as a function of r > R and r < R. (r being the distance from the center of the shell) (CBSE Delhi 2011, Al 2013)
Answer:
Gauss’s law states that the net outward flux through any closed surface is equal to 1 /ε0 times the charge enclosed by the closed surface.

Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R and center at O. Let σ be the uniform surface charge density (charge per unit surface area) and q be the total charge on it. The charge distribution is spherically symmetric. Three cases arise

Case 1: at a point outside the spherical shell
In order to find the electric field at a point P outside the shell let us consider a Gaussian surface in the form of a sphere of radius r (r >>R).
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 41
By symmetry, we find that the electric field acts radially outwards and has a normal component at alt points on the Gaussian sphere. Therefore by definition of electric flux we have

Φ = E × A, where A is the surface area of the Gaussian sphere therefore
Φ = E × 4πr² …(1)

But by Gauss’s law
Φ = \(\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{\sigma A}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{\sigma \times 4 \pi R^{2}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) … (2)

from equations (1) and (2) it follows that
E × 4πr² = \(\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) Or E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q}{r^{2}}\)

E × 4πr² = \(\frac{\sigma \times 4 \pi R^{2}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Ē = \(\frac{\sigma R^{2}}{\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\) … (3)

It follows that the electric field due to a spherical shell outside it is same as that due to a point charge. Therefore for points Lying outside the spherical shell the shell behaves as if the entire charge is concentrated at the centre.

Case 2: at a point inside the spherical shell
In this case, the Gaussian surface Lies inside the shell. Since no charge is enclosed In this surface therefore we have

E × 4πr²=q00 [∵ q=0]
Therefore E = 0
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 42
(b) Two identical metallic spheres A and B having charges +4Q. and -10 Q are kept a certain distance apart. A third identical uncharged sphere C is first placed in contact with sphere A and then with sphere B. Spheres A and B are then brought in contact and then separated. Find the charges on the spheres A and B. (CBSEAI 2011C)
Answer:
The initial charge on the sphere A = + 4 Q.
The initial charge on the sphere B = -10 Q.

Since all the three spheres are identical, i.e. they have the same capacity, therefore when uncharged sphere C is placed in contact with A, the total charge is equally shared between them.

Charge on C after contact with A
= \(\frac{0+4 Q}{2}\) = 2Q

Charge on A after contact with C is 2Q.
When sphere C carrying a charge 2Q is placed in contact with B, again charges are equally shared between C and B equally.

Charge on C after it is in contact with B
= \(\frac{2 Q-10 Q}{2}\) = -4Q

Now when sphere A with a charge of 2Q. is placed in contact with B, with charge -4Q.

Charge are again shared
∴ charge on A or B = \(\frac{2 Q-4 Q}{2}\) = -Q.

Question 14.
(a) Define electric dipole moment. Is it a scalar or a vector? Derive the expression for the electric field of a dipole at a point on the equatorial plane of the dipole.
Answer:
It is defined as the product of the magnitude of either of the two charges and the distance between them.
For derivation see sol. 9(a) of LA-II.

(b) Draw the equipotential surfaces due to an electric dipole. Locate the points where the potential due to the dipole is zero. (CBSE Al 2013)
Answer:
The diagram is as shown
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 43
The zero potential points lie on the equatorial line.

Question 15.
(a) Using Gauss’s law obtain expressions for the electric field (i) inside, and (ii) outside a positively charged spherical shell.
(c) A Square plane sheet of side 10 cm is inclined at an angle of 30° with the direction of a uniform electric field of 200 NC“1. Calculate the electric flux passing through the sheet. (CBSE 2019C)
Answer:
(a) Spherical Shell
Consider a spherical shell of radius R. Let q be a charge on the shell. Let us find the electric field at a point P at a distance r from the center 0 of the spherical shell.

Case (i): When point P lies inside the spherical shell
From the point, P draws a Gaussian surface which will be a sphere of radius r.

From the Gauss’s Theorem,
\(\oint_{s} \vec{E} \cdot \vec{d} S=\frac{0}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) [∵ No charge exists inside the spherical shell]
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 44
Or
E = 0
i. e. electric field inside the charged spherical shell is zero.

Case (ii): When point P is lying outside the shell (i.e. r > R)
From point P, draw a Gaussian surface which will be a spherical shell of radius r. Let dS be a small area element on the Gaussian surface P.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 45
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 46
Or
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 47

i. e. the electric field outside the spherical shell behaves as if the whole charge is concentrated at the center of the spherical shell.

(b) Show graphically variation of the electric field as a function of the distance r from the center of the sphere.
Answer:
Variation of electric field E with distance
The given figure shows the variation of an electric field with distance from the center of the charged spherical shell.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 48
(c) Here E = 200 N/C, S = 0.1 × 0.1 = 0.01 m2
And θ = 90° – 30° = 60°

The electric flux linked with the square sheet
Φ = E S cos 60°
= 200 × 0.01 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) = 1.0 Nm2 C-1

Question 16.
A charge is distributed uniformly over a ring of radius ‘a’. Obtain an expression for the electric intensity E at a point on the axis of the ring. Hence show that for points at a large distance from the ring, it behaves like a point charge. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Consider a uniformly charged ring of radius ‘a’. Let the total charge on the ring be Q, Let us find the electric field on the axis of the ring at point P distance x from the center of the ring. Consider a segment of charge dQ as shown in the figure.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 49

The magnitude of etectñc field at P due to the segment is
dE=k\(\frac{d Q}{r^{2}}\) …(1)

This field can be resolved into its components: x component dEx = dE cos α an along the axis of the ring and y component dE perpendicular to the axis. Since these perpendicular components, due to alt the charge segments, are equal and opposite, therefore they cancel out each other. From the diagram we have r = \(\sqrt{x^{2}+a^{2}}\) and cos α = x/r, therefore we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 50 …(2)

In this case, all the segments of the ring give the same contribution to the field at P since they are all equidistant from this point. Thus we can easily sum over all segments to get the total electric field at point P
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 51
If the point of observation is far away, i.e. x >> a, then E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q}{x^{2}}\). This is the same as that for a point charge. Thus at far-off axial points, a charged ring behaves as if a point charge is situated at the center of the ring.

Question 17.
Two thin concentric and coplanar spherical shells, of radii ‘a’ and ‘b’ (b > a), carry charges, q, and Q respectively. Find the magnitude of the electric field, at a point distant x, from their common center for
(i) O < x < a
(ii) a ≤ x < b
(iii) b ≤ x < ∞ (CBSE Delhi 2016C)
Answer:
The diagram is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 52
(i) For 0 < x < a
Point Lies inside both the spherical shells.

∴ charge enclosed = 0
Hence, E(x) = 0

(ii) For a < x < b
Point is outside the spherical shell of radius ‘a’ but inside the spherical Shell of radius ‘b’.
Therefore
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 53

(iii) For b ≤ x< ∞
The point is outside of both the spherical shells. The total effect we charge at the center equals (Q + q).
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 54
Question 18.
(a) Define electric flux. Is It a scalar or a vector quantity?
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 55
A point charge q is at a distance of d/2 directly above the center of a square of side d, as shown In the figure. Us. Gauss’s law to obtain the expression for the electric flux through the square.
Answer:
The electric flux through a given surface is defined as the dot product of the electric field and area vector over that surface. It is a scalar quantity.

Constructing a cube of side ‘d’ so that charge ‘q’ gets placed within this cube (Gaussian surface)
According to Gauss’s law the electric flux
Φ = \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 56
This is the total flux through all the six faces of the cube.

Hence electric flux through the square (one face of the cube)
Φ = \(\frac{1}{6} \frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

(b) If the point charge is now moved to a distance ‘d’ from the center of the square and the side of the square is doubled, explain how the electric flux will be affected. (CBSE Al, Delhi 2018)
Answer:
If the charge is moved to a distance ‘d’ and the side of the square is doubled the cube will be constructed to have a side 2d but the total charge enclosed in it will remain the same. Hence the total flux through the cube and therefore the flux through the square will remain the same as before.

Question 19.
(a) Draw a graph to show the variation of E with perpendicular distance r from the line of charge.
Answer:
The required graph is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 57
(b) Find the work done in bringing a charge q from perpendicular distance r1 to r2 (r2 > r1). (CBSEAI, Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Work done in moving the charge “q”. through a smaLL displacement ‘dr’

dW = \(\vec{F}\) . \(\vec{dr}\) =q\(\vec{E}\) .\(\vec{dr}\)
dW = qE dr cos 0 = qEdr
dW= q x \(\frac{\lambda}{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r}\) dr

Hence work done in moving the charge from r1 to r2 (r2 > r1)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 58

Question 20.
Derive an expression for the torque acting on an electric dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{p}\) placed in a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\). Write the direction along which the torque acts.
OR
Derive an expression for the electric field at a point on the axis of an electric dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{p}\). Also, write its expression when the distance r >> a the length ‘a’ of the dipole. (CBSEAI 2019)
Answer:
Consider an electric dipole consisting of charges -q and +q and dipole length d is placed in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.

Let the dipole moment makes an angle θ with the direction of the electric field. The two charges experience force qE each.

These forces are equal, parallel, and opposite. Therefore, the net force acting on the dipole is
Fn = qE – qE = 0

Thus the net force acting on the dipole is zero.

These two forces constitute a couple. This applies a torque on the dipole given by
τ = either force × arm of the couple
τ = qE × d sin θ, where d sin θ is the arm of the couple.
τ = q d Esin θ, where p = qd, dipole moment
τ = pE sin θ.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 59
Consider an electric dipole consisting of -q and +q charges separated by a distance 2a as shown in the figure. Let P be the point of observation on the axial Line where the electric field has to be found. Let it be at a distance r from the center O of the dipole. Let us suppose that the dipole is placed in a vacuum.

Let E and EB be the electric fields at point P due to the charges at A and B respectively. Therefore,Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 60
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 61
The two fields at P are in opposite directions. Thus the resultant electric field at P is given by
E = \(\sqrt{E_{A}^{2}+E_{B}^{2}-2 E_{A} E_{B} \cos \theta}=\sqrt{\left(E_{B}-E_{A}\right)^{2}}\) = EB – EA

since θ = 1800 Therefore, the resultant electric field is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 62
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 63

Solving we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 64
where p = q 2a.
If the dipole is short then r >> a, therefore, ‘a’ is neglected as compared to r, hence
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 65

This field is in the direction of the dipole moment.

Question 21.
(a) Derive the expression for the electric field at a point on the equatorial line of an electric dipole. (CBSE 2019C)
Answer:
Consider an electric dipole consisting of charges -q and +q separated by a distance 2a as shown in the figure. Let the point of observation P lie on the. right bisector of the dipole AB at a distance r from its midpoint 0. Let EA and EB be the electric field intensities at point P due to charges at A and B, respectively.

The two electric fields have magnitudes
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 66
in the direction of AP

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 67
in the direction of PB.

The two fields are equal in magnitude but have different directions. Resolving the two fields EA and EB into their rectangular components, i.e. perpendicular to and parallel to AB. The components perpendicular to AB, i.e EA sinG and EB sinG being equal and opposite cancel out each other while the components parallel to AB, i.e. EA cos θ and EB cos θ being in the same direction add up as shown in the figure. Hence the resultant electric field at point P is given by
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 68
E = EAcosθ + EBcosθ
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 69
∵ cos θ = \(\frac{a}{\left(r^{2}+a^{2}\right)^{1 / 2}}\) and q 2a = p

For a short dipole r²,>>a² therefore
E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{p}{r^{3}}\)

(b) Discuss the orientation of the dipole in (a) stable, (b) unstable equilibrium in a uniform electric field. (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
For stable equilibrium \(\vec{P}\) is along \(\vec{E}\)
θ = 0°, τ = PE sin 0°, Torque alligns the dipole in the direction of field

For unstable equilibrium \(\vec{P}\) is antiparallel to \(\vec{E}\)
∵ θ = 180°, τ = PE sin 180° = 0, Torque alligns the dipole in a direction opposite to \(\vec{E}\).

Question 22.
(a) An electric dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{p}\) consists of point charges +q and -q separated by a distance 2a apart. Deduce the expression for the electric field due to the dipole at a distance x from the center of the dipole on its axial line in terms of the dipole moment. Hence show that in

the limit r >> a, \(\vec{E}\) → \(\frac{2 \vec{p}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{3}}\)
Answer:

Consider an electric dipole consisting of charges -q and +q and dipole length d is placed in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.

Let the dipole moment makes an angle θ with the direction of the electric field. The two charges experience force qE each.

These forces are equal, parallel, and opposite. Therefore, the net force acting on the dipole is
Fn = qE – qE = 0

Thus the net force acting on the dipole is zero.

These two forces constitute a couple. This applies a torque on the dipole given by
τ = either force × arm of the couple
τ = qE × d sin θ, where d sin θ is the arm of the couple.
τ = q d Esin θ, where p = qd, dipole moment
τ = pE sin θ.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 59
Consider an electric dipole consisting of -q and +q charges separated by a distance 2a as shown in the figure. Let P be the point of observation on the axial Line where the electric field has to be found. Let it be at a distance r from the center O of the dipole. Let us suppose that the dipole is placed in a vacuum.

Let E and EB be the electric fields at point P due to the charges at A and B respectively. Therefore,Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 60
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 61
The two fields at P are in opposite directions. Thus the resultant electric field at P is given by
E = \(\sqrt{E_{A}^{2}+E_{B}^{2}-2 E_{A} E_{B} \cos \theta}=\sqrt{\left(E_{B}-E_{A}\right)^{2}}\) = EB – EA

since θ = 1800 Therefore, the resultant electric field is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 62
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 63

Solving we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 64
where p = q 2a.
If the dipole is short then r >> a, therefore, ‘a’ is neglected as compared to r, hence
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 65

This field is in the direction of the dipole moment.

(b) Given the electric field in the region E = 2xî, find the net electric flux through the cube and the charge enclosed by it. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 70
Answer:
Since the electric field has only an x component, for faces perpendicular to the x-direction, the angle between E and ΔS is ± π/2.

Therefore, the flux Φ = E.ΔS is separately zero for each face of the cube except the two faces along the X-axis.

Now the magnitude of the electric field at the left face is
EL= 0 (x = 0 at the left face)

The magnitude of the electric field at the right face is
ER = 2x = 2a (x = a at the right face)

The corresponding fluxes are
ΦL = EL.ΔS = ΔS (\(\vec{E}_{L} \cdot \hat{n}_{\mathrm{L}}\)) = ELΔS COS θ
= – EL ΔS = 0, since θ =180°

ΦR = ER.ΔS = ERΔS cos θ = E ΔS = (2a)a2, since θ = 0°

Net flux through the cube
Φ = -ΦR + ΦL = 2a3 -0 = 2a3

We can use Gauss’s law to find the total charge q inside the cube.
We have Φ = q/ε0 or q = Φε0. Therefore, q = 2a3 × 8.854 × 10-12C

Question 23.
(a) Derive an expression for the electric field at any point on the equatorial line of an electric dipole.
Answer:
Consider an electric dipole consisting of charges -q and +q separated by a distance 2a as shown in the figure. Let the point of observation P lie on the. right bisector of the dipole AB at a distance r from its midpoint 0. Let EA and EB be the electric field intensities at point P due to charges at A and B, respectively.

The two electric fields have magnitudes
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 66
in the direction of AP

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 67
in the direction of PB.

The two fields are equal in magnitude but have different directions. Resolving the two fields EA and EB into their rectangular components, i.e. perpendicular to and parallel to AB. The components perpendicular to AB, i.e EA sinG and EB sinG being equal and opposite cancel out each other while the components parallel to AB, i.e. EA COS θ and EB cos θ being in the same direction add up as shown in the figure. Hence the resultant electric field at point P is given by
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 68
E = EA cos θ + EB cos θ
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 69
∵ cos θ = \(\frac{a}{\left(r^{2}+a^{2}\right)^{1 / 2}}\) and q 2a = p

For a short dipole r²,>>a² therefore
E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{p}{r^{3}}\)

(b) Two identical point charges, q each, are kept 2 m apart in the air. A third point charge Q of unknown magnitude and sign is placed on the line joining the charges such that the system remains in equilibrium. Find the position and nature of Q. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The third charge Q. wilt is in equilibrium if it experiences zero net force. Let it be placed at a distance x meter from the charge q.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 71
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 72

Solving for x, we have x= 1 m

For the equilibrium of charges “q”, the nature of charge Q must be opposite to the nature of charge q and should be placed at the center of two charges.

Question 24.
(a) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit.
Answer:
It is defined as the total number of electric field lines crossing a given area. The electric flux can be found by multiplying the component of the electric field in the direction of the area vector (or perpendicular to the area) with the area of the closed surface. It is measured in Nm2C--1.

(b) A small metal sphere carrying charge +Q is located at the center of a spherical cavity inside a large uncharged metallic spherical shell as shown in the figure. Use Gauss’s law to find the expressions for the electric field at points P1 and P2.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 73
Answer:
For point P, using Gauss law we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 74

Since E and dA are in the same direction therefore we have E = \(\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0} A}\)

Point P2 lies inside the metal, therefore the Gaussian surface drawn at P2 does not include a charge, hence the electric field at P2 is zero.

(c) Draw the pattern of electric field lines in this arrangement. (CBSEAI 2012C)
Answer:
The electric field lines are as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 75

Question 25.
(a) Deduce the expression for the torque acting on a dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{P}\) in the presence of a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\)
Answer:

Consider an electric dipole consisting of charges -q and +q and dipole length d is placed in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.

Let the dipole moment makes an angle θ with the direction of the electric field. The two charges experience force qE each.

These forces are equal, parallel, and opposite. Therefore, the net force acting on the dipole is
Fn = qE – qE = 0

Thus the net force acting on the dipole is zero.

These two forces constitute a couple. This applies a torque on the dipole given by
τ = either force × arm of the couple
τ = qE × d sin θ, where d sin θ is the arm of the couple.
τ = q d Esin θ, where p = qd, dipole moment
τ = pE sin θ.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 59
Consider an electric dipole consisting of -q and +q charges separated by a distance 2a as shown in the figure. Let P be the point of observation on the axial Line where the electric field has to be found. Let it be at a distance r from the center O of the dipole. Let us suppose that the dipole is placed in a vacuum.

Let E and EB be the electric fields at point P due to the charges at A and B respectively. Therefore,Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 60
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 61
The two fields at P are in opposite directions. Thus the resultant electric field at P is given by
E = \(\sqrt{E_{A}^{2}+E_{B}^{2}-2 E_{A} E_{B} \cos \theta}=\sqrt{\left(E_{B}-E_{A}\right)^{2}}\) = EB – EA

since θ = 180° Therefore, the resultant electric field is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 62
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 63

Solving we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 64
where p = q 2a.
If the dipole is short then r >> a, therefore, ‘a’ is neglected as compared to r, hence
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 65

This field is in the direction of the dipole moment.

(b) Consider two hollow concentric spheres S1 and S2 and enclosing charges 2Q and 4Q. respectively as shown in the figure, (i) Find out the ratio of the electric flux through them, (ii) How will the electric flux through the sphere S1 change if a medium of dielectric constant ‘er’ is introduced in the space inside S1 in place of air? Deduce the necessary expression. (CBSE Al 2014)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 76
Answer:
Φ1 = \(\frac{2 Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) and Φ2 = \(\frac{2 Q+4 Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{6 Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Hence ratio Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 77

When a dielectric of dielectric constant εr is introduced then we have
Φ1 = \(\frac{2 Q}{\varepsilon}=\frac{2 Q}{\varepsilon_{r} \varepsilon_{0}}\)

Question 26.
(a) Use Gauss’s theorem to find the electric field due to a uniformly charged infinitely large plane thin sheet with surface charge density σ.
Answer:
It states, “The net electric flux through any Gaussian surface is equal to \(\frac{1}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) times the net electric charge enclosed by the surface.

Mathematically, Φ =\( \phi \vec{E} \cdot d \vec{A}=\frac{q_{i n}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Consider an infinite plane sheet of charge. Let a be the uniform surface charge density, i.e. the charge per unit surface area. From symmetry, we find that the electric field must be perpendicular to the plane of the sheet and that the direction of E on one side of the plane must be opposite to its direction on the other side as shown in the figure below. In such a case let us choose a Gaussian surface in the form of a cylinder with its axis perpendicular to the sheet of charge, with ends of area A.

The charged sheet passes through the middle of the cylinder’s length so that the cylinder’s ends are equidistant from the sheet. The electric field has a normal component at each end of the cylinder and no normal component along the curved surface of the cylinder. As a result, the electric flux is linked with only the ends and not the curved surface.

Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 19

Therefore by the definition of eLectric flux, the flux Linked with the Gaussian surface is given by
Φ = \(\oint_{A} \vec{E} \cdot \vec{\Delta} A\)

Φ = EA + EA = 2EA … (1)

But by Gauss’s Law

Φ = \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{\sigma A}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) [∵ q = σA] … (2)

From equations (1) and (2), we have

2EA = \(\frac{\sigma A}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) … (3)

E = \(\frac{\sigma}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\) …. (4)

This gives the electric field due to an infinite plane sheet of charge which is independent of the distance from the sheet.

(b) An infinitely large thin plane sheet has a uniform surface charge density +σ. Obtain the expression for the amount of work done in bringing a point charge q from infinity to a point, distant r, in front of the charged plane sheet. (CBSE Al 2017)
Answer:
Work done
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 78

Numerical Problems:

Formulae for solving numerical problems

  • q = ±ne
  • F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{q_{1} q_{2}}{r^{2}}\)
  • Fmed = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} K} \frac{q_{1} q_{2}}{r^{2}}\) where K is dielectric constant.
  • Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 79
  • E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{2 p}{r^{3}}\) for an electric dipole on its axial line.
  • E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{p}{r^{3}}\) for an electric dipole on its equitorial line.
  • Torque on an electric dipole in a uniform electric field, τ = PE sin θ.
  • U = -pE cos θ, the potential energy of an electric dipole.
  • Φ = \(\oint \vec{E} \cdot d \vec{A}=\frac{q_{\text {in }}}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)
  • E = \(\frac{\sigma}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\) , electric field due to an infinite plane sheet of charge.

Question 1.
An electric dipole of length 2 cm is placed with its axis making an angle of 60° to a uniform electric field of 105 NC-1. If it experiences a torque of 8\(\sqrt{3}\) Nm, calculate the (i) magnitude of the charge on the dipole and (ii) potential energy of the dipole.
Answer:
(i) Using
q = τ / L E sin Φ

we have
q = 8N\(\sqrt{3}\) × 2 / 2 × 10-2 × 105 × \(\sqrt{3}\) = 8 × 10-3 C

(ii) Using U = -pE cos θ, we have
U = – 8 × 10-3 × 0.02 × 105 × 0.5 = – 8 J

Question 2.
A charge of 17.7 × 10-4 C is distributed uniformly over a large sheet of area 200 m2. Calculate the electric field intensity at a distance of 20 cm from it in the air.
Answer:
Given q = 17.7 × 10-4C, A = 200 m2, r = 20cm = 0.2 m

Using the relation
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 80

Question 3.
Two fixed point charges +4e and +e units are separated by a distance ‘a’. Where should the third point charge be placed for it to be in equilibrium?
Answer:
The third charge will be in equilibrium if it experiences zero net force. Let it be placed at a distance x from the charge 4e.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 81
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 82

4(a – x)2 = x2 solving for x we have
2 (a – x) = x or x = a/3

Question 4.
An electric field along the x-axis is given by \(\vec{E}\) = 100 îN/C for x > 0 and \(\vec{E}\) = -100 îN/C for x < 0. A right circular cylinder of length 20 cm and radius 5 cm lies parallel to the x-axis with its centre at the origin and one face at x = +10 cm, the other face at x = -10 cm. Calculate the net outward flux through the cylinder. (CBSE 2019C)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 83

r = 5 cm = 0.05 m
Φ = ?

Net outward flux through the cylinder
Φ = Φ1 + Φ2 + Φ3
= \(\vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}_{1}+\vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}_{2}+\vec{E} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}_{3}\)

= Eds1 cos 180° + Eds2 cos 90° + Eds3 cos 0°
= – Eds1 + Eds2 (0) + Eds cos 0°
= – (-100) ds + 100 ds
= (100 +100) ds
= 200 × πr² = 200 × 3.14 × (0.05)²
= 1.57 Nm2 C-1

Question 5.
A hollow cylindrical box of length 1m and area of cross-section 25 cm2 is placed in a three-dimensional coordinate system as shown in the figure. The electric field
in the region is given by \(\vec{E}\) = 50x î, where E is in NC-1 and x is in meters. Find

(i) Net flux through the cylinder.
Answer:
We can see from the figure that on the left face E and dS are antiparallel. Therefore, the flux is
ΦL = \(\vec{E}\).\(\vec{dS}\) = E dS cos 180°
= -50 × 1 × 25 × 10-4 = -0.125 N m2 C-1

On the right face, E and dS are parallel and therefore
ΦR = \(\vec{E}\).\(\vec{ds}\) = EdS cos 0°
= 50 × 2 × 25 × 10-4 = 0.250 N m2 C-1

Therefore net flux is – 0.125 + 0.250 = + 0.125 N m2 C-1

(ii) Charge enclosed by the cylinder. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 84
Answer:
q = Φε0 = 0.125 × 8.854 × 10-12 = 1.1 × 10-12C

Question 6.
(i) Define electric flux. Write its SI units,
Answer:
(i) It is defined as the number of electric field lines crossing a unit area perpendicular to the given area. It is measured in N m2 C-1

(ii) Consider a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\) = 5 × 103î NC-1. Calculate the flux of this field through a square surface of area 12 cm2 when
(a) its plane is parallel to the Y – Z plane, and
(b) the normal to its plane makes a 60° angle with the x-axis. (CBSE Delhi 2013C)
Answer:
Given \(\vec{E}\) = 5 × 103î N C-1, A = 12 cm2 = 12 × 10-4 m2

(a) Here \(\vec{E}\) = 5 × 103î N C-1
Area of square = 12 × 10-4 m2

The plane of surface area being parallel to YZ plane, hence
A = 12 × 10-4 î m2

Electric flux of the field
Φ = \(\vec{E}\) \(\vec{A}\) = (5 × 103 î). (12 × 10-4î) = 6 N C-1 m2
(b) When normal to the plane of surface area makes an angle of 60° with the X-axis, the flux is given by
Φ = EA cos 0 = 5 × 103 × 12 × 10-4 × 0.5
= 3 NC-1 m2

Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance Class 12 Important Extra Questions Physics Chapter 2

Here we are providing Class 12 Physics Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance. Important Questions for Class 12 Physics with Answers are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Physics Chapter 2 Important Extra Questions Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Express dielectric constant in terms of the capacitance of a capacitor.
Answer:
It is given by the expression K = \(\frac{c}{c_{0}}\) where C is the capacitance of the capacitor with dielectric and C0 is the capacitance without the dielectric.

Question 2.
On what factors does the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor depend?
Answer:

  1. Area of plates,
  2. The separation between the plates and
  3. Nature of dielectric medium between the plates.

Question 3.
What is the ratio of electric field intensities at any two points between the plates of a capacitor?
Answer:
The ratio is one, as the electric field is the same at all points between the plates of a capacitor.

Question 4.
Write a relation between electric displacement vector D and electric field E.
Answer:
\(\vec{D}\) = ε0 \(\vec{E}\) + \(\vec{P}\)

Question 5.
Write the relation between dielectric constant (K) and electric susceptibility χe
Answer:
K = 1 + χe

Question 6.
A hollow metal sphere c radius 5 cm is charged such that the potential on its surface is 10 V. What is the potential at the center of the sphere? (CDSE AI 2011)
Answer:
10 V

Question 7.
What is the geometrical shape of equipotential surfaces due to a single isolated charge? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Concentric circles.

Question 8.
Draw the equipotential surfaces due to an isolated point charge. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
These areas are shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 1
Question 9.
‘For any charge configuration, equipotential surface through a point is normal to the electric field’. Justify. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
This is because work done in moving a charge on an equipotential surface is zero. This is possible only if the equipotential surface is perpendicular to the electric field.

Question 10.
The given graph shows the variation of charge ‘q’ versus potential difference ‘V for two capacitors C1 and C2. Both the capacitors have the same plate separation but the plate area of C2 is greater than that of Cy Which line (A or B) corresponds to C1 and why? (CBSEAI 2014C)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 2
Answer:
Since C = ε0 A/d, since the area for C2 is more, therefore capacitance of C2 is more. From the graph greater the slope greater is than the capacitance, therefore, graph A belongs to capacitor C2. While graph B belongs to capacitance Cv

Question 11.
Write a relation for polarisation P of dielectric material in the presence of an external electric field E . (CBSE AI 2015)
Answer:
P = χe ε0 \(\vec{E}\).

Question 12.
Why are electric field lines perpendicular at a point on an equipotential surface of a conductor? (CBSE AI 2015C)
Answer:
So that no net force acts on the charge on the equipotential surface and it remains stationary.

Question 13.
Why does a given capacitor store more charge at a given potential difference when a dielectric is filled in between the plates?
Answer:
Because the capacitance of the capacitor increases on filling the dielectric medium in between the plates.

Question 14.
Why is the electrostatic potential inside a charged conducting shell constant throughout the volume of the conductor? (CBSE AI 2019)
Answer:
We know that E = – \(\frac{d V}{d r}\)
Inside a conductor, the electric field is zero and no work is done in moving a charge inside a conductor. Therefore, V is constant.

Question 15.
Does the charge given to a metallic sphere depend on whether it is hollow or solid? (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
If the capacitance of the two spheres, solid and hollow, is the same, then they will hold the same quantity of charge.

Question 16.
Is the electric potential necessarily zero at a place where the electric field is zero?
Answer:
No, it is not necessary. The electric field inside a hollow metallic conductor is zero but the electric potential is not zero.

Question 17.
In a parallel plate capacitor, the potential difference of 102 V is maintained between the plates. What will be the electric field at points A and B as shown in the figure below?
Answer:
The electric field between the plates of a capacitor is uniform; therefore the electric field at points A and B will be the same.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 3
Question 18.
If the plates of a charged capacitor are suddenly connected to each other by a wire, what will happen?
Answer:
The capacitor is discharged immediately.

Question 19.
Can you place a parallel plate capacitor of one farad capacity in your house?
Answer:
Ordinarily, it is not possible because the surface area of such a capacitor will be extra-large.

Question 20.
Is there any conductor which can be given almost unlimited charge?
Answer:
Yes, the earth.

Question 21.
What would be the work done if a point charge + q is taken from a point A to a point B on the circumference of a circle drawn with another point charge + q at the center?
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 4
Answer:
Zero.

Question 22.
Sketch a graph to show how a charge Q, acquired by a capacitor of capacitance, C, varies with the increase in the potential difference between the plates.
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 5
Question 23.
In a parallel plate capacitor, the capacitance increases from 4 μF to 80 μF, introducing a dielectric medium between the plates. What is the dielectric constant of the medium?
Answer:
The dielectric constant is given by
K = \(\frac{80}{4}\) = 20

Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Draw a plot showing the variation of (i) electric field (E) and (ii) electric potential (V) with distance r due to a point charge Q. (CBSE Delhi 2012)
Answer:
The plot is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 6
Question 2.
Two identical capacitors of 10 pF each are connected in turn (i) in series and (ii) in parallel across a 20 V battery. Calculate the potential difference across each capacitor in the first case and the charge acquired by each capacitor in the second case. (CBSE AI 2019)
Answer:
(i) Since the two capacitors have the same capacitance, therefore, the potential will be divided amongst them. Hence V = 10 V each
(ii) Since the capacitors are connected in parallel, therefore, potential difference = 20 V
Hence charge Q = CV = 10 × 20 = 200 pC

Question 3.
A point charge ‘q’ is placed at O as shown in the figure. Is VA – VB positive, negative, or zero, if ‘q’ is an (i) positive, (ii) negative charge? (CBSE Delhi 2011, 2016)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 7
Answer:
If VA – VB = \(\frac{q}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{OA}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{OB}}\right)\)

As OA < OB
∴ If q is positive then VA– VB is positive and
if q is negative VA – VB is also negative.

Question 4.
The graph shows the variation of voltage V across the plates of two capacitors A and B versus charge Q stored on them. Which of the two capacitors has higher capacitance? Give a reason for your answer.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 8
Answer:
Capacitor A has higher capacitance. We know that capacitance C = Q/V.

For capacitor A
\(c_{A}=\frac{Q}{V_{A}}\)

For capacitor B
\(c_{B}=\frac{Q}{V_{B}}\)

As VB > VA
∴ CB < CA
Thus capacitance of A is higher.

Question 5.
A test charge ‘q’ is moved without acceleration from A to C along the path from A to B and then from B to C in electric field E as shown in the figure,
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 9
(i) Calculate the potential difference between A and C
Answer:
(i) dV = – E dr = – E (6 – 2) = – 4E

(ii) At which point (of the two) is the electric potential more and why? (CBSE AI 2012)
Answer:
Electric potential is more at point C as dV = – Edr, i.e. the electric potential decreases in the direction of the electric field.

Question 6.
A slab of material of dielectric constant K has the same area as that of the plates of a parallel plate capacitor but has the thickness d/2, where d is the separation between the plates. Find out the expression for its capacitance when the slab is inserted between the plates of the capacitor. (CBSE AI 2013)
Answer:
Given t = d/2, C = ?
We know that when a dielectric of thickness ‘t’ is inserted between the plates of a capacitor, its capacitance is given by
C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d-t+\frac{t}{K}}\)

Hence we have
C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d-\frac{d}{2}+\frac{d}{2 K}}=\frac{2 K \varepsilon_{0} A}{d(1+K)}\)

Question 7.
Two-point charges q and -2q are kept ‘d’ distance apart. Find the location of the point relative to charge ‘q’ at which potential due to this system of charges is zero. (CBSE Al 2014C)
Answer:
Let the potential be zero at point P at a distance x from charge q as shown
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 20

Now potential at point P is
V = \(\frac{k q}{x}+\frac{k(-2 q)}{d+x}\) = 0

Solving for x we have
x = d

Question 8.
Four-point charges Q, q, Q., and q are placed at the corners of a square of side ‘a’ as shown in the figure.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 21
Find the potential energy of this system. (CBSEAI, Delhi 2018)
Answer:
The potential energy of the system
U = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left(4 \frac{q Q}{a}+\frac{q^{2}}{a \sqrt{2}}+\frac{Q^{2}}{a \sqrt{2}}\right)\)

U = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} a}\left(4 q Q+\frac{q^{2}}{\sqrt{2}}+\frac{Q^{2}}{\sqrt{2}}\right)\)

Question 9.
Three-point charges q, -4q, and 2q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of side T as shown in the figure. (CBSE Delhi 2018)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 22
Find out the amount of the work done to separate the charges at infinite distance. (CBSE AI, Delhi 2018)
Answer:
Net potential energy of the system
= \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{q^{2}}{l}[-4+2-8]=\frac{5 q^{2}}{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0} l}\)

Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Two-point charges 2 μC and —2 μC are placed at points A and B 6 cm apart.
(a) Draw the equipotential surfaces of the system.
Answer:
The diagram is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 10
(b) Why do the equipotential surfaces get closer to each other near the point charges? (CBSEAI2O11C)
Answer:
We know that E = – dV/dr
Therefore, dr =- dV/E
Since near the charge, electric field E is large, dr will be less.

Question 2.
(a) Obtain the expressions for the resultant capacitance when the three capacitors C1, C2, and C3 are connected (i) in parallel and then (ii) in series.
Answer:
(i) Parallel combination of three capacitors.
Let three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2, and C3 be connected in parallel, and potential difference V be applied across A and B. If q be total charge flowing in the circuit and q1 q2 and q3 be charged flowing across C1, C2, and C3 respectively, then
q = q1+ q2 + q3
or q = C1v + C2V + C3V …(i)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 12

If CP is the capacitance of the arrangement in parallel, then
q = CPV

So equation (i) becomes
CPV = C1V + C2V + C3V
Or
CP = C1 + C2 + C3

(ii) Series combination of three capacitors Let three capacitors C1, C2, and C3 be connected in series. Let q charge be flowing through the circuit.
If V1, V2, and V3 be potential differences across the plates of the capacitor and V be the potential difference across the series combination, then
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 13
V = V1 + V2 + V3
Or
V = \(\frac{q}{C_{1}}+\frac{q}{C_{2}}+\frac{q}{C_{3}}\) … (i)

If Cs is the capacitance of series combination, then V = \(\frac{q}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{s}}}\).

So the equation (i) becomes
\(\frac{q}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{q}{\mathrm{C}_{1}}+\frac{q}{\mathrm{C}_{2}}+\frac{q}{\mathrm{C}_{3}}\)
Or
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{C}_{1}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{C}_{2}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{C}_{3}}\)

(b) In the circuit shown in the figure, the charge on the capacitor of 4 μF is 16 μC. Calculate the energy stored in the capacitor of 12 μF capacitance. (CBSE 2019C)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 11
Answer:
Charge q across 4 μF Capacitor is 10 μc Potential difference across the capacitor of capacitance 4 μF will be
V= \(\frac{q}{C}=\frac{16 \mu C}{4 \mu F}=\frac{16 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{C}}{4 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~F}}\)=4V

∴ Potential across 12 μF Capacitors
= 12V – 4V = 8V

Energy stored in the capacitors of capacitance C = 12 μF

U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CV2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 12 × 10-6 × 82 joule
= 384 × 10-6 J = 384 μJ

Question 3.
Two identical plane metallic surfaces A and B are kept parallel to each other in the air, separated by a distance of 1 cm as shown in the figure.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 14
A is given a positive potential of 10 V and the outer surface of B is earthed.
(i) What is the magnitude and direction of the uniform electric field between Y and Z?
Answer:
The electric field between the plates is
E = \(\frac{V}{d}\) = 103 V m-1
directed from plate A at the higher potential to plate B at a lower potential, i.e. from Y to Z

(ii) What is the work done in moving a charge of 20 µC from X to Y?
Answer:
Since X and Y are on the same plate A, which is an equipotential surface, work done in moving a charge of 20 µC from X to Y on the equipotential surface is zero.

Question 4.
(i) Draw the equipotential surfaces corresponding to a uniform electric field in the z-direction.
Answer:
The equipotential surfaces are as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 15
Equipotential surfaces

(ii) Derive an expression for the electric potential at any point along the axial line of an electric dipole. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Consider an electric dipole of length 2a and having charges +q and -q. Let us find the potential on the axial line at point P at a distance OP = x from the center of the dipole.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 16

Now potential at point P is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 17
Question 5.
A network of four capacitors, each of capacitance 15 µF, is connected across a battery of 100 V, as shown in the figure. Find the net capacitance and the charge on the capacitor C4. (CBSE Al 2012C)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 18
Answer:
Capacitors C1 C2 and C3 are in series, therefore their equivalent capacitance is
\(\frac{1}{C_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{1}{C_{1}}+\frac{1}{C_{2}}+\frac{1}{C_{3}}=\frac{1}{15}+\frac{1}{15}+\frac{1}{15}=\frac{3}{15}\)

Hence CS = 5 µF
Now CS and C4 are in parallel, hence
CP = CS + C4 = 5 + 15 = 20 µF

Now C4 is connected to 100 V, therefore charge on it is
Q = CV=15 × 10-6 × 100=15 × 10-4 C

Question 6.
A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V. It is then connected to another uncharged capacitor having the same capacitance. Find out the ratio of the energy stored in the combined system to that stored initially in the single capacitor. (CBSE AI 2014)
Answer:
Ui = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CV2

When the capacitors are connected then the energy stored is
UF = \(\frac{1}{2}\left(C_{1}+C_{2}\right)\left(\frac{C_{1} V_{1}+C_{2} V_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}\right)^{2}\)

Since C1 = C2 = C, and V2 = 0, we have
Uf = \(\frac{1}{2}(C+C)\left(\frac{C V}{C+C}\right)^{2}=\frac{1}{2}(2 C) \times \frac{V^{2}}{4}=\frac{1}{4} C V^{2}\)

Hence we have
\(\frac{U_{f}}{U_{i}}=\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 7.
An isolated air capacitor of capacitance C0 is charged to a potential V0. Now if a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is inserted between its plates, completely filling the space between the plates, then how to do the following change, when the battery remains connected
(i) capacitance,
Answer:
When the battery remains connected, the potential on the capacitor does not change.
The capacitance of the capacitor becomes K times the original value, i.e. C = K C0.

(ii) charge
Answer:
Now new charge is Q = CV = K C0 V = K Q0.

(iii) the field between the plates
Answer:
The field between the plates becomes
E = \(\frac{V}{d}=\frac{V_{0}}{d}\) = E0, i.e. no change.

(iv) energy stored by the capacitor?
Answer:
The energy stored becomes
U = \(\frac{1}{2} C V^{2}=\frac{1}{2} K C_{0} V^{2}\) = KU0.

Question 8.
An isolated air capacitor of capacitance C0 is charged to a potential V0. Now if a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is inserted between its plates, completely filling the space between the plates, then how to do the following change, when the battery is disconnected
(i) charge
Answer:
If battery is disconnected then charge remains same, Q = Q0

(ii) electric field between the plates,
Answer:
V = \(\frac{V_{0}}{K}\) ,
∴E = \(\frac{E_{0}}{K}\) ,

(iii) capacitance
C = KCO [∵ C = \(\frac{Q_{0}}{V}=\frac{Q_{0}}{V_{0} / K}=\frac{K Q_{0}}{V_{0}}\)]

(iv) energy stored by the capacitor
U = \(\frac{U_{0}}{K}\left[U=\frac{1}{2} C V^{2}=\frac{1}{2}\left(K C_{0}\right)\left(\frac{V_{0}}{K}\right)^{2}\right]\)

Question 9.
The figure shows two identical capacitors, C1 and C2, each of 1 µF capacitance connected to a battery of 6 V. Initially switch ‘S’ is closed. After some time ‘S’ is left open and dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K = 3 are inserted to fill completely the space between the plates of the two capacitors. How will (i) the charge and (II) potential difference between the plates of the capacitors be affected after the slabs are inserted? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 19
Answer:
When switch S is opened then capacitor C1 remains connected to the battery white capacitor C2 is disconnected. Thus for the two capacitors, we have

Physical quantity Capacitor C1 Capacitor C2
Charge Becomes K times, i.e. Q = CV = K C0V = 3 × 1 × 10-6 × 6 = 1.8 × 10-5 C Remains same Q = Q0  = CV = 1 × 10-6 × 6 = 6 × 10-6 C
Potential difference Remains same V = V0 = 6 V Becomes 1/K times V =V0/K = 6/3 = 2V

Question 10.
A particle, having a charge +5 µC, is initially at rest at the point x = 30 cm on the x axis. The particle begins to move due to the presence of a charge Q that is kept fixed at the origin. Find the kinetic energy of the particle at the instant it has moved 15 cm from its initial position if (i) Q = +15 µC and (ii) Q = -15 µC (CBSE Sample Paper 2018-19)
Answer:
From energy conservation, Ui + Ki = Uf + Kf
kQq/ri + 0 = kQq/rf + Kf
Kf = kQq (1/ri — 1/rf)

When Q is +15 µC, q will move 15 cm away from it. Hence rf = 45 cm
Kf = 9 × 109 × 15 × 10-6 × 5 × 10-6 [1/(30 × 10-6) – 1/(45 × 10-2)] = 0.75 J

When Q is -15 µC, q will move 15 cm towards it. Hence rf = 15 cm Kf = 9 × 109 × (-15 × 10-6) × 5 × 106 [1/(30 × 10-2) – 1/(15 × 10-2)] = 2.25 J

Question 11.
Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R, both have same surface charge density σ. They are brought in contact and separated. What will be new surface charge densities on them? (NCERT Exemplar)
Answer:
Let the two spheres have charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Since σ1 = σ2, before contact, we have
\(\frac{Q_{1}}{4 \pi R^{2}}=\frac{Q_{2}}{4 \pi(2 R)^{2}}\)
Or
Q2 = 4 Q1

After contact
Let q1 and q2 be the charges on them, then
q1 + q2 = Q1 + Q2= Q1 + 4Q1 = 5Q1 = 5(σ × 4πr²)

The two will exchange charge till their potentials are equal, therefore we have
\(\frac{q_{1}}{R}=\frac{q_{2}}{2 R}\)
Or
q2 = 2 q1

Therefore 3q1 = 5(σ × 4πr²)
Or
q1 = \(\frac{5}{3}\)(σ x 4πr²) and q2 = 2q1 = \(\frac{10}{3}\)5(σ x 4πr²)

Therefore
σ1 = \(\frac{q_{1}}{4 \pi R^{2}}=\frac{5}{3}\left(\frac{\sigma \times 4 \pi R^{2}}{4 \pi R^{2}}\right)=\frac{5 \sigma}{3}\)
And
σ2 = \(\frac{q_{2}}{4 \pi(2 R)^{2}}=\frac{10}{3}\left(\frac{\sigma \times 4 \pi R^{2}}{4 \pi(2 R)^{2}}\right)=\frac{5 \sigma}{6}\)

Question 12.
(a) Derive an expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor when the space between the plates is partially filled with a dielectric medium of dielectric constant ‘K’.
Answer:
Consider a parallel plate capacitor having each plate of area A and separated by a distance d. When there is a vacuum between the two plates, the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor is given by
C0 = ε0 A/d.

Suppose that when the capacitor is connected to a battery, the electric field of strength E0 is produced between the two plates of the capacitor. Further, suppose that when a dielectric slab of thickness t (t < d) is introduced between the two plates of the capacitor as shown in the figure, the electric field reduces to E due to the polarisation of the dielectric. Therefore between the two plates of the capacitor, over a distance of t, the strength of the electric field is E, and over the remaining distance (d – f)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 23
the strength is E0. If V is the potential between the plates of the capacitor, then

V = Et + E0(d – t)
Since E = E0/K where K is the dielectric constant, the above equation becomes

V = \(\frac{E_{0}}{K} t+E_{0}(d-t)=E_{0}\left(d-t+\frac{t}{K}\right)\)

The electric field between the plates of the capacitor is given by
E0 = σ / ε0 = Q/ A ε0

Hence the potential between the two plates becomes.
V = \(E_{0}\left(d-t+\frac{t}{K}\right)=\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0} A}\left(d-t+\frac{t}{K}\right)\)

Hence the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor is given
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 24

∴ clearly, C > C0. Therefore, capacitance increases in the presence of a dielectric medium.

(b) Explain why the capacitance decreases when the dielectric medium is removed from between the plates.
Answer:
On removing the dielectric, the capacitance will decrease.

Question 13.
(a) Obtain the expression for the energy stored per unit volume in a charged parallel plate capacitor.
(b) The electric field inside a parallel plate capacitor is E. Find the amount of work done in moving a charge q over a closed rectangular loop a b c d a. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 25
Answer:
(a) Suppose the capacitor is charged fully, its final charge is Q. and a final potential difference is V. These are related as Q = CV

Let q and V be the charge and potential difference, respectively.

At an intermediate stage during charging process q = CV. At this stage the small work done dW to transfer an additional charge dq is

dW = Vdq = \(\frac{q d q}{C}\)

The total work W needed to increase the capacitor’s charge q from zero to its final value Q is given by
W = \(\int_{0}^{w} d W=\int_{0}^{Q} \frac{q d q}{C}=\frac{1}{C} \int_{0}^{Q} q d q\)
Or
W = \(\frac{1}{C}\left|\frac{q^{2}}{2}\right|_{0}^{Q}=\frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}\)

This work is stored in the capacitor in the form of its electric potential energy. Hence,
U = \(\frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}\) … (1)

substituting Q = CV in equation (1) we have
U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CV2

Energy density = Energy stored per unit volume
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 26

(b) Since the surface is an equipotential surface, work done is zero.

Question 14.
(a) Derive the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor having plate area A and plate separation d.
Answer:
Suppose Q. is the charge on the capacitor, and c is the uniform surface charge density on each plate as shown in the figure. Therefore by Gauss’s theorem, the electric field between the plates of the capacitor (neglecting fringing of electric field at the edges) is given by
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 27
E = \(\frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0} A}\) …. (1)

The field is uniform, and the distance between the plates is d, so the potential difference between the two plates is
V = Ed = \(\frac{1}{\varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q d}{A}\) ….. (2)

Therefore by the definition of capacitance we have
C = \(\frac{Q}{V}=\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) …. (3)

This gives the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with a vacuum between plates.

(b) Two charged spherical conductors of radii R1 and R2 when connected by a conducting wire acquire charges q1 and q2 respectively. Find the ratio of their surface charge densities in terms of their radii. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:

The ratio of the surface charge densities is given by
\(\frac{\sigma_{1}}{\sigma_{2}}=\frac{q_{1}}{4 \pi R_{1}^{2}} \times \frac{4 \pi R_{2}^{2}}{q_{2}}\) ….(4)

Now when they are connected with a wire, their potentiaLs wilt be same: therefore, from the expression.
V = \(\frac{Q}{c}=\frac{Q}{R}\)

∵ C = 4πε0R for a spherical body
∴\(\frac{q_{1}}{q_{2}}=\frac{R_{1}}{R_{2}}\)

Substituting in equation (4) we have
\(\frac{\sigma_{1}}{\sigma_{2}}=\frac{R_{1}}{R_{1}^{2}} \times \frac{R_{2}^{2}}{R_{2}}=\frac{R_{2}}{R_{1}}\)

Question 15.
(a) Describe briefly the process of transferring the charge between the two plates of a parallel plate capacitor when connected to a battery. Derive an expression for the energy stored in a capacitor.
Answer:
The electrons are transferred to the positive terminal of the battery from the metallic plate connected to the positive terminal, leaving behind a positive charge on it. Similarly, the electrons move on to the second plate from the negative terminal, hence it gets negatively charged. This process continues till the potential difference between the two plates becomes equal to the potential of the battery.

Suppose the capacitor is charged fully; its final charge is Q and the final potential difference is V.
These are related as Q = CV

Let q and V be the charge and potential difference respectively, after some time during the charging of the capacitor, then q = CV. At this time, the small work done dW required to transfer an additional charge dq is given by

dW = Vdq = \(\frac{q d q}{C}\)

The total work W needed to increase the capacitor’s charge q from zero to its final value Q is given by
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 28

This work is stored in the capacitor in the form of its electric potential energy. Hence,
U = \(\frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}\) …(1)

Substituting Q= CVin equation (1) we have
U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CV2

(b) A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery to a potential difference V. It is disconnected from the battery and then connected to another uncharged capacitor of the same capacitance. Calculate the ratio of the energy stored in the combination to the initial energy on the single capacitor. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The charge stored on the capacitor q = CV, when it is connected to the uncharged capacitor of same capacitance, sharing of charge, takes place between the two capacitors till the potential of both the capacitors becomes V/2.

Energy stored on the combination (U2)
= \(\frac{1}{2} C\left(\frac{V}{2}\right)^{2}+\frac{1}{2} C\left(\frac{V}{2}\right)^{2}=C\left(\frac{V}{2}\right)^{2}=\frac{C V^{2}}{4}\)

Energy stored on single capacitor before connecting
U1 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) CV2

Ratio of energy stored in the combination to that in the single capacitor.
\(\frac{U_{2}}{U_{1}}=\frac{C V^{2} / 4}{C V^{2} / 2}=\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 16.
(a) Obtain the expression for the potential due to an electric dipole of dipole moment p at a point ‘x’ on the axial line.
(b) Two identical capacitors of plate dimensions l × b and plate separation d have dielectric slabs filled In between the space of the plates as shown In the figures.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 29
Obtain the relation between the dielectric constants K, K1, and K2. (CBSE Al 2013C)
Answer:
(a) Consider an electric dipole of length 2a and having charges + q and — q. Let us find the potential on the axial Une at point P at a distance OP = x from the center of the dipole.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 30
Now potential at point P is
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 31

(b) When there is no dieLectnc then
C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} l b}{d}\)

For the first capacitor
C’ = \(\frac{K \varepsilon_{0} l b}{d}\) = KC

The second case is a case of two capacitors connected in paralleL, therefore
C1 = \(\frac{K_{1} \varepsilon_{0} l b}{2 d}\) and
C2 = \(\frac{K_{2} \varepsilon_{0} l b}{2 d}\)

These two are connected in parallel, therefore we have
C” = C1 + C2 = \(\frac{K_{1} \varepsilon_{0} l b}{2 d}\) + \(\frac{K_{2} \varepsilon_{0} l b}{2 d}\)
= C\(\left(\frac{K_{1}+K_{2}}{2}\right)\)

If the capacitance in each case be same, then C’ = C”

Hence K= \(\left(\frac{K_{1}+K_{2}}{2}\right)\)

Question 17.
(a) Explain using suitable diagrams the difference in the behavior of a
(i) conductor:
Answer:
The diagram is as shown.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 32
When a conductor is placed in an external electric field, the free charge carriers move and charge distribution in the conductor adjusts itself in such a way that the electric field due to induced charges opposes the external field within the conductor. This happens until in the static situation, the two fields cancel each other and the net electrostatic field in the conductor is zero.

(ii) dielectric In the presence of the external electric field. Define the term polarisation of a dielectric and write its relation with susceptibility.
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 34
In a dielectric, this free movement of charges is not possible. It turns out that the external field induces dipole moment by stretching or re-orienting molecules of the dielectric. The collective effect of all the molecular dipole moments is that the net charges on the surface of the dielectric produce a field that opposes the external field. However, the opposing field so induced does not exactly cancel the external field. It only reduces it. The extent of the effect depends on the nature of the dielectric.

Dielectric polarization is defined as the dipole moment per unit volume of a dielectric. It is related to susceptibility as P = χeε0\(\vec{E}\)

(b) A thin metallic spherical shell of radius R carries a charge Q on its surface. A point charge is placed at its center C and another charge +2Q. outside the shell, at a distance r from the center as shown in the figure. Find (i) the force on the charge at the center of the shell and at the point A and
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 33
Answer:
(i) F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q^{2}}{2 R^{2}}\) and
F = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{(Q+Q / 2) \times 2 Q}{r^{2}}\)

(ii) the electric flux through the shell. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
Flux = \(\frac{Q}{2 \varepsilon_{0}}\)

Question 18.
(a) Define the SI unit of capacitance.
Answer:
The capacity of a capacitor is said to be one farad when a charge of 1 coulomb is required to raise the potential difference by 1 volt.

(b) Obtain the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
Answer:
Let Q. be the charge on the capacitor, and o be the uniform surface charge density on each plate as shown in the figure.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 35
d = distance between plates of the capacitor.

Therefore by Gauss’ theorem, the electric field between the plates of the capacitor is given by
E = \(\frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{Q}{\varepsilon_{0} A}\)

The field is uniform, so the potential difference between the two plates is
V = Ed = \(\frac{1}{\varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q d}{A}\)

Therefore, by the definition of capacitance we have
C = \(\frac{Q}{V}=\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\)

This gives the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.

(c) Derive the expression of the effective capacitance of a series combination of n capacitance (CBSE Delhi 2016C)
Answer:
Capacitors in series. Capacitors are said to be connected in series if the second plate of one capacitor is connected to the first plate of the next and so on as shown in the figure.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 36
Resultant capacitance will be
\(\frac{1}{C}=\frac{1}{C_{1}}+\frac{1}{C_{2}}+\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots=+\frac{1}{C_{n}}\)

Question 19.
A charge Q is distributed over the surfaces of two concentric hollow spheres of radii r and R (R >> r), such that their surface charge densities are equal. Derive the expression for the potential at the common center.
Or
Three concentric metallic shells A, B, and C of radii a, b, and c (a <b < C) have surface charge densities +a, -a, and + o respectively as shown. Obtain the expressions for the potential of three shells A, B, and C. If shells A and C are at the same potential, obtain the relation between a, b and c. (CBSE Al 2019)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 37
Answer:
Let the charges on the spheres be q, and q2 such that
Q=q1 + q2
= 4πσ(r² + R²)
Or
σ = \(\frac{Q}{4 \pi\left(r^{2}+R^{2}\right)}\)

Now potential at the common centre V=V1 + V2
V = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left(\frac{q_{1}}{r}+\frac{q_{2}}{R}\right)\)
= \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\left(\frac{4 \pi r^{2} \sigma}{r}+\frac{4 \pi R^{2} \sigma}{R}\right)\)

V = \(\frac{(r+R) \sigma}{\varepsilon_{0}}\)

Substituting for o, we have
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 38
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 39

Numerical Problems :

Formulae for solving numerical problems

  • V = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{q}{r}\) electric potential at a point.
  • Q = CV for a capacitor.
  • C = 4πε0R for a spherical conductor.
  • C =\(\frac{Q}{V}=\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as dielectric.
  • C = \(\frac{K \varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with a dielectric.
  • For capacitors in senes \(\frac{1}{C_{s}}=\frac{1}{C_{1}}+\frac{1}{C_{2}}\) and for capacitors in parallel Cp = C1 + C2
  • U = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^{2}}{c}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)CV2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)QV Energy stored in a capacitor.
  • Energy density u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ε0E2
  • Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with a conducting slab of thickness t between plates is C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d-t}\)
  • Capacitance of a capacitor with dielectric slab of thickness t << d , C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d+t\left(\frac{1}{K}-1\right)}\)
  • Common potential V = \(\frac{C_{1} V_{1}+C_{2} V_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}\)
  • Loss of energy when two conductors are combined, U1 – U2 = \(\frac{C_{1} C_{2}}{2\left(C_{1}+C_{2}\right)}\left(V_{1}-V_{2}\right)^{2}\)
  • If n small drops each having a charge Q, capacitance C, and potential V coalesce to form a big drop, then
  1. The charge on the big drop = nQ
  2. The capacitance of the big drop = n1/3 C
  3. Potential of the big drop = n2/3 V
  4. The potential energy of the big drop = n5/3 U

Question 1.
Electric field intensity at point B due to a point charge Q kept at point A is 24 N C-1 and the electric potential at point B due – to the same charge is 12 J C-1. Calculate the distance AB and also the magnitude of the charge Q.
Answer:
Given E = 24 N C-1 , V = 12 J C-1 , r = ? and Q = ?

Using the relation
E = \(\frac { V }{ r }\)
Or
\(\frac { V }{ E }\) = \(\frac { 12 }{ 24 }\) = 0.5 m

Also V = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q}{r}\)

Therefore 12 = 9 × 109 × \(\frac { Q }{ 0.5 }\) , solving for Q

we have Q = 6.67 × 10-10C

Question 2.
A capacitor of unknown capacitance is connected across a battery of V volts. The charge stored in it is 360 μC. When the potential across the capacitor is reduced by 120 V, the charge stored in it becomes 120 μC. Calculate:
(i) The potential V and the unknown capacitance C.
(ii) What will be the charge stored in the capacitor, if the voltage applied had increased by 120 V? (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Given Q1 = 360 μC, Q2 = 120 μC,
V2 = (V- 120) volt, V1 = V

(i) We know that C = \(\frac { Q }{ V }\)

Since capacitance is same, we have
\(\frac{Q_{1}}{V_{1}}=\frac{Q_{2}}{V_{2}}\)
Or
\(\frac{360 \times 10^{-6}}{V}=\frac{120 \times 10^{-6}}{V-120}\)

Solving for V we have V= 180 volt

Also C = Q1/ V1 = 360 × 10-6 / 180 = 2 × 10-6 C = 2 pF

(ii) V= 180 + 120 = 300 V
Therefore Q = CV = 2 x 10-5 × 300 = 600 x 10-6 = 600 pC

Question 3.
Two identical capacitors of 12 pF each are connected in series across a 50 V battery. Calculate the electrostatic energy stored in the combination. If these were connected in parallel across the same battery, find out the value of the energy stored in this combination. (CBSE Al 2019)
Answer:
Given C = 12 pF = 12 × 10-12 F, V= 50 V,
In series
Cs = \(\frac{C_{1} C_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}=\frac{12 \times 12}{12+12}\) = 6 pF

Hence energy stored
Us = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CsV2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 6 × 10-12× (50)2
Us = 7.5 × 10-9 J

In parallel
CP = C1 + C2 = 12 + 12 = 24 pF
UP = \(\frac{1}{2}\) CPV2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 24 × 10-12 × (50)2
UP = 3 × 10-8 J

Question 4.
The figure shows a network of three capacitors C1 = 2 μF; C2 = 6 μF and C3 = 3 μF connected across a battery of 10 V. If a charge of 6 μC is acquired by the capacitor C3, calculate the charge acquired by C1 (CBSE Al 2019)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 40
Answer:
Capacitors C2 and C3 are connected in parallel, therefore, the net capacitance of the combination.
C23 = (6 + 3) = 9 μF

Let V1, be the potential across C1 and V2 be the potential across C23
Now C1 = Q/V, or V1 = Q/C1 = Q/2

Also V2 = Q/9
But V = V1 + V2

Solving for Q we get
Q= 16.4 μC

Question 5.
(a) Find equivalent capacitance between A and B in the combination given below. Each capacitor is of 2 μF capacitance.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 41
Answer:
This can be redrawn as
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 42

Like C2, C3 and C4 are in parallel,
C234 = C2 + C3 + C4 = 6 μF

Further, C1, C234 and C5 are in series
\(\frac{1}{C_{\text {net }}}=\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{2}=\frac{3+1+3}{6}=\frac{7}{6}\)
\(C_{\text {net }}=\frac{6}{7}\)μF

(b) If a DC source of 7 V is connected across AB, how much charge is drawn from the source and what is the energy stored in the network? (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
∴ Cnet = \(\frac { 6 }{ 7 }\) μF ,

q = Cnet V = \(\frac { 6 }{ 7 }\) × 10-6 × 7 = 10-6C

∴ Energy stored = \(\frac{1}{2}\)qV

= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 6 × 10-6 × 7 = 21 × 10-6J

Question 6.
Two identical capacitors of 12 pF each are connected in series across a battery of 50 V. How much electrostatic energy is stored in the combination? If these were connected in parallel across the same battery, how much energy will be stored in the combination now? Also, find the charge drawn from the battery in each case. (CBSE Delhi 2017)
Answer:
(i) Net capacitance Cnet = \(\frac{C_{1} C_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}\)
= \(\frac{12 \times 12}{12+12}\)pF = 6 pF

∴ Energy stored = \(\frac{1}{2}\)Cnet V2
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 6 × 10-12 × (50)2 = 75 × 10-10J
q = Chargedrawn = Cnet V=6 × 10-12 × 50 = 3 × 10-10 C

(ii) Cnet=12 + 12 = 24pF
∴ Energy stored = \(\frac{1}{2}\) Cnet V2
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 24 × 10-12 × (50)2
= 3 × 10-8J

Charge drawn, q = CnetV
= 24 × 10-12 × 50
= 1200 × 10-12
= 12 × 10-10 C

Question 7.
In the following arrangement of capacitors, the energy stored in the 6 μF capacitor is E. Find the value of the following. (Foreign 2016)
(a) Energy stored in 12 pF capacitor.
(b) Energy stored in 3 pF capacitor.
(c) Total energy drawn from the battery.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 43
(a) Energy stored in 6 μ capacitor is E. Capacitors 6 μF and 12 μF are connected in parallel.
So, the voltage across 6 μF capacitor
= voltage across 12 μF capacitor
= voltage across 12 μF capacitor
= V (say)

As E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 6 × V²
∴ V = \(\sqrt{\frac{E}{3}}\)

Similarly energy U’ stored in 12 pF capacitor
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 12 × V²
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) ×12 × \(\frac{E}{3}\) = 2E

U’ = 2 E

(b) Equivalent capacitance of 6 µF and 12 µF is 6 + 12 = 18 µF

Charge on 18 µF and 3 µF is same as they are in series as they are in series
∴ Q = CV= 18 × V

∴ Energy in 3 µF capacitor
U” = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^{2}}{C}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{(18 V)^{2}}{3}\)

U” = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{18 \times 18}{3} \frac{E}{3}\)
U” = 18E

(c) Total energy drawn from battery U = E + 2E + 18E = 21E

Question 8.
Two parallel plate capacitors X and Y have the same area of plates and the same separation between them, X has air between the plates, while Y contains a dielectric medium of εr = 4.
(a) Calculate the capacitance of each capacitor if the equivalent capacitance of the combination is 4 μF.
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 44

CX = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) = C(say)
CY= 4\(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) = 4C

EquivaLent capacitance = 4 μF
Ceq = \(\frac{C_{X} C_{Y}}{C_{X}+C_{Y}}\) = 4
= \(\frac{C \times 4 C}{C+4 C}\)
Or
= \(\frac{4C}{5}\) = 4

C = 5 μF
∴ CX = C = 5 μF and
CY = 4C = 20 μF

(b) Total charge, q = Ceq V = 4 × 12 = 48μC
CX and CY are in series. Hence, charge on both is 48 μC each.

∴ The potential difference across CX,
VX = \(\frac{q}{C_{X}}=\frac{48}{5}\) = 9.6 V0lt

The potential difference across CY,
VY = \(\frac{q}{C_{Y}}=\frac{48}{20}\) = 2.4 Volt

(c) UX=\(\frac{1}{2}\)CXVX² ; UY = \(\frac{1}{2}\)CYVy²

∴ \(\frac{U_{x}}{U_{Y}}=\frac{5 \times(9.6)^{2}}{20 \times(2.4)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4} \times \frac{9.6 \times 9.6}{2.4 \times 2.4}\) = 4

\(\frac{U_{x}}{U_{r}}\) = 4

Question 9.
Find the ratio of the potential differences that must be applied across the parallel and series combination of two capacitors C1 and C2 with their capacitances in the ratio 1:2 so that the energy stored in these two cases becomes the same. (CBSE Al 2016)
Answer:
(i) Let C1 = C, ∴ C2 = 2C
For series combination equivalent capacitance is
\(C_{s}=\frac{C_{1} \times C_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}=\frac{C \times 2 C}{3 C}=\frac{2}{3} C\) …. (1)
and energy stored,
\(U_{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{1}{2} C_{s} V_{\mathrm{s}}^{2}=\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{2}{3} C V_{\mathrm{s}}^{2}\) …. (2)

For parallel combination equivalent capacitance
Cp = C + 2C = 3C ….(3)
and energy stored
∴ \(U_{D}=\frac{1}{2} 3 C \times V_{p}^{2}\) …(4)

But Us = Up [Given]
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 45

Question 10.
Calculate the potential difference and the energy stored in the capacitor C2 in the circuit shown in the figure. Given potential at A is 90 V, C1 = 20 μF, C2 = 30 μF, and C3= 15 μF. (CBSEAI 2015)
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 46
Answer:
Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 47
C = \(\frac{60}{9}\) μF = \(\frac{20}{3}\) μF

The potential at A = 90V

∴ Charge on each capacitor
Q = C x V= \(\frac{20}{3}\) x 90 =600 μC.

∴ Charge on C2 = 600 μC

∴ V2 = \(\frac{Q}{C_{2}}=\frac{600}{30}\) ; V2 = 20 V

Energy stored in C2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)C2V2²

U2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 3o × 10-6 × 20 × 20
U2 = 6000 × 10-6J = 6 × 10-3J

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 3 with Solutions

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science with Solutions and marking scheme Set 3 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 3 with Solutions

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

(i) Question paper comprises five Sections – A, B, C, D and E. There are 32 questions in the question paper. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section A – Question no. 1 to 16 are Objective Type Questions of 1 mark each.
(iii) Section B – Question no. 17 to 22 are short answer type questions, carrying 3 marks each. Answer to each question should not exceed 80 words.
(iv) Section C – Question no. 23 to 26 are source based questions, carrying 4 marks each.
(v) Section D – Question no. 27 to 31 are long answer type questions, carrying 5 marks each. Answer to each question should not exceed 120 words.
(vi) Section E – Question no. 32 is map based, carrying 5 marks with two parts, 32.1 from History (2 marks) and 32.2 from Geography (3 marks).
(vii) There is no overall choice in the question paper. However, an internal choice has been provided in few questions. Only one of the choices in such questions have to be attempted.
(viii) In addition to this, separate instructions are given with each section and question, wherever

Section-A

Question 1.
Why did Gandhiji decide to withdraw the Non-Cooperation Movement in 1922? 1
(a) Because violence occurred in Kheda and Gandhiji did not like it.
(b) Because violence occurred in Chauri Chaura and many other places, and Gandhiji was firm believer of ahimsa.
(c) Because people did not support the movement.
(d) Because violence occurred in Champaran and some other places, and Gandhiji was firm believer of ahimsa.
Answer:
(b) Because violence occurred in Champaran and some other places, and Gandhiji was firm believer of ahimsa.

Question 2.
Lala Lajpat Rai was assaulted by the British police during a peaceful demonstration against the which one of the following?
(a) Simon Commission
(b) Indian Commission
(c) Rowlatt Act
(d) Quit India Movement
Answer:
(a) Simon Commission

Question 3.
Leading the procession, way past the Statue of Liberty, the peoples of Germany were bearing
which of the following flags?
(a) Black
(b) Red
(c) Gold
(d) Black, red and gold
Answer:
(d) Black, red and gold

Question 4.
Fill in the blanks
……………. is the largest producer of raw jute and jute goods and stands at second place as an exporter after Bangladesh.
Or
The deepest, landlocked and well protected sea port is …………………..
Answer:
India
Or
Vishakhapatnam

Question 5.
Choose the correctly matched pair about the crops from the following options:
(a) Golden fibre – Jute
(b) Fibre crop – Rubber
(c) Food crop – Cotton
(d) Non-food crop – Silk
Answer:
(a) Golden fibre – Jute

Question 6.
Fill in the blank:
Biotic and Abiotic resources: on the basis of origin, Renewable and non-renewable resources:on the basis of exhaustibility, …………………… : on basis of the status of development
(a) National and International resources
(b) Potential and Developed resources
(c) Individual and Community owned resources
(d) Human resources
Answer:
(b) Potential and Developed resources

Question 7.
Identify the industry with the help of the following features.

  • Manufactures aircrafts, utensils and wires
  • Light and a good conductor of heat
  • Second most important metallurgical industry in India

Answer:
Aluminium Smelting

Question 8.
Aluminium Smelting
The oldest artificial sea port of India is
(a) Kolkata
(b) Mumbai
(c) Chennai
(d) Kandla
Answer:
(c) Chennai

Question 9.
Modem democracies maintain check and balance system. Identity the correct option based on the horizontal power sharing arrangement.
(a) Central government, state government, local bodies
(b) Legislative, executive, judiciary
(c) Among different social groups
(d) Among different pressure groups
Answer:
(b) Legislative, executive, judiciary

Question 10.
If federalism works only in big country then why did Belgium adopt it?
Or
What is decentralisation?
Answer:
Belgium decided to divide its power between the national government and the constituent states.
Or
When power is taken away from central and state governments and given to local government, it is called decentralisation.

Question 11.
State any one step taken in Belgium to rule out the problem of regional differences and cultural diversities.
Or
Which is a major caste group of Sri Lanka?
Answer:
Step taken by Belgium:
The Constitution prescribes that the number of Dutch and French speaking ministers shall be equal in the Central Government.
Or
Sinhala and Tamil is a major caste group of Sri Lanka.

Question 12.
12. Read the given table and find out in comparison to Kerala, which state has the highest infant mortality rate.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 3 with Solutions 1
Sources: Economic Survey, 2017-18 Vol. 2, Government of india: National Sample Survey
Organisaiion (Report No. 575)
(a) Haryana
(b) Bihar
(c) Both Haryana and Bihar
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Bihar

Question 13.
Read the information given below and select the correct option.

Until the middle of the twentieth century, production was largely organised within countries. What crosses the boundaries of these countries were raw material, foodstuff and finished products. Colonies such as India exported raw material and foodstuff and imported finished goods. Trade was the main channel connecting distant countries. This w’as before large companies connecting distant countries. This was before large companies called multinational corporations (MNCs) emerged on the scene.

Foreign trade creates an opportunity’ for the producers to reach beyond the domestic markets i.e., markets of their own countries. Producers can sell their produce not only in markets located within the country but can also compete in markets located in other countries of the world. Similarly, for the buyers, import of goods produced in another country is one way of expanding the choice of goods beyond what is domestically produced.

MNCs are a major force in connecting the countries of the world because-
(a) they can form and utilize the connections between national economics.
(b) they help in the integration of market and in flow of information.
(c) they may also outsource their production processes, often to lesser developed nations to reduce their costs.
(d) All of the above (d)
Answer:
(d) All of the above (d)

Or

Foreign trade creates an opportunity for the producers to reach beyond the domestic markets i.e., markets of their own countries. How does foreign trade become a main channel in connecting countries? Choose the correct option.
(a) Foreign trade creates an opportunity for the producers to reach beyond the domestic markets.
(b) Producers can sell their produce not only in market located within the country but also compete in markets located in other countries of the world.
(c) Impact of the goods produced in another country is also one of the way is expanding the choice of goods.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 14.
How is Public sector different for Private sector? Choose the correct option from the following.
(a) In the public sector government owns most of the assets and provides all the services, whereas in private sector ownership of assets and delivery of services is in the hand of private individual or companies.
(b) In the public sector ownership of assets and delivery of services is in the hand of private individual or companies, whereas in the private sector government owns most of the assets and provides all the services.
(c) In the public sector government owns minimum assets and provides limited sendees, whereas in the private sector assets and delivery of services is the responsibility of private companies only.
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) In the public sector government owns most of the assets and provides all the services, whereas in private sector ownership of assets and delivery of services is in the hand of private individual or companies.

Question 15.
Suggest the way to create employment in rural areas from the options given below:
(a) Launching projects like irrigation facilities
(b) Building dams and developing infrastructural projects
(c) By opening services like cooperatives or banks
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 16.
In the question given below, there are two statements marked as Assertion (A) and Reason
(R). Read the statements and choose the correct option:
Assertion (A): Demand deposits offer an interesting facility of cheque.
Reason (R): Modern forms of money includes gold and silver coins.
Options:
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is true.
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is false.

Section-B

Question 17.
Give a brief description of Mahatma Gandhi’s Satyagraha Movements which he organised in various places after arriving in India from South Africa.
Answer:
After arriving in India, Mahatma Gandhi organised several Satyagraha movements in various places:

  • Champaran:
    In 1917, he travelled to Champaran in Bihar to inspire the peasants to struggle against the exploitative plantation system.
  • Kheda:
    In 1917, he organised a Satyagraha Movement in support of the Kheda peasants in Gujarat. These peasants were very much worried due to crop failure and a plague epidemic. Since they could not pay the revenue, they demanded relaxation in revenue collection.
  • Ahmedabad:
    In 1918, he went to Ahmedabad to organise Satyagraha movement among the workers of cotton mills.

Question 18.
Though conservative forces were able to suppress liberal movements in 1848, they could not restore the old order. How?
Or
“The Congress was reluctant to include the demands of industrial workers in its programme of struggle.” Analyse the reasons.
Answer:

  • Monarchs now began to realise that the cycles of revolution and repression would only be ended by granting concessions to the liberal-nationalist revolutionaries.
  • Therefore, in the years after 1848, the autocratic monarchies of Central and Eastern Europe began to introduce the changes that had already taken place in Western Europe before 1815.
  • Thus, the systems of serfdom and bonded labour were abolished both in the Habsburg dominions and in Russia.
  • The Habsburg rulers granted more autonomy to the Hungarians in 1867.

Or
The Congress was reluctant to include the demands of industrial workers in its programme of struggle because:

  • The industrial working classes did not participate in the Civil Disobedience Movement in large numbers, except in the Nagpur region.
  • As the industrialists came closer to the Congress, workers stayed aloof.
  • The Congress felt that by including workers’ demands as part of its programme of struggle it would alienate industrialists and divide the anti-imperial forces.

Question 19.
“Efficient means of transport are pre-requisites for fast development of the country.” Support the statement with examples.
Answer:

  • The pace of development of country depends upon the production of goods and services as well as their movement over space. Therefore, efficient means of transport are pre-requisite for national development.
  • Today, the world has been converted into a large village with the help of efficient and fast moving transport system.
  • The trades from local to international levels have added to the vitality of our economy with the help of dense and efficient network of transport in the country.
  • It has enriched our life and added substantially to growing amenities and facilities for the comforts of life.

Question 20.
Describe any three features of ‘federal government’.
Or
Describe any three features of ‘unitary government’.
Answer:
Feature of Federal Government:

  • Sharing of powers two or more levels of government
  • Each government has its own jurisdiction
  • Courts have the power to interpret the Constitution and the powers of different levels of government.
  • Sources of revenue for each level of government are clearly specified to ensure its financial autonomy.
  • The fundamental provisions of the Constitution can be changed with the consent of both, (vz) It has dual objectives to safeguard and promote unity of the country.
    (Any three)

Or
Features of Unitary Government:

  • Only one level of Government or the sub-units are subordinate to Central Government.
  • The Central Government can pass an order to provincial or the local government
  • State government has power of its own for which it is not answerable to the Central government.
  • Both these governments are separately answerable to the people.
    (Any three)

Question 21.
“Tertiary sector activities help in the development of the primary and secondary sectors.”
Evaluate the statement.
Answer:
The tertiary sector activities help in the development of the primary and secondary sectors because, these activities do not produce goods but they are an aid or a support for the production process. For example, goods that are produced in the primary or secondary sector would need to be transported by trucks or trains and then sold in wholesale and retail shops.

At times, it may be necessary to store these in godowns. We also may need to talk to others over telephone or send letters or borrow money from banks to help production and trade. Transport, storage, communication, banking, trade are some of the examples of tertiary activities.

Question 22.
“Primary sector was the most important sector of economic activity at initial stages of development.” Evaluate the statement.
Answer:
As the methods of farming changed and agriculture sector began to prosper, it produced much more food than before. Many people could now take up other activities. There were increasing number of craftpersons and traders. Buying and selling activities increased many times. Beside, there were also transporters, administrators, army, etc. However, at this stage, most of the goods produced were natural products from the primary sector and most people were also employmed in this sector.

But overtime and especially because new methods of manufacturing were introduced, factories came up and started expanding. In past 100 years, there has been a further shift from secondary to tertiary sector.

Therefore, we can say that primary sector was the most important sector of economic activity at initial stages of development.

Section-C

Question 23.
Read the source given below and answer the questions that follows. (4 × 1 = 4)

The movement started with middle-class participation in the cities. Thousands of students left government-controlled schools and colleges, headmasters and teachers resigned, and lawyers gave up their legal practices. The council elections were boycotted in most provinces except Madras, where the Justice Party, the party of the non-Brahmans. felt that entering the council was one way of gaining some power-something that usually only Brahmans had access to.

The effects of non-cooperation on the economic front were more dramatic. Foreign goods were boycotted, liquor shops picketed, and foreign cloth burnt in huge bonfires. The import of foreign cloth halved between 1921 and 1922, its value dropping from Rs. 102 crore toRs. 57 crore. In many places merchants and traders refused to trade in foreign goods or finance foreign trade. As the boycott movement spread, and people began discarding imported clothes and wearing only Indian ones, production of Indian textile mills and handlooms went up.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 23.1.
Which of the following statements correctly explains the role of ‘Justice Party’ in boycotting of council elections?
(a) Justice Party felt that entering the council was one way of gaining some power.
(b) Justice Party of Madras was not boycotted the council elections.
(c) The Party wanted power that usually only Brahmans had access to.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 23.2.
Identify how was the effects of ‘Non-Cooperation on the economic front’ dramatic from the following options:
(a) Foreign goods were boycotted.
(b) Liquor shops were picketed.
(c) Foreign cloths were burnt in huge bonfires
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.3.
Which among the following is/are the effect of Boycott movement on foreign textile trade? Select the appropriate option.
(a) The import of foreign cloth halved.
(b) Merchants and traders refused to trade in foreign goods or finance foreign trade.
(c) Indian textile mills and handloom went up.
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 23.4.
Identify the form of demonstration by which people block the entrance to a shop, factory or office from the given options:
(a) Satyagraha
(h) Block Movement
(c) Picket
(d) Guerrilla Movement
Answer:
(c) Picket

Question 24.
Read the text given below and answer the following questions. (4 × 1 = 4)

Different persons can have different developmental goals and what may be development for one may not be development for the other. It may even be destructive for the other. Besides seeking more income, one-way or the other, people also seek, things like equal treatment, freedom, security, and respect of others. They resent discrimination. All these are important goals. In fact, in some cases, these may be more important than more income or more consumption because material goods are not all that you need to live.

Money, or material things one can busy with it, it one factor on which our live depends. But the quality of our life also depends on non-material things mentioned above. If it is not obvious to you, then just think of the role of your friends in your life. You may desire their friendship. Similarly, there are many things that are not easily measured but they mean a lot to our lives. These are often ignored.

However, it will be wrong to conclude that what cannot be measured is not important. Consider another example. If you get a job in a far off place, before accepting it you would try to consider many factors, apart from income, such as facilities for your family, working atmosphere, or opportunity to learn. In another case, a job may give you less pay but may offer regular employment that enhances your sense of security. Another job, however, may offer high pay but no job security and also leave no time for your family. This will reduce your sense of security and freedom.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 24.1.
Economic development applies to the ……………… development of a country where the people earn ……………… income and can satisfy all their needs.
(a) social; higher
(b) social; lower
(c) all round; higher
(d) political; average
Answer:
(c) all round; higher

Question 24.2.
Different people have different goals or aspirations. Identify which development goals/ aspirations the following people belong to:

Category of person

Development goals/Aspirations

a. Landless rural labourers 1. More days of work and better wages
b. Prosperous farmers from Punjab 2. Availability of other sources of irrigation
c. Farmers who depend only on rain for growing crops 3. Assured a higher support prices for their crops
d. A rural woman from a land owning family 4. Education of her child in English medium school by more earning from the land by giving it on rent

 

Choose the correct option.
(a) a-1, b-3, c-2, d-4
(b) a-3, b-4, c-1, d-2
(c) a-3, b-1, c-4, d-2
(d) a-4, b-2, c-1, d-3
Answer:
(a) a-1, b-3, c-2, d-4

Question 24.3.
Besides seeking more income what do people want?
(a) Security
(b) Freedom
(c) Equal treatment
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 24.4.
Which of the following is not an important goal of people’s life?
(a) Good education
(b) Blood donation
(c) High salaried job
(d) Facilities for going abroad
Answer:
(b) Blood donation

Question 25.
Read the extract and answer the following questions. (4 × 1 = 4)

Democracies that follow a federal system all over the world tend to have two kinds of political parties: parties that are present in only one of the federal units and parties that are present in several or all units of the federation. This is the case in India as well. There are some countrywide parties, which are called ‘national parties’. These parties have their units in various states. But by and large, all these units follow the same policies, programmes and strategy that is decided at the national level. Every party in the country has to register with the Election Commission.

While the Commission treats all parties equally, it offers some special facilities to large and established parties. These parties are given a unique symbol only the official candidates of that party can use that election symbol. Parties that get this privilege and some other special facilities are ‘recognised’ by the Election Commission for this purpose. That is why these parties are called, ‘recognised political parties’. The Election Commission has laid down detailed criteria of the proportion of votes and seats that a party must get in order to be a recognised party.

A party that secures at least six per cent of the total votes in an election to the Legislative Assembly of a State and wins at least two seats is recognised as a State party. A party that secures at least six per cent of the total votes in Lok Sabha elections or Assembly elections in four States and wins at least four seats in the Lok Sabha is recognised as a national party.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 25.1.
The most visible pillar of democracy is
(a) Adult Franchise
(b) Seats reservation
(c) Elections
(d) Political Parties
Answer:
(c) Elections

Question 25.2.
What do you know about Federal System?
(a) It is a system of government under which the power is divided between a central authority and its various constituent units.
(b) The various constituent units and the central authority run their administrative independently.
(c) These units and central authority do not interfere in the affairs of one another unnecessarily.
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 25.3.
The Party that secure at least …………………..percent the total votes in the Lok Sabha elections or Assemly elections in four states and wins at least four seats in the Lok Sabha is recognised as a national party.
(a) Four
(b) Six
(c) Five
(d) Seven
Answer:
(b) Six

Question 25.4.
Who issues a Model Code of Conduct for political parties?
(a) The Judiciary
(b) The Parliament
(c) The Press
(d) The Election Commission
Answer:
(d) The Election Commission

Question 26.
Read the extract given below and answer the following questions. (4 × 1 = 4)

Globalisation and greater competition among producers-both local and foreign producers- has been of advantage to consumers, particularly the well-off sections in the urban areas. There is greater choice before these consumers who now enjoy improved quality and lower prices for several products. As a result, these people today, enjoy much higher standards of living than was possible earlier.

Answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate option.

Question 26.1.
It creates an opportunity for the producers to reach beyond the domestic markets. What does it refer to?
(a) Technology
(b) Investments
(c) Globalisation
(d) Trade Barriers
Answer:
(c) Globalisation

Question 26.2.
How is globalisation beneficial for consumers?
(a) Greater choice before the consumers and improved quality
(b) Lower prices for several products
(c) People enjoying higher standards of living than was possible earlier
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 26.3.
The negative impact of globalisation-
(a) Availability of variety of products led to higher standard of living.
(b) Rising competition has led to shutting down of many units.
(c) It has enabled some large Indian companies to emerge as MNCs.
(d) It increases foreign direct investment.
Answer:
(b) Rising competition has led to shutting down of many units.

Question 26.4.
Factors that helped in the process of globalisation are-
(a) Information and technology
(b) Liberalisation of foreign trade and foreign investment
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Creating barriers and other restrictions
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Section-D

Question 27.
How did ideas of national unity in early nineteenth century Europe allied to the ideology of liberalism? Explain.
Or
How did Greek war of independence moblilise nationalist feelings among the educated elite across Europe? Explain.
Answer:
Ideas of national unity in early nineteenth century Europe were closely allied to the ideology of liberalism. The term ‘liberalism’ derives from the Latin root liber, meaning free. For the new middle classes liberalism stood for freedom for the individual and equality of all before the law.

Politically, it emphasised the concept of government by consent. Since the French Revolution, liberalism had stood for the end of autocracy and clerical privileges, a constitution and representative government through parliament. Nineteenth-century liberals also stressed the inviolability of private property.

Yet, equality before the law did not necessarily stand for universal suffrage. Men without property and all women were excluded from political rights. Only for a brief period under the Jacobins did all adult males enjoy suffrage. However, the Napoleonic Code went back to limited suffrage and reduced women to the status of a minor, subject to the authority of fathers and husbands.

Throughout the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries women and non-propertied men organised opposition movements demanding equal political rights.
In the economic sphere, liberalism stood for the freedom of markets and the abolition of state- imposed restrictions on the movement of goods and capital. During the nineteenth century this was a strong demand of the emerging middle classes.

Such conditions were viewed as obstacles to economic exchange and growth by the new commercial classes, who argued for the creation of a unified economic territory allowing the unhindered movement of goods, people and capital. In 1834, a customs union or zollverein was formed at the initiative of Prussia and joined by most of the German states.

The union abolished tariff barriers and reduced the number of currencies from over thirty to two. The creation of a network of railways further stimulated mobility, harnessing economic interests to national unification. A wave of economic nationalism strengthened the wider nationalist sentiments growing at the time.
Or
Answer:
Greek war of independence mobilised nationalist feelings among the educated elite across Europe through:

  • Greece had been part of the Ottoman Empire since the fifteenth century.
  • The growth of revolutionary nationalism in Europe sparked off a struggle for independence amongst the Greeks which began in 1821.
  • Nationalists in Greece got support from other Greeks living in exile and also from many West Europeans who had sympathies for ancient Greek culture.
  • Poets and artists lauded Greece as the cradle of European civilisation and mobilised public opinion to support its struggle against a Muslim empire.
  • The English poet Lord Byron organised funds and later went to fight in the war, where he died of fever in 1824.
  • Finally, the Treaty of Constantinople of 1832 recognised Greece as an independent nation.

Question 28.
State any five features of plantation farming.
OR
Describe the geographical conditions required for the growth of rice.
Answer:

  • It is a type of commercial farming.
  • It is single crop farming practised on a large area.
  • Crops are mainly grown for the market.
  • It is both labour intensive and capital intensive.
  • It has an interface of agriculture and industry.
  • All the products are used as raw material in respective industries.
  • Examples of plantation crops are tea, coffee, rubber, sugarcane and banana.

Or

  • Rice is a Kharif crop which requires high temperature above 25°C.
  • It requires high humidity with annual rainfall above 100 cm.
  • In the areas of less rainfall, it grows with the help of irrigation.
  • It is grown in the plains of north and north-eastern India coastal areas and the deltaic regions where fertile alluvial soil is available.
  • Development of dense network of canal irrigation and tubewells have made it possible to grow rice in areas of less rainfall in Punjab and Haryana.

Question 29.
Describe the role of political parties in modem democracy.
Answer:
In a modem democracy political parties performed the following major functions:
(i) In most democracies, elections are fought mainly among the candidates put up by political parties. Parties select their candidates in different ways. In India top party leaders choose candidates for contesting elections.

(ii) Parties put forward different policies and programmes and the voters choose from them. In a democracy, a large number of similar opinions have to be grouped together to provide a direction in which policies can be formulated by the governments. A government is expected to base its policies on the line taken by the ruling party.

(iii) Parties play a decisive role in making laws for a country. Formally laws are debated and passed in the legislature. But since most of the members belong to a party, they go by the direction of the party leadership, irrespective of their personal opinions.

(iv) Parties form and run governments. Parties recruit leaders, train them and then make them ministers to run the government in the way they want.

(v) Those parties that lose in the elections play the role of opposition to the parties in power by voicing different views and criticising government for its failure or wrong policies.

(vi) Parties shape public opinion. They raise and highlight issues. Parties sometimes also launch movements for the resolution of problems faced by people. Often opinions in the society crystallise on the lines parties take.

(vii) Parties provide people access to government machinery and welfare schemes implemented by governments.

Question 30.
“Democracy plays an important role to accommodate social diversity.” Support the statement with examples.
Answer:
(i) No society can fully or permanently resolve conflicts among different groups. But we can certainly learn to respect these differences and we can also evolve mechanisms to negotiate the differences. Democracy is best suited to produce this outcome. Non-democratic regimes often turn a blind eye to or suppress internal social differences. Ability to handle social differences, divisions and conflicts is thus a definite plus point of democratic regimes.

(ii) Democracy continues to be democracy as long as all citizens have a chance to be part of majority at any point of time. If someone is debarred from being part of majority on the basis of birth then democracy is said to be concentrated in the hands of a few people.

(iii) It is necessary to understand that democracy is not simply a rule by majority opinion. The majority always needs to work with the minority so that government can function to represent the opinion of common people.

(iv) The rule of majority should not be ruled by majority on the basis of religion or race or linguistic group, etc. Rule by majority means that in case of every decision or in case of very election, different persons and groups may form a majority.
Thus, through the above points, can say that the democracy plays an important role to accommodate social diversity.

Question 31.
“Bank plays an important role in the economic development of the country.” Support the statement with examples.
Oo
“Credit sometimes pushes the borrower into a situation from which recovery is very painful.” Support the statement with examples.
Answer:
Banks play an important role in developing the economy of India:

  • They keep money of the people in its safe custody.
  • They give interest on the deposited money to the people.
  • They mediate between those who have surplus money and those who are in need of money.
  • They provide loan to large number of people at low interest rate.
  • They promote agricultural and industrial sector by providing loans.
  • They also provide funds to different organisations.

Or
In rural areas, the main demand for credit is for crop production. Crop production involves considerable costs on seeds, fertilisers, pesticides, water, electricity, repair of equipment, etc. There is a minimum stretch of three to four months between the time when the farmers buy these inputs and when they sell the crop. Farmers usually take crop loans at the beginning of the season and repay the loan after harvest. Repayment of the loan is crucialy dependent on the income from farming.

If the failure of the crop made loan repayment impossible, then farmers had to sell part of the land to repay the loan. Credit, instead of helping those farmers to improve their earnings, left them worse off and they came into the debt trap. In this case, credit pushes the borrower into a situation from which recovery is very painful.

In one situation credit helps to increase earnings and, therefore, the person/farmer is better off than before. In another situation, because of the crop failture, credit pushes the person into debt trap. To repay the loan farmers have to sell a portion of their land. They are now clearly much worse off than before. Whether credit would be useful or not, therefore, depends on the risks in the situation and whether there is some support in case of loss.

Thus, through the above situation or example, we can easily say that credit sometimes pushes the borrower into a situation from which recovery is very painful.

Section-E

Map Skill Based Question

Question 32.1
Two places A and B have been marked on the given outline map of India. Identify them and
write their correct names on the lines drawn near them.
(A) The place where the Indian National Congress Session was held.
(B) The place where the movement of Indigo planters was started.

Question 32.2
On the same outline map of India locate and label any THREE of the following with suitable symbols.
(a) Sardar Sarovar Dam
(b) Bhilai Iron and Steel Plant
(c) Pune Software Technology Park
(d) Kochi Sea Port
(e) Indore Cotton Textile Industry
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 3 with Solutions 2
Answer:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Social Science Set 3 with Solutions 3

RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2

RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2

These Solutions are part of RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions. Here we have given RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2

Other Exercises

Question 1.
If PT is a tangent at T to a circle whose centre is O and OP = 17 cm, OT = 8 cm. Find the length of the tangent segment PT.
Solution:
PT is the tangent to the circle with centre O, at T
Radius OT = 8 cm, OP = 17 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 1
PT is the tangent segment
Now in right ∆OPT,
OP² = OT² + PT² (Pythagoras Theorem)
=> (17)² = (8)² + PT²
=> 289 = 64 + PT²
=> PT² = 289 – 64 = 225 = (15)²
PT = 15 cm

Question 2.
Find the length of a tangent drawn to a circle with radius 5 cm, from a point 13 cm from the centre of the circle.
Solution:
From a point P outside the circle with centre O, PT is the tangent to the circle and radius
OT = 5 cm, OP = 15 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 2
OT ⊥ PT
Now in right ∆OPT,
OP² = OT² + PT² (Pythagoras Theorem)
(13)² = (5)² + PT²
=> 169 = 25 + PT²
=> PT² = 169 – 25 = 144 = (12)²
PT = 12 cm

Question 3.
A point P is 26 cm away from the centre O of a circle and the length PT of the tangent drawn from P to the circle is 10 cm. Find the radius of the circle.
Solution:
From a point P outside the circle of centre 0 and radius OT, PT is the tangent to the circle
OP = 26 cm, PT = 10 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 3
Now in right ∆OPT
Let r be the radius
OP² = OT² + PT² (Pythagoras Theorem)
=> (26)² = r² + (10)²
=> 676 = r² + 100
=> 676 – 100 = r²
=> r² = 576 = (24)²
r = 24
Hence radius of the circle = 24 cm

Question 4.
If from any point on the common chord of two intersecting circles, tangents be drawn to the circles, prove that they are equal.
Solution:
Given : QR is the common chord of two circles intersecting each other at Q and R
P is a point on RQ when produced From PT and RS are the tangents drawn to tire circles with centres O and C respectively
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 4
To prove : PT = PS
Proof: PT is the tangent and PQR is the secant to the circle with centre O
PT² = PQ x PR ….(i)
Similarly PS is the tangent and PQR is the secant to the circle with centre C
PS² = PQ x PR ….(ii)
From (i) and (ii)
PT² = PS²
PT = PS
Hence proved.

Question 5.
If the sides of a quadrilateral touch a circle, prove that the sum of a pair of opposite sides is equal to the sum of the other pair.
Solution:
Given : The sides of a quadrilateral ABCD touch the circle at P, Q, R and S respectively
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 5
To prove : AB + CD = AP + BC
Proof : AP and AS are the tangents to the circle from A
AP = AS ….(i)
Similarly BP = BQ ……(ii)
CR = CQ ….(iii)
and DR = DS ….(iv)
Adding, we get
AP + BP + CR + DR = AS + BQ + CQ + DS
=> (AP + BP) + (CR + DR) = (AS + DS) + (BQ + CQ)
=> AB + CD = AD + BC
Hence proved.

Question 6.
Out of the two concentric circles, the radius of the outer circle is 5 cm and the chord AC of length 8 cm is a tangent to the inner circle. Find the radius of the inner circle. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Let C1 and C2 be the two circles having same centre O. AC is a chord which touches the C1 at point D
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 6
Join OD.
Also, OD ⊥ AC
AD = DC = 4 cm
[perpendicular line OD bisects the chord]
In right angled ∆AOD,
OA² = AD² + DO²
[by Pythagoras theorem, i.e.,
(hypotenuse)² = (base)² + (perpendicular)²]
=> DO² = 5² – 4² = 25 – 16 = 9
=> DO = 3 cm
Radius of the inner circle OD = 3 cm

Question 7.
A chord PQ of a circle is parallel to the tangent drawn at a point R of the circle. Prove that R bisects the arc PRQ. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Given : Chord PQ is parallel tangent at R.
To prove : R bisects the arc PRQ.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 7
Proof: ∠1 = ∠2 [alternate interior angles]
∠1 = ∠3
[angle between tangent and chord is equal to angle made by chord in alternate segment]
∠2 = ∠3
=> PR = QR
[sides opposite to equal angles are equal]
=> PR = QR
So, R bisects PQ.

Question 8.
Prove that a diameter AB of a circle bisects all those chords which are parallel to the tangent at the point A. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Given, AB is a diameter of the circle.
A tangent is drawn from point A.
Draw a chord CD parallel to the tangent MAN.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 8
So, CD is a chord of the circle and OA is a radius of the circle.
∠MAO = 90°
[Tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to the radius through the point of contact]
∠CEO = ∠MAO [corresponding angles]
∠CEO = 90°
Thus, OE bisects CD
[perpendicular from centre of circle to chord bisects the chord]
Similarly, the diameter AB bisects all. Chord which are parallel to the tangent at the point A.

Question 9.
If AB, AC, PQ are the tangents in the figure, and AB = 5 cm, find the perimeter of ∆APQ.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 9
Solution:
Given : AB, AC and PQ are the tangents to the circle as shown in the figure above and AB = 5 cm
To find : The perimeter of ∆APQ
Proof: PB and PX are the tangents to the circle
PB = PX
Similarly QC and QX are the tangents from
QC = QX
and AB and AC are the tangents from A
AB = AC
Now perimeter of ∆APQ
= AP + PQ + AQ
= AP + PX + QX + AQ
= AP + PB + QC + AQ { PB = PX and QC = QX}
= AB + AC
= AB + AB (AB=AC)
= 2 AB = 2 x 5 = 10 cm

Question 10.
Prove that the intercept of a tangent between two parallel tangents to a circle subtends a right angle at the centre.
Solution:
Given : PQ and RS are parallel tangents of a circle
RMP is the intercept of the tangent between PQ and RS
RO and PQ are joined
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 10
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 11

Question 11.
In the figure, PQ is tangent at a point R of the circle with centre O. If ∠TRQ = 30°, find m ∠PRS
Solution:
In the figure,
PRQ is tangent to the circle with centre O at R
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 12
RT and RS are joined such that ∠TRQ = 30°
Let ∠PRS = x°
Now ∠SRX = 90° (angle in a semicircle)
But ∠TRQ + ∠SRT + ∠PRS = 180° (Angles of a line)
=> 30° + 90° + x° = 180°
=> 120° + x° = 180°
=> x° = 180° – 120° = 60°
∠PRS = 60°

Question 12.
If PA and PB are tangents from an outside point P, such that PA = 10 cm and ∠APB = 60°. Find the length of chord AB.
Solution:
PA and PB are the tangents from a point PQ outside the circle with centre O
PA = 10 cm and ∠APB = 60°
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 13
Tangents drawn from a point outside the circle are equal
PA = PB = 10 cm ∠PAB = ∠PBA
(Angles opposite to equal sides)
But in ∆APB,
∠APB + ∠PAB + ∠PBA = 180° (Angles of a triangle)
=> 60° + ∠PAB + ∠PAB = 180°
=> 2 ∠PAB = 180° – 60° = 120°
∠PAB = 60°
∠PBA = ∠PAB = 60°
PA = PB = AB = 10 cm
Hence length of chord AB = 10 cm

Question 13.
In a right triangle ABC in which ∠B = 90°, a circle is drawn with AB as diameter intersecting the hypotenuse AC at P. Prove that the tangent to the circle at P bisects BC. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Let O be the centre of the given circle. Suppose, the tangent at P meets BC at Q.
Join BP.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 14
To prove : BQ = QC
[angles in alternate segment]
Proof : ∠ABC = 90°
[tangent at any point of circle is perpendicular to radius through the point of contact]
In ∆ABC, ∠1 + ∠5 = 90°
[angle sum property, ∠ABC = 90°]
∠3 = ∠1
[angle between tangent and the chord equals angle made by the chord in alternate segment]
∠3 + ∠5 = 90° ……..(i)
Also, ∠APB = 90° [angle in semi-circle]
∠3 + ∠4 = 90° …….(ii)
[∠APB + ∠BPC = 180°, linear pair]
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
∠3 + ∠5 = ∠3 + ∠4
∠5 = ∠4
=> PQ = QC
[sides opposite to equal angles are equal]
Also, QP = QB
[tangents drawn from an internal point to a circle are equal]
=> QB = QC
Hence proved.

Question 14.
From an external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to a circle with centre O. If CD is the tangent to the circle at a point E and PA = 14 cm, find the perimeter of ∆PCD.
Solution:
PA and PB are the tangents drawn from a point P out side the circle with centre O
CD is another tangents to the circle at point E which intersects PA and PB at C and D respectively
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 15
PA = 14 cm
PA and PB are the tangents to the circle from P
PA = PB = 14 cm
Now CA and CE are the tangents from C
CA = CE ….(i)
Similarly DB and DE are the tangents from D
DB = DE ….(ii)
Now perimeter of ∆PCD
= PC + PD + CD
= PC + PD + CE + DE
= PC + CE + PD + DE
= PC + CA + PD = DB {From (i) and (ii)}
= PA + PB
= 14 + 14
= 28 cm

Question 15.
In the figure, ABC is a right triangle right-angled at B such that BC = 6 cm and AB = 8 cm. Find the radius of its incircle. [CBSE 2002]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 16
Solution:
In right ∆ABC, ∠B = 90°
BC = 6 cm, AB = 8 cm
Let r be the radius of incircle whose centre is O and touches the sides A B, BC and CA at P, Q and R respectively
AP and AR are the tangents to the circle AP = AR
Similarly CR = CQ and BQ = BP
OP and OQ are radii of the circle
OP ⊥ AB and OQ ⊥ BC and ∠B = 90° (given)
BPOQ is a square
BP = BQ = r
AR = AP = AB – BD = 8 – r
and CR = CQ = BC – BQ = 6 – r
But AC² = AB² + BC² (Pythagoras Theorem)
= (8)² + (6)² = 64 + 36 = 100 = (10)²
AC = 10 cm
=> AR + CR = 10
=> 8 – r + 6 – r = 10
=> 14 – 2r = 10
=> 2r = 14 – 10 = 4
=> r = 2
Radius of the incircle = 2 cm

Question 16.
Prove that the tangent drawn at the mid-point of an arc of a circle is parallel to the chord joining the end points of the arc. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Let mid-point of an arc AMB be M and TMT’ be the tangent to the circle.
Join AB, AM and MB.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 17
Since, arc AM = arc MB
=> Chord AM = Chord MB
In ∆AMB, AM = MB
=> ∠MAB = ∠MBA ……(i)
[equal sides corresponding to the equal angle]
Since, TMT’ is a tangent line.
∠AMT = ∠MBA
[angle in alternate segment are equal]
∠AMT = ∠MAB [from Eq. (i)]
But ∠AMT and ∠MAB are alternate angles, which is possible only when AB || TMT’
Hence, the tangent drawn at the mid-point of an arc of a circle is parallel to the chord joining the end points of the arc.
Hence proved

Question 17.
From a point P, two tangents PA and PB are drawn to a circle with centre O. If OP = diameter of the circle show that ∆APB is equilateral.
Solution:
Given : From a point P outside the circle with centre O, PA and PB are the tangerts to the circle such that OP is diameter.
AB is joined.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 18
To prove: APB is an equilateral triangle
Const : Join OP, AQ, OA
Proof : OP = 2r
=> OQ + QP = 2r
=> OQ = QP = r (OQ = r)
Now in right ∆OAP,
OP is its hypotenuse and Q is its mid point
OA = AQ = OQ
(mid-point of hypotenuse of a right triangle is equidistances from its vertices)
∆OAQ is equilateral triangle ∠AOQ = 60°
Now in right ∆OAP,
∠APO = 90° – 60° = 30°
=> ∠APB = 2 ∠APO = 2 x 30° = 60°
But PA = PB (Tangents from P to the circle)
=> ∠PAB = ∠PBA = 60°
Hence ∆APB is an equilateral triangle.

Question 18.
Two tangents segments PA and PB are drawn to a circle with centre O such that ∠APB = 120°. Prove that OP = 2 AP. [CBSE 2014]
Solution:
Given : From a point P. Out side the circle with centre O, PA and PB are tangerts drawn and ∠APB = 120°
OP is joined To prove : OP = 2 AP
Const: Take mid point M of OP and join AM, join also OA and OB.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 19
Proof : In right ∆OAP,
∠OPA = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ∠APB = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) x 120° = 60°
∠AOP = 90° – 60° = 30°
M is mid point of hypotenuse OP of ∆OAP
MO = MA = MP
∠OAM = ∠AOM = 30° and ∠PAM = 90° – 30° = 60°
∆AMP is an equilateral triangle
MA = MP = AP
But M is mid point of OP
OP = 2 MP = 2 AP
Hence proved.

Question 19.
If ∆ABC is isosceles with AB = AC and C (0, r) is the incircle of the ∆ABC touching BC at L. Prove that L bisects BC.
Solution:
Given: In ∆ABC, AB = AC and a circle with centre O and radius r touches the side BC of ∆ABC at L.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 20
To prove : L is mid point of BC.
Proof : AM and AN are the tangents to the circle from A
AM = AN
But AB = AC (given)
AB – AN = AC – AM
BN = CM
Now BL and BN are the tangents from B
BL = BN
Similarly CL and CM are tangents
CL = CM
But BM = CM (proved)
BL = CL
L is mid point of BC.

Question 20.
AB is a diameter and AC is a chord of a circle with centre O such that ∠BAC = 30°. The tangent at C intersects AB at a point D. Prove that BC = BD. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
To prove, BC = BD
Join BC and OC.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 21
Given, ∠BAC = 30°
=> ∠BCD = 30°
[angle between tangent and chord is equal to angle made by chord in the alternate segment]
∠ACD = ∠ACO + ∠OCD
∠ACD = 30° + 90° = 120°
[OC ⊥ CD and OA = OC = radius => ∠OAC = ∠OCA = 30°]
In ∆ACD,
∠CAD + ∠ACD + ∠ADC = 180°
[since, sum of all interior angles of a triangle is 180°]
=> 30° + 120° + ∠ADC = 180°
=> ∠ADC = 180° – (30° + 120°) = 30°
Now, in ∆BCD,
∠BCD = ∠BDC = 30°
=> BC = BD
[since, sides opposite to equal angles are equal]

Question 21.
In the figure, a circle touches all the four sides of a quadrilateral ABCD with AB = 6 cm, BC = 7 cm, and CD = 4 cm. Find AD. [CBSE 2002]
Solution:
A circle touches the sides AB, BC, CD and DA of a quadrilateral ABCD at P, Q, R and S respectively.
AB = 6 cm, BC = 7 cm, CD = 4cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 22
Let AD = x
AP and AS are the tangents to the circle
AP = AS
Similarly,
BP = BQ
CQ = CR
and OR = DS
AB + CD = AD + BC
=> 6 + 4 = 7 + x
=> 10 = 7 + x
=>x = 10 – 7 = 3
AD = 3 cm

Question 22.
Prove that the perpendicular at the point contact to the tangent to a circle passes through the centre of the circle.
Solution:
Given : TS is a tangent to the circle with centre O at P, OP is joined
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 23
To prove : OP is perpendicular to TS which passes through the centre of the circle
Construction : Draw a line OR which intersect the circle at Q and meets the tangent TS at R
Proof: OP = OQ
(radii of the same circle) and OQ < OR => OP < OR
Similarly we can prove that OP is less than all lines which can be drawn from O to TS
OP is the shortest
OP is perpendicular to TS
Perpendicular through P, will pass through the centre of the circle
Hence proved.

Question 23.
Two circles touch externally at a point P. From a point T on the tangent at P, tangents TQ and TR are drawn to the circles with points of contact Q and R respectively. Prove that TQ = TR.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 24
Solution:
Given : Two circles with centres O and C touch each other externally at P. PT is its common tangent
From a point T on PT, TR and TQ are the tangents drawn to the circles
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 25
To prove : TQ = TR
Proof : From T, TR and TP are two tangents to the circle with centre O
TR = TP ….(i)
Similarly, from T,
TQ and TP are two tangents to the circle with centre C
TQ = TP ….(ii)
From (i) and (ii)
TQ = TR
Hence proved.

Question 24.
A is a point at a distance 13 cm from the centre O of a circle of radius 5 cm. AP and AQ are the tangents to the circle at P and Q. If a tangent BC is drawn at a point R lying on the minor arc PQ to intersect AP at B and AQ at C, find the perimeter of the ∆ABC. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Given : Two tangents are drawn from an external point A to the circle with centre O, Tangent BC is drawn at a point R, radius of circle equals to 5 cm.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 26
To find : Perimeter of ∆ABC.
Proof : ∠OPA = 90°
[Tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to the radius through the point of contact]
OA² = OP² + PA² [by Pythagoras Theorem]
(13)² = 5² + PA²
=> PA² = 144 = 12²
=> PA = 12 cm
Now, perimeter of ∆ABC = AB + BC + CA = (AB + BR) + (RC + CA)
= AB + BP + CQ + CA [BR = BP, RC = CQ tangents from internal point to a circle are equal]
= AP + AQ = 2AP = 2 x (12) = 24 cm
[AP = AQ tangent from internal point to a circle are equal]
Hence, the perimeter of ∆ABC = 24 cm.

Question 25.
In the figure, a circle is inscribed in a quadrilateral ABCD in which ∠B = 90°. If AD = 23 cm, AB = 29 cm and DS = 5 cm, find the radius r of the circle.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 27
Solution:
In the figure, O is the centre of the circle inscribed in a quadrilateral ABCD and ∠B = 90°
AD = 23 cm, AB = 29 cm, DS = 5 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 28
OP = OQ (radii of the same circle)
AB and BC are tangents to the circle and OP and OQ are radii
OP ⊥ BC and OQ ⊥ AB
∠OPB = ∠OQB = 90°
PBQO is a square
DS and DR are tangents to the circle
DR = DS = 5 cm
AR = AD – DR = 23 – 5 = 18 cm
AR and AQ are the tangents to the circle
AQ = AR = 18 cm But AB = 29 cm
BQ = AB – AQ = 29 – 18 = 11 cm
Side of square PBQO is 11 cm
OP = 11 cm
Hence radius of the circle = 11 cm

Question 26.
In the figure, there are two concentric circles with centre O of radii 5 cm and 3 cm. From an external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to these circles. If AP =12 cm, find the length of BP. [CBSE 2010]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 29
Solution:
Two concentric circles with centre O with radii 5 cm and 3 cm respectively from a
point P, PA and BP are tangents drawn to there circles
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 30
AP = 12 cm
To find BP
In right ∆OAP,
OP² = OA² + AP² (Pythagoras Theorem)
= (5)² + (12)² = 25 + 144
= 169 = (13)²
OP = 13 cm
Now in right ∆OBP,
OP² = OB² + BP²
=> (13)² = (3)² + BP²
=> 169 = 9 + BP²
=> BP² = 169 – 9 = 160 = 16 x 10
BP = √(16 x 10) = 4√10 cm

Question 27.
In the figure, AB is a chord of length 16 cm of a circle of radius 10 cm. The tangents at A and B intersect at a point P. Find the length of PA. [CBSE 2010]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 31
Solution:
In the figure, AB is the chord of the circle with centre O and radius 10 cm.
Two tangents from P are drawn to the circle touching it at A and B respectively
AB is joined with intersects OP at L
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 32
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 33

Question 28.
In the figure, PA and PB are tangents from an external point P to a circle with centre O. LN touches the circle at M. Prove that PL + LM = PN + MN. [CBSE 2010]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 34
Solution:
Given : In the figure, PA and PB are the tangents to the circle with centre O from a point P outside it LN touches it at M
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 35
To prove : PL + LM = PN + MN
Prove : PA and PB are tangents to the circle from P
PA = PB
Similarly from L, LA and LM are tangents
LA = LM
Similarly NB = NM
Now PA = PB => PL + LA = PN + NB
PL + LM = PN + NM
Hence proved.

Question 29.
In the figure, BDC is a tangent to the given circle at point D such that BD = 30 to the circle and meet when produced at A making BAC a right angle triangle. Calculate (i) AF (ii) radius of the circle.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 36
Solution:
In the figure, BDC is a tangent to the given circle with centre O and D is a point such that
BD = 30 cm and CD = 7 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 37
BE and CF are other two tangents drawn from B and C respectively which meet at A on producing this and ∆BAC is a right angle so formed
To find : (i) AF and (ii) radius of the circle
Join OE and OF
OE = OF radii of the circle
OE ⊥ AB and OF ⊥ AC
OEAF is a square
BD and BE are the tangents from B
BE = BD = 30 cm and similarly
CF = CD = 7 cm
Let r be the radius of the circle
OF = AF = AE = r
AB = 30 + r and AC = 7 + r and BC = 30 + 7 = 37 cm
Now in right ∆ABC
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 38

Question 30.
If d1, d2 (d2 > d1) be the diameters of two concentric circles and c be the length of a chord of a circle which is tangent to the other circle, prove that \({ d }_{ 2 }^{ 2 }={ c }^{ 2 }+{ d }_{ 1 }^{ 2 }\). [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Let AB be a chord of a circle which touches the other circle at C. Then ∆OCB is right triangle.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 39

Question 31.
In the given figure, tangents PQ and PR are drawn from an external point P to a circle with centre O, such that ∠RPQ = 30°. A chord RS is drawn parallel to the tangent PQ. Find ∠RQS. [CBSE 2015, NCERT Exemplar]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 40
Solution:
In the given figure,
PQ and PR are tangents to the circle with centre O drawn from P
∠RPQ = 30°
Chord RS || PQ is drawn
To find ∠RQS
PQ = PR (tangents to the circle)
∠PRQ = ∠PQR But ∠RPQ = 30°
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 41

Question 32.
From an external point P, tangents PA = PB are drawn to a circle with centre O. If ∠PAB = 50°, then find ∠AOB. [CBSE 2016]
Solution:
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 42
PA = PB [tangents drawn from external point are equal]
∠PBA = ∠PAB = 50° [angles equal to opposite sides]
∠APB = 180° – 50° – 50° = 80° [angle-sum property of a A]
In cyclic quad. OAPB
∠AOB + ∠APB = 180° [sum of opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral is 180°]
∠AOB + 80° = 180°
∠AOB = 180°- 80° = 100°

Question 33.
In the figure, two tangents AB and AC are drawn to a circle with centre O such that ∠BAC = 120°. Prove that OA = 2AB.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 43
Solution:
Given : In the figure, O is the centre of the circle.
AB and AC are the tangents to the circle from A such that
∠BAC = 120° .
To prove : OA = 2AB
Proof : In ∆OAB and ∆OAC
∠OBA = ∠OCA – 90° (OB and OC are radii)
OA = OA (common)
OB = OC (radii of the circle)
∆OAB ~ ∆OAC
∠OAB = ∠OAC = 60°
Now in right ∆OAB,
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 44

Question 34.
The lengths of three concecutive sides of a quadrilateral circumscribing a circle are 4 cm, 5 cm, and 7 cm respectively. Determine the length of the fourth side.
Solution:
In quadrilateral ABCD which is circumerscribing it
BC = 4 cm, CD = 5 cm and DA = 7 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 45
We know that if a quad, is circumscribed in a circle, then
AB + CD = AD + BC
=> AB + 5 = 4 + 7
=> AB + 5 = 11
AB = 11 – 5 = 6
AB = 6 cm

Question 35.
The common tangents AB and CD to two circles with centres O and O’ intersect at E between their centres. Prove that the points O, E and O’ are collinear. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Joint AO, OC and O’D, O’B
Now, in ∆EO’D and ∆EO’B
O’D = O’B [radius]
O’E = O’E [common side]
ED = EB
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 46
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 47
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 47.5

Question 36.
In the figure, common tangents PQ and RS to two circles intersect at A. Prove that PQ = RS.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 49
Solution:
Given : Two common tangents PQ and RS intersect each other at A.
To prove : PQ = RS
Proof: From A, AQ and AR are two tangents are drawn to the circle with centre O.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 50
AP = AR ….(i)
Similarly AQ and AS are the tangents to the circle with centre C
AQ = AS ….(ii)
Adding (i) and (ii)
AP + AQ = AR + AS
=> PQ = RS
Hence proved.

Question 37.
Two concentric circles are of diameters 30 cm and 18 cm. Find the length of the chord of the larger circle which touches the smaller circle. [CBSE 2014]
Solution:
Let R be the radius of outer circle and r be the radius if small circle of two concentric circle
AB is the chord of the outer circle and touches the smaller circle at P
Join OP, OA
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 51
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 52

Question 38.
AB and CD are common tangents to two circles of equal radii. Prove that AB = CD. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Given : AB and CD are tangents to two circles of equal radii.
To prove :
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 53
Construction : Join OA, OC, O’B and O’D
Proof: Now, ∠OAB = 90°
[tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to radius through the point of contact]
Thus, AC is a straight line.
Also, ∠OAB + ∠OCD = 180°
AB || CD
Similarly, BD is a straight line and ∠O’BA = ∠O’DC = 90°
Also, AC = BD
[radii of two circles are equal] In quadrilateral ABCD,
∠A = ∠B = ∠C = ∠D = 90°
andAC = BD
ABCD is a rectangle
Hence, AB = CD
[opposite sides of rectangle are equal]

Question 39.
A triangle PQR is drawn to circumscribe a circle of radius 8 cm such that the segments QT and TR, into which QR is divided by the point of contact T, are of lengths 14 cm and 16 cm respectively. If area of ∆PQR is 336 cm², find the sides PQ and PR. [CBSE 2014]
Solution:
∆PQR is circumscribed by a circle with centre O and radius 8 cm
T is point of contact which divides the line segment OT into two parts such that
QT = 14 cm and TR = 16 cm
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 54
Area of ∆PQR = 336 cm²
Let PS = x cm
QT and QS are tangents to the circle from Q
QS = QT = 14 cm
Similarly RU and RT are tangents to the circle
RT = RU = 16 cm
Similarly PS and PU are tangents from P
PS = PU = x
Now PQ = x + 14 and PR = x + 16 and QR = 14 + 16 = 30 cm
Now area of ∆PQR = Area of ∆POQ + area of ∆QOR + area of ∆POR
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 55

Question 40.
In the figure, the tangent at a point C of a circle and a diameter AB when extended itersect at P. If ∠PCA = 110°, find ∠CBA. [NCERT Exemplar]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 56
Solution:
Here, AB is a diameter of the circle from point C and a tangent is drawn which meets at a point P.
Join OC. Here, OC is radius.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 57
Since, tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to the radius through point of contact circle.
OC ⊥ PC
Now, ∠PCA = 110° [given]
=> ∠PCO + ∠OCA = 110°
=> 90° + ∠OCA = 110°
=> ∠OCA = 20°
OC = OA = Radius of circle
∠OCA = ∠OAC = 20°
[since, two sides are equal, then their opposite angles are equal]
Since, PC is a tangent, so
∠BCP = ∠CAB = 20°
[angles in a alternate segment are equal]
In ∆PBC, ∠P + ∠C + ∠A= 180°
∠P = 180° – (∠C + ∠A)
∠P = 180° – (110° + 20°)
∠P = 180° – 130° = 50°
In ∆PBC,
∠BPC + ∠PCB + ∠PBC = 180°
[sum of all interior angles of any triangle is 180°]
=> 50° + 20° + ∠PBC = 180°
=> ∠PBC = 180° – 70°
∠PBC = 110°
Since, ∆PB is a straight line.
∠PBC + ∠CBA = 180°
∠CBA = 180° – 110° = 70°

Question 41.
AB is a chord of a circle with centre O, AOC is a diameter and AT is the tangent at A as shown in the figure. Prove that ∠BAT = ∠ACB. [NCERT Exemplar]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 58
Solution:
Since, AC is a diameter line, so angle in semicircle makes an angle 90°.
∠ABC = 90° [by property]
In ∆ABC,
∠CAB + ∠ABC + ∠ACB = 180°
[ sum of all interior angles of any triangle is 180°]
=> ∠CAB + ∠ACB = 180° – 90° = 90° ……….(i)
Since, diameter of a circle is perpendicular to the tangent.
i.e. CA ⊥ AT
∠CAT = 90°
=> ∠CAB + ∠BAT = 90° …….(ii)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
∠CAB + ∠ACB = ∠CAB + ∠BAT
=> ∠ACB = ∠BAT
Hence proved.

Question 42.
In the given figure, a ∆ABC is drawn to circumscribe a circle of radius 4 cm such that the segments BD and DC are of lengths 8 cm and 6 cm respectively. Find the lengths of sides AB and AC, when area of ∆ABC is 84 cm². [CBSE 2015]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 59
Solution:
In the given figure,
In ∆ABC is circle is inscribed touching it at D, E and F respectively.
Radius of the circle (r) = 4cm
OD ⊥ BC, then
OD = 4 cm, BD = 8 cm, DC = 6 cm
Join OE and OF
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 60
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 61

Question 43.
In the given figure, AB is a diameter of a circle with centre O and AT is a tangent. If ∠AOQ = 58°, find ∠ATQ. [CBSE 2015]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 62
Solution:
In the given figure,
AB is the diameter, AT is the tangent
and ∠AOQ = 58°
To find ∠ATQ
Arc AQ subtends ∠AOQ at the centre and ∠ABQ at the remaining part of the circle
∠ABQ = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ∠AOQ = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) x 58° = 29°
Now in ∆ABT,
∠BAT = 90° ( OA ⊥ AT)
∠ABT + ∠ATB = 90°
=> ∠ABT + ∠ATQ = 90°
=> 29° + ∠ATQ = 90°
=> ∠ATQ = 90°- 29° = 61°

Question 44.
In the figure, OQ : PQ = 3:4 and perimeter of ∆POQ = 60 cm. Determine PQ, QR and OP.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 63
Solution:
In the figure, OQ : PQ = 3:4
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 64
Perimeter of ∆POQ = 60 cm
To find PQ, QR and OP
OQ : PQ = 3 : 4
Let OQ = 3x and PQ = 4x
Now in right ∆OPQ,
OP² = OQ² + PQ² = (3x)² + (4x)² = 9x² + 16x² = 25x² = (5x)²
OP = 5x
But OQ + QP + OP = 60 cm
3x + 4x + 5x = 60
=> 12x = 60
x = 5
PQ = 4x = 4 x 5 = 20 cm
QR = 2 OQ = 2 x 3x = 6 x 5 = 30 cm
OP = 5x = 5 x 5 = 25 cm

Question 45.
Equal circles with centre O and O’ touch each other at X. OO’ produced to meet a circle with centre O’, at A. AC is a tangent to the circle whose centre is O. O’ D is perpendicular to AC. Find the value of \(\frac { DO’ }{ CO }\)
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 65
Solution:
Two equal circles with centre O and O’ touch each other externally at X
OO’ produced to meet at A
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 66
AC is the tangent of circle with centre O,
O’D ⊥ AC is drawn OC is joined
AC is tangent and OC is the radius
OC ⊥ AC
O’D ⊥ AC
OC || O’D
Now O’A = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) A x or \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) AO
Now in O’AD and AOAC
∠A = ∠A (common)
∠AO’D = ∠AOC (corresponding angles)
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 67

Question 46.
In the figure, BC is a tangent to the circle with centre O. OE bisects AP. Prove that ∆AEO ~ ∆ABC.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 68
Solution:
Given : In the figure, BC is a tangent to the circle with centre O at B.
AB is diameter AC is joined which intersects the circle at P
OE bisects AP
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 69
To prove : ∆AEO ~ ∆ABC
Proof: In ∆OAE and ∆OPE
OE = OE (common)
OA = OP ‘ (radii of the same circle)
EA = EP (given)
∆OAE = ∆OPE (SSS axiom)
∠OEA = ∠OEP
But ∠OEA + ∠OEP = 180°
∠OEA = 90°
Now in ∆AEO and ∆ABC
∠OEA = ∠ABC (each 90°)
∠A = ∠A (common)
∆AEO ~ ∆ABC (AA axiom)
Hence proved.

Question 47.
In the figure, PO ⊥ QO. The tangents to the circle at P and Q intersect at a point T. Prove that PQ and OT are right bisectors of each other.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 70
Solution:
Given : In the figure, O is the centre of the circle
PO ⊥ QO
They tangents at P and Q intersect each other at T
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 71
To prove : PQ and OT are right bisector of each other
Proof : PT and QT are tangents to the circle
PT = QT
OP and OQ are radii of the circle and ∠POQ = 90° ( PO ⊥ QO)
OQTP is a square Where PQ and OT are diagonals
Diagonals of a square bisect each other at right angles
PQ and OT bisect each other at right angles
Hence PQ and QT are right bisectors of each other.

Question 48.
In the figure, O is the centre of the circle and BCD is tangent to it at C. Prove that ∠BAC + ∠ACD = 90°.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 72
Solution:
Given : In the figure, O is the centre of the circle BCD is a tangent, CP is a chord
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 73
prove : ∠BAC + ∠ACD = 90°
Proof: ∠ACD = ∠CPA (Angles in the alternate segment)
But in ∆ACP,
∠ACP = 90° (Angle in a semicircle)
∠PAC + ∠CPA = 90°
=> ∠BAC + ∠ACD = 90°
(∠ACD = ∠CPA proved)
Hence proved.

Question 49.
Prove that the centre of a circle touching two intersecting lines lies on the angle bisector of the lines. [NCERT Exemplar]
Solution:
Given : Two tangents PQ and PR are drawn from an external point P to a circle with centre O.
To prove : Centre of a circle touching two intersecting lines lies on the angle bisector of the lines.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 74
Construction : Join OR, and OQ.
In ∆POR and ∆POQ
∠PRO = ∠PQO = 90°
[tangent at any point of a circle is perpendicular to the radius through the point of contact]
OR = OQ [radii of same circle]
Since, OP is common.
∆PRO = ∆PQO [RHS]
Hence, ∠RPO = ∠QPO [by CPCT]
Thus, O lies on angle bisector of PR and PQ.
Hence proved.

Question 50.
In the figure, there are two concentric circles with centre O. PRT and PQS are tangents to the inner circle from a point P lying on the outer circle. If PR = 5 cm, find the lengths of PS. [CBSE 2017]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 75
Solution:
Construction : Join OS and OP.
Consider ∆POS
We have,
PO = OS
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 76
∆POS is an isosceles triangle.
We know that in an isosceles triangle, if a line drawn perpendicular to the base of the triangle from the common vertex of the equal sides, then that line will bisect the base (unequal side).
And PQ = PR = 5 cm
[PRT and PQS are tangents to the inner circle to the inner circle from a point P lying on the outer circle]
We have, PQ = QS
It is given that, PQ = 5 cm
QS = 5 cm
From the figure, we have
PS = PQ + QS
=> PS = 5 + 5
=> PS = 10 cm

Question 51.
In the figure, PQ is a tangent from an external point P to a circle with centre O and OP cuts the circle at T and QOP is a diameter. If ∠POR = 130° and S is a point on the circle, find ∠1 + ∠2. [CBSE 2017]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 77
Solution:
Construction : Join RT.
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 78
Given, ∠POR = 130°
∠POQ = 180°- (∠POR) = 180° – 130° = 50°
Since, PQ is a tangent
∠PQO = 90°
Now, In ∆POQ,
∠POQ + ∠PQO + ∠QPO = 180°
=> 50° + 90° + ∠1 = 180°
=> ∠1 = 180° – 140°
=> ∠1 = 40°
Now, In ∆RST
∠RST = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ∠ROT
[Angle which is subtended by on arc at the centre of a circle is double the size of the angle subtended at any point on the circumference]
=> ∠2 = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) x 130° = 65°
Now ∠1 + ∠2 = 40° + 65° = 105°

Question 52.
In the figure, PA and PB are tangents to the circle from an external point P. CD is another tangent touching the circle at Q. If PA = 12 cm, QC = QD = 3 cm, then find PC = PD. [CBSE 2017]
RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 79
Solution:
PA = PB = 12 cm …(i)
QC = AC = 3cm …(ii)
QD = BD = 3 cm …(iii)
[Tangents drawn from an external point are equal]
To find : PC + PD
= (PA – AC) + (PB – BD)
= (12 – 3) + (12 – 3) [From (i), (ii), and (iii)]
= 9 + 9 = 18 cm

Hope given RD Sharma Class 10 Solutions Chapter 8 Circles Ex 8.2 are helpful to complete your math homework.

If you have any doubts, please comment below. Learn Insta try to provide online math tutoring for you.

Organisms and Populations Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 13

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 13 Important Extra Questions Organisms and Populations

Organisms and Populations Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Define microclimate.
Answer:
Microclimate represents the climatic

Question 2.
Define habitat and niche.
Answer:
Habitat is the native environment of conditions that prevail at a local scale or in animal or place. area of limited size. Niche is the position or function of an organism in a community of plants and animals.

Question 3.
How is thermoregulation achieved in polar bears?
Answer:
Thermoregulation in the polar bear. By developing blubber in a subcutaneous zone prevents loss of body heat.

Question 4.
What are osmoconformers? Give one example.
Answer:
Osmoconformers. Animals that can change the osmolarity of their body fluids according to that of the surrounding medium are termed osmoconformers, e.g. Myxine.

Question 5.
What factors cause annual variations in the intensity and duration of temperature?
Answer:

  1. Rotation of the earth around the Sun.
  2. The tilt of the earth on its axis.

Question 6.
Species that can tolerate a narrow range of temperature are called ………………..
Answer:
Stenothermic.

Question 7.
What are eurythermic species?
Answer:
Species that can tolerate a wide range of temperature variations are called eurythermic.

Question 8.
Species that can tolerate a wide range of salinity are called ……………………
Answer:
Euryhaline.

Question 9.
Define stenohaline species.
Answer:
It is a species that lives within a narrow range of salinity.

Question 10.
Name two factors that cause the formation of major biomes.
Answer:

  1. Variation in the intensity and duration of temperature.
  2. Variation in precipitation.

Question 11.
What is the main cause of salinity?
Answer:
Salinity is due to the accumulation of soluble minerals on the surface or beneath the surface of the earth.

Question 12.
What does the stratification of community depict?
Answer:
Stratification of a community depicts vertical layering of vegetation.

Question 13.
From where are individual organisms derived?
Answer:
Individual organisms are always derived from pre-existing organisms through the mechanism of reproduction-may be vegetative, asexual or sexual.

Question 14.
List two negative interactions between two species.
Answer:
Parasitism, Predation.

Question 15.
What is the other term for facultative mutualism?
Answer:
Protocooperation.

Question 16.
Name the association in which one species produces a poisonous substance or a change in environmental conditions that is harmful to another species. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Amensalism.

Question 17.
What is mycorrhiza?
Answer:
It is a symbiotic or mutually beneficial association between a fungus and roots of higher plants.

Question 18.
Emergent land plants that can tolerate the salinity of the sea are called ………………..
Answer:
Mangrove plants.

Question 19.
Give an example of a commensal relationship.
Answer:

  1. Epiphytes and tree,
  2. Remora fish and shark.

Question 20.
Define community periodicity.
Answer:
The recurrence of daily or seasonal or lunar changes in a community is called community periodicity.

Question 21.
Mention any two significant roles predation plays in nature. (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Role of predators:

  1. Transferring energy to a higher trophic level.
  2. They keep the prey population under control.

Question 22.
Why is the polar region not a suitable habitat for a tiny hummingbird? (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Tiny animals like hummingbird have more surface area compared to their volume. So heat loss may occur which will not be good for the tiny bird in polar regions.

In polar regions, only animals with a thick layer of fat below the skin can survive.

Question 23.
Between birds and amphibians which will be able to cope with global warming? Give reason. (CBSE2008)
Answer:
Birds will be able to cope with global warming because they are homeotherms as body temperature remains constant irrespective to change in surroundings.

Question 24.
Which one of the two stenothermal or eurythermal shows a wide range of distribution on the earth? (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Eurythermal shows a wide range of distribution on the earth because they can tolerate a wide range of temperature.

Question 25.
In a pond, there were 30 Hydrilla plants. Through reproduction 10 new Hydrilla plants were added in a year. Calculate the birth rate of the population. (CBSE 2010)
Answer:
A number of individuals added = 10 per 20 Hydrilla plants.

\frac{10}{30}= 0.33 offspring per hydrilla plant per year.

Question 26.
How is ‘stratification’ represented in a forest ecosystem? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2014)
Answer:
Stratification is a grouping of plants in a forest into two or more well-defined layers depending upon height like tall trees, medium-sized trees, small trees, bushes and herbs. In the rainforest, it is multi-storeyed.

Question 27.
Give an example of an organism that enters ‘diapause’ and why? (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
Under unfavourable conditions, many zooplanktonic species in lakes and ponds enter a stage of suspended development called diapause.

Organisms and Populations Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Certain species of wasps are seen to
frequently visit flowering fig trees. What type of interaction is seen between them and why? (CBSE 2008, 2014)
Answer:

  1. Mutualism.
  2. Flowers of a fig tree can only be pollinated by wasp species. In return, female wasp visits the fruit of fig as not only an egg-laying site but also uses the developing seed in fruit for nourishing its larvae.

Question 2.
Write a short note on microclimate.
Answer:
Microclimate: It represents the climatic conditions that prevail at a local scale, or in areas of limited size such as the immediate surroundings of plants and animals. Microclimate generally differs from the prevailing regional climatic conditions. For example, in a forest, dense foliage reduces the amount of light reaching the ground. This also results in a changed air temperature profile. The day-time air temperature inside the forests is lower than the outside temperature. Also, the interior of a forest may be more humid than a nearby non-forested area.

Question 3.
What are the effects of organisms on habitat?
Answer:
Effects of organisms on habitat:

  1. Excessive growth may lead to the death of the habitat as in the case of water hyacinth- an increase in population had led to the death of Hussain Sagar lake of Hyderabad.
  2. The predominance of a predator will reduce the population of prey.
  3. Man manipulates the habitat and has affected the forest causing serious problems due to deforestation. More so man has created pollution of air, water and land.

Question 4.
How do you differentiate habitat from the environment?
Answer:
Differences between habitat and environment:

Habitat Environment
(i) It is the living place of organisms. (i) It Is a specific region surrounding the population of organisms.
(ii) It is a part of the total environment. (ii) It is larger than a habitat.
(iii) It must offer food, shelter and climate condition suitable for the organism to live and flourish. (iii) It has a special condition suitable for specific organisms. Example. Desert rats of Rajasthan are not found in plains of U.P and M.P

Question 5.
Differentiate microhabitat. between habitat and
Answer:
Differences between habitat and microhabitat:

Habitat Microhabitat
(i) It is a living place of an organism. (i) It is a more localised part of the habitat.
(ii) It is a part of the total environment of the region. (ii) It is a part of the habitat.
(iii) It has a common climate for all organisms. Example. Sundarban forests are the habitat of Bengal tigers. (iii) It is mostly suited for specific animals, e.g. sediments of pond or togs.

Question 6.
List the means by which organisms survive at freezing temperatures.
Answer:

  1. The animals are usually white or light coloured. The light colouration of animals helps in camouflage with snow and thermal regulation.
  2. Animals are thickly coated with fur.
  3. Presence of a thick layer of fat below the skin.

Question 7.
Differentiate eurythermal, stenothermal and euryhaline animals.
Answer:
Differences between eurythermal, stenothermal and euryhaline animals:

Eurythermal Animals Stenothermal Animals Euryhaline Animals
These are the animals/ organisms which can tolerate a wide range of temperatures. These are the animals/ organisms which can tolerate only: a narrow range of temperatures. These are the animals that can tolerate a wide range of salinity of the medium.

Question 8.
Explain how is an orchid plant adapted to changes in temperature and humidity.
Answer:
An orchid plant, e.g.Venda, an epiphyte, is a native of tropical forests of India and South Asia.

Its adaptations are:

  • Stem stores water and leaves are adapted to keep water in and dryness out.
  • Roots of the plant secure their attachment to the bark of the tree and help in the absorption of moisture from humid air or rain.

Question 9.
Why do submerged plants receive weaker illuminations than exposed floating plants in a lake?
Answer:
Because light intensities of stronger illuminations are absorbed by the exposed floating plants of the lake/water-bodies, so only the weaker illuminations reach the submerged, Some light is reflected at the water surface and a part is absorbed by upper layers of water.

Question 10.
Categorise the following plants into hydrophytes, halophytes, mesophytes and xerophytes. Give reasons for your answers.
(i) Salvinia
Answer:
Hydrophyte. Because it is not able to tolerate deficiency of water. It is partially or completely submerged.

(ii) Opuntia
Answer:
Xerophyte. Because it prefers a dry and hot climate with low rainfall, thus has succulent leaves.

(iii) Rhizophora
Answer:
Halophyte. Because it grows in a saline habitat.

(iv) Marigifera
Answer:
Mesophyte. Because it prefers areas with high moisture content.

Question 11.
If a freshwater fish is placed in an aquarium containing seawater, will the fish be able to survive? Explain giving reasons. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
No, a freshwater fish placed in the aquarium containing sea-water will not be able to survive. Because its body system is adapted to function normally in a narrow range of salinity and it cannot survive in the high salinity of sea-water.

Question 12.
Distinguish between population and community.
Answer:
Differences between population and community:

Population Community
(i) Group of individuals of same species inhabiting the same area. (i) Group of species lying in the same area.
(ii) Organism in a population undergoes the same life cycle. (ii) Different species have a different life cycle.

Question 13.
How does population size increase or decrease?
Answer:

  • Population (size/density) increases by birth, hatching, germination and immigration that add individuals.
  • Population (size/density) decreases by death and emigration. The population is regulated by food, space, disease, natural calamities and environmental factors.

Question 14.
Differentiate between natality rate and death/mortality rate.
Answer:
Differences between natality rate and mortality rate:

Character

Natality rate  

Morality rate

(i) Definition A number of births per 1,000 individuals of a population per year. A number of death per 1,000 individuals of a population per year.
(ii) Population size and population density. Increases Decreases

Question 15.
Discuss the role of predators in an ecosystem.
Answer:
Predators are of great importance as they play the following important roles in an ecosystem:

  1. They act as ‘conduits’ for energy transfer to higher trophic levels.
  2. They keep the prey population under control, which otherwise can reach very high population density and cause an imbalance in the ecosystem,
  3. They help in maintaining species diversity in a community by reducing the intensity of competition among the competing prey species.

Question 16.
What is brood parasitism? Give an example.
Answer:
Brood parasitism. It refers to the phenomenon in which one (parasitic) bird species lays its eggs in the nest of another bird species.

Evolution has occurred in such a way that the eggs of the parasitic birds resemble those of the host bird in size, colour, etc. to avoid the host bird detecting the foreign eggs and ejecting them from the nest. Example. Cuckoo birds lay eggs in the nests of crows.

Question 17.
List a few adaptations that parasites have developed. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Parasites have evolved one or more of the following adaptations:

  1. Loss of unnecessary sense organs.
  2. Presence of hooks/adhesive organs and suckers.
  3. Loss of digestive system.
  4. High reproductive capacity.
  5. Produces antitoxins to counter toxins to the host.

Question 18.
How do parasites harm the host?
Answer:
The parasites harm the host in the following ways:

  1. Reduces the survival of the host.
  2. Growth and reproductive rates of hosts are reduced.
  3. Render the most vulnerable to its predators by making them physically weak.

Question 19.
Justify the statement “Predators and scavengers are markedly different.”
Answer:
Predators feed on another organism, i.e. prey, whereas scavenger feeds on dead animals or an animal killed by another animal. A predator can be a prey also, e.g. a frog eats insects and the frog may be eaten by a snake. But a scavenger such as jackals, hyenas and vultures cannot kill zebra or giraffe or deer but a lion kills them and leaves a part of it to be eaten by such scavengers.

Question 20.
Mention any two significant roles predators play in nature. (CBSE 2008, 2016)
Answer:
Role of predators:

  1. Transferring energy to a higher trophic level.
  2. Keeping the prey population under control.

Question 21.
How do organisms manage stressful conditions existing in their habitat for a short duration? Explain with the help of one example each. (CBSE (Delhi) 2008)
Answer:
Physiological adaptations allow some organisms to respond quickly to stressful conditions. At high altitude, mountain (altitude) sickness is experienced resulting in nausea, fatigue and heart palpitations. It is due to low atmospheric pressure at high altitude and the body does not receive the proper amount of oxygen. It is accommodated by increasing RBC production, decreasing the binding capacity of haemoglobin and increasing breathing rate.

Question 22.
Explain with the help of an example each of any three ways the ecologists use to measure the population density of different organisms rather than by calculating their absolute number. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Method to measure population density: Population density is the number of individuals of a species per unit area or volume.

PD= N/S

Where N = The no. of the individual in the region
S = No. of the unit area in a region

  1. Number of animals per square kilometre
  2. Number of trees per hectare
  3. A number of phytoplanktons per cubic litre of water. Sometimes the relative densities also serve the purpose, that is
  • The number of fish caught per trap is good enough to measure the population of fish.
  • Tiger census is based on pug marks and faecal pellets.

Question 23.
Name the interaction in each of the following:
(i) The cuckoo lays her eggs in the crow’s nest.
Answer:
Brood parasitism.

(ii) Orchid grows on a mango tree.
Answer:
Commensalism.

(ii) Ticks live on the skin of dogs.
Answer:
Parasitism.

(iv) Sea anemone is often found on the shell of a hermit crab. (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Answer:
Mutualism.

Question 24.
Name the interaction in each of the following:
(i) Cuscuta growing on a shoe flower plant.
Answer:
Parasitism.

(ii) Mycorrhizae living on the roots of higher plants.
Answer:
Mutualism.

(iii) Clownfish living among the tentacles of a sea anemone.
Answer:
CommensaLism.

(iv) Koel laying its eggs in the crow’s nest. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Brood parasitism.

Question 25.
Name the interaction In each of the following:
(i) Ascaris worms living in the intestine of human.
Answer:
ParasItism

(ii) Suckerfish attached to the shark.
Answer:
Commensalism

(iii) Smaller barnacles disappeared when Balanus dominated the coast of Scotland.
Answer:
Competition

(iv) Wasp pollinating fig inflorescence. (CBSE 2008)
Answer:
Mutualism.

Question 26.
Why do clownfish and sea anemone pair up? What is this relationship called? (CBSE 2012)
Answer:

  1. Commensalism,
  2. Interaction between sea-anemone that has stinging tentacles and the clownfish that lives among them in which fish gets protection from predators. The anemone does not appear to derive any benefit from the clownfish.

Question 27.
Some organisms suspend their metabolic activities to survive in unfavourable conditions. Explain with the help of any four examples. (CBSE 2012)
Answer:

  1. Thick-walled spores of bacteria and fungi help them to overcome unfavourable conditions.
  2. Frogs and lizards undergo hibernation during the winter season.
  3. Snails and fish undergo aestivation during summer to avoid summer-related problems of heat and desiccation.
  4. Species of zooplankton are known to enter a suspended state of development termed-diapause.

Question 28.
A moss plant is unable to complete its life cycle in a dry environment. State reason. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:

  1. Due to the absence of vascular tissue, water and minerals cannot be transported to various parts.
  2. Transfer of flagellated antherozooids to oospore of archegonium depends upon water.

Question 29.
Plants that inhabit a rain-forest are not found in wetlands. Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
A habitat is a specific place or area or locality having a combination of factors, physical features and barrier where a community resides. In rainforest plants adapt themselves to the specific conditions of their habitat and the characteristics adaptations related to a particular habitat are not found in those plants living in wetland and vice versa. Thus they can not inhabit a new habitat.

Question 30.
Answer:
In certain seasons we sweat profusely while in some other season we shiver. Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Humans are a warm-blooded or homeothermic or endothermal organism. They maintain a fixed body temperature despite changes in the surrounding. The optimum temperature for maximum efficiency of enzymes is 37°C. Thus the human body maintains a body temperature near it.

Homoeostasis is the phenomenon of maintaining a constant internal environment. Thus during heavy exercise or summer, sweating occurs. It helps in cooling the body. During winter, shivering helps in retaining heat within the body.

Question 31.
How did David Tillman show that the “Stability of a community depends on its species richness”? Explain. (Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
The stability of a community depends on its species richness. David Tilman’s long-term ecosystem experiments using outdoor plots provided the answer for species richness. Tilman found that plots with more species showed less year-to-year variations in total biomass. He also showed that increased diversity contributed to higher productivity.

Thus he established that the stability of a community depends on its species richness.

Organisms and Populations Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
(i) “Organisms may be conformers or regulators.” Explain this statement and give one example of each.
(ii) Why are there more conformers than regulators in the animal world? (CBSE 2017)
Or
Human is categorised as ‘regulators’. Explain how they maintain a constant body temperature. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
(i) Regulators are organisms that are able to maintain homoeostasis by physiological and behavioural means. All birds and mammals and few lower vertebrate and invertebrate species maintain homoeostasis by thermoregulation and osmoregulation, e.g. birds and mammals.

However, a majority (99%) of animals and nearly all plants cannot maintain a constant internal environment, i. e. their body temperature is not constant. They are conformers, e.g. fishes, frogs, etc.

(ii) There are more conformers than regulators in the animal world because conformers lack the capability to maintain a constant internal environment or homoeostasis. It is limited to birds, mammals and few lower vertebrate and invertebrate species only because it is a very energy-expensive process.

Question 2.
Explain the ecological hierarchy.
Answer:
Ecological hierarchy: It is a series of graded ecological categories.
Characteristics of ecological hierarchy:

  1. A biological unit at each level has a specific structure and function.
  2. In this hierarchy, smaller biological units coordinate to form the next higher level of organisation.
  3. Only the organisms show free existence.
  4. Organisms cannot live in isolation.
  5. At each level, different units show interdependence.
  6. At each level, the unit shows interaction with the physical environment (energy and matter).
  7. The biological units are successfully adapted to their environment.

Question 3.
In a seashore, the benthic animals live in sandy, muddy and rocky substrata and accordingly developed the following adaptations.
Find suitable substratum against each adaptation.
(i) Burrowing
Answer:
In a seashore, the benthic animals adapt to their mode of life according to the nature of the seafloor, e.g. Benthic animals become fossorial (burrowing) in the sandy substratum, e.g. tube worm.

(ii) Building cubes
Answer:
Benthic animals build cubes in the muddy substratum.

(iii) Holdfasts/peduncle
Answer:
Benthic animals develop holdfast/ peduncle if the substratum is rocky.

Question 4.
In a pond, we see plants that are free. floating, rooted-submerged, rooted-emergent, rooted with floating leaves. Write the type of plant against the following examples:
(i) Hydrilla
Answer:
Hydrilla is Rooted submerged.

(ii) Typha
Answer:
Typha is Rooted emergent.

(iii) Nymphaea
Answer:
Nymphaea is Rooted with floating leaves.

(iv) Lemna
Answer:
Lemna is Free-floating.

(v) Vallisneria.
Answer:
Vallisneria is Rooted submerged.

Question 5.
Why do all the freshwater organisms have contractile vacuoles whereas the majority of marine organisms lack them?
Answer:
Contractile vacuole helps in maintaining salt and water level called osmoregulation. Because of the cellular environment of a freshwater organism such as Amoeba, Paramecium etc. being hypertonic, the water diffuses inside the cell constantly and gets collected in the contractile vacuole, which squeezes the extra water out of the cell periodically.

While in the case of marine protozoans organisms, this does not occur due to high salt concentration. These organisms live in isotonic conditions in seawater. Thus there is no need for contractile vacuole.

Question 6.
Explain the following terms:
(i) Mimicry
Answer:
Mimicry: It is a phenomenon in which a living organism modifies its form, appearance, structure or behaviour and looks like another living organism or some inanimate (non-living) object so as to defend from its predators, or to increase the chances of capturing the prey.

The individual which shows mimicry is called a mimic, while the animate or inanimate object with which a mimic resembles is called a model. The concept of mimicry was first observed by an English naturalist, Henry Bates (1862 A.D.), so the phenomenon is also called Batesian mimicry.

Types: Mimicry is of three types:
(a) Protective mimicry,
(b) Aggressive mimicry,
(c) Feigning death or Conscious mimicry.

(ii) Acclimatisation
Answer:
Acclimatisation: The gradual physiological adjustment to slowly changing new environmental conditions is known as acclimatisation. If some factors shift beyond the tolerance range, the organism can come to a tolerance range or migrate to acclimatise.

Question 7.
DepIct the temperature-based thermal stratification in lakes.
Answer:
Thermal stratification in Lakes:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 1

Thermal stratification occurs in lakes, the seasonal mixing patterns of a lake are determined by its temperature profile.

Question 8.
1. How does age distribution help in the study of the population?
2. How does an age pyramid, for the human population at a given point of time helps the policymakers in planning the future? (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Or
Draw a stable human age pyramid. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Age distribution (Age composition). The relative abundance of the organisms of various age groups in the population is called the age distribution of the population. With regard to age distribution, there are three kinds of populations:

1. Rapidly growing population. It has a high birth rate and low death rate, so there is more number of young individuals in the population. According to a recent survey, more than 42% of the Indian population consists of children below the age of 14 years, so the Indian population is called the young population.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 2
2. Stationary population: It has equal birth and death rates, so the population shows zero population growth.

3. Declining population. It has a higher death rate than the birth rate, so the population of young members is lower than that of old members.
(a) For the human population, the age pyramids generally show the age distribution of males and females in a combined diagram.
(b) The shape of the age pyramid reflects the growth status of the population. Thus age pyramid for the human population at a given time helps the policymakers in planning for the future.

Question 9.
Discuss life-history traits of an organism that have evolved in relation to the constraints imposed by biotic and abiotic factors in their habitat.
Answer:
According to ecologists, life-history traits of an organism have evolved in relation to the constraints imposed by the biotic and abiotic factors in their habitats.

  1. It can be illustrated with vast variations and life history.
  2. The evolution of populations aims at improving reproductive fitness or Darwinian fitness to the maximum in their habitats.
  3. They evolve towards the most efficient reproductive strategy.
  4. Organisms like Pacific Salmon fish and bamboo breed only once in their lifetime.
  5. Most birds and mammals breed many times during their lifetime.
  6. Oysters and pelagic fishes produce a large number of small-sized offspring.
  7. Birds and mammals produce a small number of large-sized offspring.

Question 10.
What is the predator-prey relationship? Give example. (CBSE 2016)
Answer:
Predation. It is an interspecific interaction, where one animal (called predator) kills Organisms and Populations and consumes the other weaker animal (called prey). Herbivores are predators of plants.

Predator-prey relationship. It is a kind of direct food relationship between two species of animals in which larger species, called predator, attacks, kills and feeds on the smaller species, called prey. It was proved by G.F. Gause (1934).

Although predation and competition appear to be very harmful processes, they are essential to keep a check on the size of the population of other species.

Predation is nature’s way of transferring the energy fixed by plants, to higher trophic levels.
Examples:

  1. A tiger killing and eating a deer.
  2. A snake eating a frog.
  3. A sparrow eating a fruit/seed.

Question 11.
Many prey organisms have developed different defence mechanism. Give a few examples.
Answer:
Prey species have developed various defence mechanisms to reduce the impact of predation; some of them are listed below:

  1. Certain insect species and frogs have camouflage (cryptic colouration) to avoid detection by their predators.
  2. Some animals (e.g. monarch butterfly) are highly distasteful to their predators. This butterfly species accumulates a chemical by feeding on a poisonous weed during its caterpillar stage.
  3. Some prey species are poisonous and hence are avoided by predators, e.g. Dart frogs like Phyllobates bicolour and Dendrobats.

Question 12.
“Herbivores are the predators of plants”. Discuss a few defence mechanisms of plants against herbivory.
Or
Write what do phytophagous insects feed on? (CBSE2012)
Answer:
Herbivores are the predators of plants. The problem of predation is more severe for plants than animals as the plants cannot move away from the predators. About 25% of the known insects are phytophagous and feed on the sap and other parts of plants.

Plants have developed certain morphological and chemical defence mechanisms against herbivores; a few of them are listed below:

  1. Morphological: Thorns (Bougainvillaea) and spines (Acacia, Cactus, etc.) are the most common morphological means of defence.
  2. Chemical: Plants produce and store certain chemicals which function in one or more of the following ways:
    (a) They make the animal feel sick.
    (b) They inhibit them from feeding.
    (c) They interfere with digestion.
    (d) They even directly kill them, e.g. Calotropis produces a highly poisonous glycoside, that is a cardiac poison.
    (e) Nicotine, strychnine, opium, quinine, etc. are the chemicals produced by plants for their defence against herbivores.

Question 13.
What is parasitism? Define parasite and host. What are the kinds of parasite?
Answer:
Parasitism: This is a relationship between two organisms in which one obtains its nourishment from the other and harms it at the same time.

Parasite: The organism which obtains its food from the other without directly killing it is known as a parasite. Parasites are host specific and parasite and host tend to co-evolve.

Host: The second organism which provides food to the parasite is named the host. Endoparasite. The parasite that lives inside the body of the host is known as endoparasite.

Ectoparasite. The parasite lives on the outside of the body of the host, e.g. Leech, Louse, Bedbug.

Question 14.
Define commensalism. Give examples.
Answer:
Commensalism: It is defined as the interspecific interaction where one species is benefitted while the other species is neither benefitted nor harmed.
Examples:

  1. Orchids grow as epiphytes on mango or other fruit trees. Orchids are benefitted by getting shelter, while the tree is neither benefitted nor harmed.
  2. The clownfish living among sea anemones get protection from their predators, which stay away from the stinging tentacles of the sea anemone.
  3. Barnacles growing on the whale are benefitted to move to where food is available.
  4. The cattle egrets always forage near where the cattle are grazing. As the cattle animals stir up, the insects are flushed out from the vegetation. The egrets are benefitted from this as otherwise, it might be difficult for the birds to detect and catch the insects.

Question 15.
Differentiate between the following:
(i) Mutualism commensalism.
Answer:
Differences between mutualism and commensalism:

Mutualism commensalism
(i) It is the inter-specific interaction, in which both the interacting species are benefitted. (i) It is the interspecific interaction, in which one species is benefitted white the other is neither benefitted nor harmed.
(ii) It may or may not involve physical association. (ii) The two individuals come in close physical contact.

(ii) Commensalism and amensalism.
Answer:
Differences between commensalism and amensalism:

Commensalism Amensalism
It is the interspecific interaction in which one species is benefitted while the other one is neither harmed nor benefitted. It is the interspecific interaction in which one species is harmed I affected, while the other is neither benefitted nor harmed.

(iii) Predators and parasites.
Answer:
Differences between predators and parasites:

Predators Parasites
(1) Predators are Larger and stronger animals that kill and consume the prey. (i) Parasites are small or microscopic organisms that depend on the host.
(ii) They do not take shelter on the prey (ii) They take shelter on the host.
(iii) Their biotic potential is Low. (iii) They have higher biotic potential.
(iv) They are mobile to capture the prey. (iv) They have poor means of dispersal.
(v) They are not specific for the Prey (v) They are host-specific.

Question 16.
Study the graph given below and answer the questions that follow:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 3

(i) Write the status of food and space in the curves (a) and (b).
Answer:
Food and space are unlimited in the curve (a), while they are limited in the curve (b).

(ii) In the absence of predators, which one of the two curves would appropriately depict the prey population?
Answer:
In the absence of a predator, any species will grow exponentially and show curve (b).

(iii) Time has been shown on X-axis and there is a parallel dotted line above it. Give the significance of this dotted line. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
The dotted line represents (k). It is carrying capacity.

Question 17.
Explain parasitism and co-evolution with the help of one example of each. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:

  1. Many parasites have evolved to be host-specific. They can live as parasite only in a single species of host.
  2. These organisms parasitize in such a way that both the host and the parasite tend to co-evolve; that is if the host evolves a special mechanism for rejecting or resisting the parasite, in such conditions parasite has to evolve a mechanism to counteract and neutralise them, in order to be successful with the same host species.
  3. In accordance with their mode of living, parasites evolve special adaptations such as loss of unnecessary sense organs, presence of adhesive organs or sucker so as to cling to the host. It also loses the digestive system. Parasites have a high reproductive capacity.
  4. The human liver fluke depends on the intermediate host (a snail and a fish ) to complete the life cycle.
  5. The malarial parasite needs a female anopheles mosquito as a vector to spread to other hosts.

Question 18.
(i) In a pond, there were 200 frogs. 40 more were born in the year. Calculate the birth rate of the population.
Answer:
Birth rate = No. of individuals born/ Total no. of individuals = 40/200 = 0.2 = 0.2 frog per year.

(ii) Population in terms of number is not always a necessary parameter to measure population density. Justify with two examples. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
To measure population density, the number is not always a necessary parameter.

For example:
(a) If there are 200 Parthenium plants but only a single huge banyan tree with a large canopy, the population density of banyan is low relative to that of Parthenium which amounts to underestimating the enormous role of the banyan in that community. In such cases, the per cent cover or biomass is a more meaningful measure of the population size.
(b) In a dense laboratory culture of a microbial population in a Petri dish, the total number of microbes is again not an easily adaptable measure because as the population is huge, counting is impossible and time¬consuming.

Question 19.
How do organisms which cannot migrate tend to overcome adverse environ¬mental conditions? Explain taking one example each from vertebrates and angiosperms respectively. (CBSE Delhi 2009)
Answer:
Organisms that cannot migrate tend to overcome adverse environmental conditions by developing several methods/ features. For example, some vertebrates escape the stress caused by unfavourable environmental conditions by escaping in time like bears go into hibernation during the winter months.

In angiosperms, seeds and some other vegetative reproductive structures serve as means to tide over periods of stress. They reduce their metabolic activity and go into an inactive, i.e. ‘dormant’, state. They germinate to form new plant when the favourable conditions return.

Question 20.
Explain how tolerance to environmental factors determines the distribution of species.
Answer:
Range of tolerance: Biological species can show a range of tolerance to environmental factors. These factors show variation in their effects and anyone who is present in the least amount may become limiting. The response of an organism to a range of gradient of a single environmental factor such as temperature, sunlight or nutrient concentration forms a bell-shaped curve as shown in the figure.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 4
The response of an organism to a range or gradient of an environmental factor, (temperature, Light, nutrient)

Question 21.
Discuss in detail various adaptations found in plants and animals in snowy winter of polar regions.
Answer:
Adaptations in plant and animals of polar regions:

  1. Organisms living in polar regions have to face the severe snowy winter and show entirely different types of adaptations. Animals in polar regions are generally white or tight coloured. This light colouration helps in camouflage and in thermal regulation.
  2. During extreme winter they undergo hibernation.
  3. Animals eat a lot of food during summer and autumn and store a lot of energy in the form of fat.
  4. During hibernation, their metabolic activities are reduced considerably,
  5. The plants growing in these regions remain dormant during extreme winter months.
  6. They bear narrow leaves, spines, etc. which are shed easily and rapidly,
  7. Plants remain dwarf. Trees are usually not found in these regions as they cannot withstand the low temperatures.

Question 22.
How do desert plants prevent loss of water?
Answer:
Xeric adaptations of desert plants:

  1. Some xerophytes remain dormant either as seeds or as roots and during rains, they sprout up. It is termed ephemerals, e.g. Cassia, Argemone.
  2. Some desert plants develop succulent organs (stems, leaves and roots), e.g. Asparagus, Begonia, Bryophyilum.
  3. Presence of extensive root system.
  4. Either leaf is absent or small¬sized leaves present to minimise the rate of transpiration.
  5. The stomata get sunken to reduce the rate of transpiration.
  6. Presence of thick cuticle on stem and leaf surfaces. This reduces the rate of transpiration.
  7. Shedding of leaves in some desert plants. This helps in reducing the surface area and water loss.

Question 23.
(i) What is the competition?
Answer:
Competition is an interaction between organisms for life requirements (nutrition, shelter, sunlight, etc.). It is of two types: intraspecific and interspecific. The effort of a tiger and a leopard for prey is an interspecific competition. In general, it is believed that competition occurs among closely related species when they compete for the same resources that are limited.

(ii) Why is it not true always?
Answer:
But it is found to be not true always for the following reasons:
(a) Completely unrelated species can also compete for the same sources. For example in certain shallow lakes of South America, the visiting flamingoes and the native fishes compete for the same zooplankton as their food.

(b) Resources need not be limiting for the competition to occur, the feeding efficiency of one species might be reduced due to the interfering and inhibitory presence of the other species, even if resources are plenty.

For example, the Abingdon tortoise in Galapagos island became extinct within a decade after goats were introduced into the island: this was due to the fact that the goats had greater browsing efficiency than the tortoise.

(iii) Explain competitive release and Gause’s competitive exclusion principle.
Answer:
Another evidence for the competition is competitive release, a phenomenon in which a species whose distribution is restricted to a small geographical area due to the presence of a competitively superior species, expands its distributional range when the competing species is experimentally removed.

Gause’s competitive exclusion principle states that two closely related species competing for the same resources cannot exist together as the competitively inferior one will be eliminated, but this is true only when the resources are limiting and not otherwise.

They have also pointed out that species facing competition might evolve mechanisms that promote co¬existence, rather than exclusion.

(iv) Write contribution of Mac Arthur.
Answer:
Mac Arthur had shown that five closely related species of warblers living on the same tree were able to avoid competition and co-exist to behavioural differences in their foraging activities.

Question 24.
Illustrate symbiosis with any four examples.
Answer:
Symbiosis: It is the relationship between two individuals where both partners are benefited.

That following are examples of symbiosis:

  1. The Rhizobium bacteria present in the root nodules of leguminous plant roots are an example of symbiosis. Bacteria live in the roots in the form of nodules and avail carbohydrate and other food substances. In exchange, bacteria fix the nitrogen present in the atmosphere and make it useful for plants.
  2. Trichonympha, a protozoan parasite, lives inside the intestine of termites. The presence of this protozoan helps the termites to digest the cellulose food and the parasite gets food and shelter.
  3. Lichen plants. Lichen is the result of a symbiotic relationship between algae and fungi. In this, algae depend on fungi for water, minerals, salts and safety, whereas fungi get food material prepared by algae.
  4. The human intestine contains a large number of symbiotic bacteria that help in the synthesis of vitamin B-complex. Bacteria get necessary nutritional substances from the human intestine and a safe place for living.

Question 25.
Define phenotypic adaptation. Give one example.
Answer:
Phenotypic adaptation involves non-genetic changes in individuals such as physiological modifications, acclimatisation or behavioural changes. Some organisms possess adaptations that are phenotypic, which allow them to respond quickly to a stressful situation.

Example. If a person had ever been to any high altitude place (Rohtang pass near Manali or Mansrover in Tibet), he or she must have altitude sickness because the body does not get enough oxygen at such a height and protect itself from atmospheric hypoxia. But after some time, the body acclimatises itself to the situation by increasing the number of RBC and decreasing the binding affinity of Hb and oxygen.

Question 26.
Name important defence mechanisms in plants against herbivores.
Answer:
Defence mechanisms of plants against herbivorous animals:

  1. Formation of thick cuticle on their leaf surface.
  2. Formation of leaf spines, e.g. leaf spines in opuntia
  3. Modification of leaves into thorns, e.g. Bougainvillea and Duranta
  4. Development of spiny margins on leaves.
  5. Development of sharp silicated edges in leaves.
  6. Many plants produce and store toxic chemicals which cause discomforts to herbivores, e.g. cardiac glucoside by Calotropis, nicotine by tobacco.

Question 27.
Distinguish between the following:
(i) Hibernation and aestivation
Answer:
Differences between hibernation and aestivation:

Hibernation Aestivation
(i) Spending the winter in an inactive? dormant state, Is called hibernation (winter sleep). (i) Spending dr hot period (summer) in an inactive period is called aestivation (summer sleep).
(ii) Example. Northern ground squirrels. (ii) Example. Ground squirrels in the South West deserts.

(ii) Ectotherms and endotherms.
Answer:
Differences between ectotherms and endotherms:

Ectotherms Endotherms
Ectotherms are those animals whose body temperature changes to match with that of the surroundings, in which they are living. They cannot maintain their internal environment constant. Endotherms are those animals whose body temperature is maintained relatively constant by physiological regulation.

Question 28.
Write short notes on:
(i) adaptations of desert plants and animals. (CBSE2011)
Answer:
Adaptations of desert plants and animals:
(a) Adaptations of desert animals.

  • Animals faced with water scarcity as found in arid or desert areas, show two types of adaptations, reducing water loss and the ability to tolerate arid conditions. Kangaroo/Desert rat seldom drinks water. It has a thick coat to minimise evaporative desiccation. The animal seldom comes out of its comparatively humid and cool burrow during the daytime. 90% of its water requirement is met from metabolic water (water produced by respiratory breakdown) while 10% is obtained from food.
  • Loss of water is minimised by producing nearly solid urine and faeces.
  • Spiny skin and highly cornified in Phrynosoma (horned toad) and Moloch horridus.
  • Camels have long legs to stay away from the hot desert surface.

(b) Adaptations of desert plants.

  • Plants have thick cuticle, succulent organs where water and mucilage are stored.
  • Stomata are sunken to prevent water loss.
  • They have a well-developed branched root system.
  • They possess a waxy coating on the surface.
  • Crassulacean pathway of photosynthesis.

(ii) behavioural adaptations in animals. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Adaptations of plants to water scarcities. They are called xerophytes. The above-mentioned adaptation of plants are applicable (see part (a)).

(iii) Behavioural adaptations in animals,
(a) Hibernation
(b) Aestivation
(c) Periodic activity
(d) Camouflage
(e) Migration.

(iv) importance of light to plants.
Answer:
Importance of light to plants.
(a) Source of energy for photosynthesis
(b) Photoperiodism
(c) Pigmentation
(d) Daily rhythm
(e) Plant movements and (f) Growth.

(v) effect of temperature or water scarcity and the adaptation of animals.
Answer:
Effect of temperature or water scarcity and adaptation of animals. Optimum temperature is necessary for animals, survival as all the metabolic activities are driven by enzymes. And enzymes work actively only in a certain optimum range of temperature. Regulators can regulate their body temperature in case of temperature fluctuations in the external environment. Conformers also try to maintain temperature by certain methods but not internally.

Similarly, water is also necessary for the metabolic activities of animals. Various adaptations seen in animals to deal with temperature fluctuations are

  • thick fur,
  • sweating, short limbs and ears.

Various adaptation to counter the scarcity of water is the ability to use metabolic water, store water, reduced water loss, etc.

Question 29.
With the help of a suitable diagram describe the logistic population growth curve. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Logistic popuLation growth curve.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 5

S-shaped Population growth curve (Verhulst-Pearl logistic growth curve)

Unlimited resources result in exponential growth. Many countries have realised this fact and introduced various restraints to limit human population growth. In nature, a given habitat has enough resources to support a maximum possible number, beyond which no further growth is possible. This limit is called carrying capacity (K) for that species in that habitat.

A population growing in a habitat with limited resources shows initially a lag phase, followed by phases of increase and decrease and finally the population density reaches the carrying capacity. A plot of N in relation to time (t) results in a sigmoid curve. This type of population growth is called Verhulst-Pearl Logistic Growth as explained by the following equation:

\(\frac{d \mathrm{~N}}{d t}=r \mathrm{~N}\left(\frac{\mathrm{K}-\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{K}}\right)\)

where N = Population density at a time t; r = Intrinsic rate of natural increase and K = Carrying capacity,

\(\left[\frac{k-N}{k}\right]\) = Environmental resistance.

Since resources for growth for most animal populations become limiting sooner or later, the logistic growth model is considered a more realistic one.

Question 30.
List any three important characteristics of a population and explain. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Three important characteristics of a population are:

  1. Population size and population density
  2. Birth or natality rate
  3. Death or mortality rate.
  • Population size: It is the actual number of individuals in the population. The size of the population keeps changing with time depending on the factors like:
    (a) Food availability
    (b) Weather
    (c) Predation pressure and
    (d) Competition.

Population density is a measure of population size per unit area. The population density in a given habitat during a given period changes due to four basic processes, namely

  1. Natality,
  2. Mortality,
  3. Immigration and
  4. Emigration.

While natality and immigration contribute to an increase in the size and density of a population, mortality and emigration contribute to a decrease in them.

So the equation for population growth is: Nt + 1 = Nt + [(B + I) – (D + E)],
where Nt = population density at time t.
B = No of birth I = No of Immigration D = No of death E = No of emigration

  • If B + I is more than D – E, the population density increases.
  • If B + I is less than D – E, the population density decreases.

Birth or Natality rate. It is generally expressed as the number of births per 1,000 individuals of a population per year. It increases the population size (total number of individuals of a population) and population density. Natal or Birth Rate =

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 6

Death or Mortality rate. It is the opposite of the natality rate. It is commonly expressed as the number of deaths per 1,000 individuals of a population per year.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 7

Question 31.
Define mutualism. Give examples.
Answer:
Mutualism: It is a symbiotic relationship between the members of two species in which the two partners are mutually benefited. There is a complete dependence of the partners on each other, and one cannot survive in the absence of the other.

Sometimes the term symbiosis is used as a synonym with mutualism.
Examples:
(a) Mutualism between animal and bacteria. Symbiotic bacteria like Ruminococcus are found in the rumen part of the compound stomach of cud-chewing mammals like cattle, sheep, goat, camel, etc. and secrete cellulase enzyme to digest the cellulose of plant food eaten by the ruminants which provide food and shelter to the bacteria.

(b) Mutualism between crab and sea anemone. In this case, a sea anemone gets attached to the back of the hermit crab.

(c) The Mediterranean orchid, Ophrys, employs sexual deceit to get its flowers pollinated. In this orchid, one petal of the flower resembles the female of a bee species in size, colour, markings, etc. The male bee perceives it as a female and pseudo copulate with it. During the process, the pollen grains get dusted on its body.

Question 32.
It is observed that plant-animal interactions often involve co-evolution. Explain with the help of a suitable example. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Or
Mention four significant services that a healthy forest ecosystem provides. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Plants and animals interact for mutual ben¬efit. Plant-animal interactions often involve co-evolution of mutualism, that is, the evolution of flower and its pollinator species are tightly linked with one another. In many species of fig trees, there is a tight one to one relationship with the pollinator species of wasp. It means that a given fig species can be pollinated only by its partner wasp species and no other species.

The female wasp uses the fruit not only at the oviposition site but also uses the developing seeds within the fruit for nourishing its larvae. The wasp pol¬linates the fig inflorescence while searching for suitable egg-laying sites. In return for the favour of pollination, the fig offers the wasp some of its developing seeds as food for the developing wasp larvae.

Question 33.
(i) Compare, giving reasons, the J-shaped and S-shaped models of population growth of a species.
Answer:
There are two models of population growth-exponential growth and logistic growth.
(a) Exponential growth: This growth occurs where the resources, i.e. food and space, are unlimited. The equation can be represented as follows:
\(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = (b-d) x N

Let (b-d) = r
\(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = rN or Nt=Noert

N = population size
Nt = population density after time t.
No = population density at time zero
r = growth rate
e = base of natural log (2.71828)
b = birth rate
d = death rate
In this growth, when N in relation to time is plotted on a graph, the curve becomes J-shaped.

(b) Logistics growth model: This is a realistic approach as the resources become limited at a certain point in time.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Organisms and Populations 8

(a) J-shaped curve exponential growth
(b) S-shaped curve logistics growth Every ecosystem has limited resources to support a particular maximum carrying capacity (K). When N is plotted in relation to time t, a sigmoid S-shaped curve is obtained. It is also called Verhulst-Pearl logistic growth.

The equation is:
\(\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)=rN\(\left(\frac{K-N}{K}\right)\)

N = population density at time t
r = growth rate
K = carrying capacity.

(ii) Explain “fitness of a species” as mentioned by Darwin. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
According to Darwin “Fitness of a species” means reproductive fitness. All organisms after reaching reproductive age have a varying degree of reproductive potential. Some organisms produce more offspring, whereas some organisms produce few offspring only. This phenomenon is also called differential reproduction. The species which produces more offspring are selected by nature.

Question 34.
(i) The following are the responses of different animals to various abiotic factors. Describe each one with the help of an example.
(a) Regulate
Answer:
Regulate: Some organisms are able to maintain homoeostasis by regulating their body temperatures. The mechanisms used by most mammals to regulate their body temperature are similar to what we humans use.

For example, our body temperature remains constant at 37°C. In summer, when the outside temperature is more than our body temperature, we sweat profusely to cool down and when the temperature is much lower than 37° C, we shiver to generate heat. Thus body temperature remains constant.

(b) Conform
Answer:
Confirm: Most of the animals cannot maintain a constant internal environment. Their body temperature changes with the ambient temperature. These are called conformers. Heat loss or heat gain is a function of surface area. Since small animals have a larger surface area relative to their volume, they tend to lose body heat very fast when it is cold outside, for example, shrews and hummingbirds.

(c) Migrate
Answer:
Migrate: Organism can move away temporarily from the stressful habitat to a more hospitable area and then return when the stressful period is over.

For example, every winter, the famous Keoladeo National Park in Bharatpur hosts thousands of migratory birds coming from Siberia and other northern regions,

(d) Suspend
Answer:
Suspend: Bacteria, fungi and some lower plants survive unfavourable conditions by forming thick-walled spores. In higher plants, seeds and some other vegetative reproductive structures serve as means to tide over periods of stress. They do so by reducing their metabolic activity and going into a state of dormancy.

(ii) If 8 individuals in a population of 80 butterflies die in a week, calculate the death rate of the population of butterflies during that period. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Death Rate = \(\frac{8}{80}\) = 0.1 per week

Question 35.
(a) Identify the features of a stable biological community.
Answer:
(a) Features of the stable biological community.

  • It is stable.
  • A stable biological community is not replaced by any other community.
  • The environment becomes moister and shadier.
  • Communities should have greater biodiversity for greater stability.
  • It should be able to prevent invasion by alien species.
  • It should be able to restore itself in a short period of time.

(b) How did David Tilman’s findings link the stability of a biological community to its species richness? (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
David Tilman’s with his experiments established that the stability of a community depends on its species richness.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice

Students can access the CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science with Solutions and marking scheme Set 5 will help students in understanding the difficulty level of the exam.

CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice

Time: 3 Hours
Maximum Marks: 80

General Instructions:

(i) The question paper comprises four sections A, B, C and D. There are 36 questions in the question paper. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section-A – question no. 1 to 20 – all questions and parts there of are of one mark each.
These questions contain multiple choice questions (MCQs), very short answer questions and assertion – reason type questions. Answers to these should be given in one word or one sentence.
(iii) Section-B – question no. 21 to 26 are short answer type questions, carrying 2 marks each. Answers to these questions should in the range of 30 to 50 words.
(iv) Section-C – question no. 27 to 33 are short answer type questions, carrying 3 marks each.
Answers to these questions should in the range of 50 to 80 words. :
(v) Section—D – question no. – 34 to 36 are long answer type questions carrying 5 marks each. Answer to these questions should be in the range of 80 to 120 words.
(vi) There is no overall choice. However, internal choices have been provided in some questions. A student has to attempt only one of the alternatives in such questions.
(vii) Wherever necessary, neat and properly labelled diagrams should be drawn.

Section – A

1. If an element X is placed in group 14, what will be the formula and the nature of bonding of  its chloride?

2. Where should an object be placed from a converging lens of focal length 15 cm, so as to obtain the image of same size and real.

3. A solution of a substance ‘X’ is used in white washing.
(i) Name the substance ‘X’ and write its formula.
(ii) Write the reaction of the substance ‘X’ named in (i) above with water.
OR
What happens chemically, when quicklime is added to water filled in a bucket?

4. Three acidic solutions A, B and C have pH = 0, 3 and 5 respectively:
(i) Which solution has the highest concentration of H+ ions?
(ii) Which solution has the lowest concentration of H+ ions?

5. Generally, when metals are treated with mineral acids, hydrogen gas is liberated, but when metals (except Mn and Mg) are treated with HNO3, hydrogen is not liberated, why?

6. The volume of glomerular filtrate produced is 18 L but the volume of urine excreted is just 1 – 2 L. Give a suitable reason for this statement.

7. Ozone is deadly poisonous, still it performs an essential function. How?
OR
Write the appropriate names of trophic level ‘Z’ and ‘X’ in the figure given below.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 1

8. Covalent compounds have low melting and boiling point. Why?

9. Give an example of a flower which contains both stamens and carpels.
OR
What are sexually transmitted diseases? Name a STDs which damages the immune system of human body.

10. What is the nature of the image formed by a concave mirror, if the magnification produced by the mirror is +4?    OR
The outer surface of a hollow sphere of aluminium of radius 50 cm is to be used as a mirror. What will be the focal length of this mirror? What type of spherical mirror will it provide?
Answer:
OR 25

11. Let the resistance of an electrical component remain constant, while the potential difference across the two ends of the component decreases to half of its former value. What change will occur in the current through it?
OR
If the charge on an electron is 1.602 x 10-19 C, find the approximate number of electrons in 1C.
Answer:
OR 6.25 × 1018

12. Imagine that you are sitting in a chamber with your back to one wall. An electron beam, moving horizontally from the back wall towards the front wall, is deflected by a strong magnetic field to your right side. What is the direction of the magnetic field?

13. What will be the amount of energy available to the organisms of secondary consumer trophic level of food chain, if the energy available to producer level is 10000 Joules.

Assertion (A) and Reason (R)
For question numbers 14,15 and 16, two statements are given- one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) as given below:
(i) Both A and R are true, and R is correct explanation of the assertion.
(ii) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(iii) A is true, but R is false.
(iv) A is false, but R is true.
Answer:
100 J

14. A. The extent of refraction is different for different medium.
R. Different medium have different refractive index.
Answer:
(i)

15. CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 2
R. It is a combination reaction because CO combines with H2 to form CH3OH i.e., two substances combine to form a single compound.
Answer:
(i)

16. A. The sex of a child in human beings will be determined by the type of chromosome he/she inherits from the father.
R. A child who inherits ‘X’ chromosome from his father would be a girl (XX), while a child who inherits a ‘Y’ chromosome from the father would be a boy (XY).
OR
A. Two pink coloured flowers on crossing resulted in 1 red, 2 pink and 1 white flower progeny. R. It is due to double fertilisation.
Answer:
(i) OR (iii)

Answer Q. No 17 – 20 contain five sub-parts each. You are expected to answer any four sub¬parts in these questions.

17. Read the following and answer any four questions from 17 (i) to 17 (v) (4 x 1 = 4)
The splitting of a beam of white light into its seven constituent colours, when it passes through a glass prism, is called the dispersion of light.

When a beam of white light enters a prism, it gets refracted and splits into its seven constituent colours, viz. violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red. This splitting of the light ray occurs because of the different angles of bending for each colour. Hence, each colour while passing through the prism bends at different angles with respect to the incident beam. This gives rise to the formation of the coloured spectrum.

(i) What is the cause of dispersion of light by prism?
I. Different colours move with different speed in the prism.
II. Emergent ray bent to different extent towards the base of prism.
III. Different colours move with same speed in the prism but cover different distance.
IV. Emergent ray bent to different extent away from the base of prism.
(a) I only
(b) I and II
(c) III and IV
(d) II and III
Answer:
(b) I and II

(ii) Which colour of white light suffers least deviation when a beam of white light is passed through the prism?
(a) Blue
(b) Red
(c) Violet
(d) Green
Answer:
(b) Red

(iii) Which of the following colours viz., A, B, C and D has more speed in the prism?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 3
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
Answer:
(d) D

(iv) How will you use two identical prisms P1 and P2 so that a narrow beam of white light incident on one prism emerges out of the second prism as white light?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 4
Answer:
(c)

(v) Among the seven colours visible due to splitting of white light through prism which colour has shortest wavelength?
(a) Red
(b) Blue
(c) Violet
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Violet

18. Read the following and answer any four questions from 18 (i) to 18 (v) (4 x 1 = 4)

More than a million Americans die of cardiac diseases each year. One of the major causes is high cholesterol levels in the blood. The National Cholesterol Education Program suggests that total blood cholesterol level should be:

Blood Cholesterol Level Chart
Desirable Borderline (high) High Risk
Total Cholesterol <200 200-240 >240
Triglycerides < 150 150-500 >500
Low Density Cholesterol < 130 130-160 >160
High Density Cholesterol >50 50-35 <35

Given below are blood report of two persons

Total Cholesterol Triglycerides Low density cholesterol
Patient A 356 180 150
Patient B 180 100 90

(i) Which of the organ can be affected in patient A?
(a) Heart
(b) Kidney
(c) Lungs
(d) Brain
Answer:
(a) Heart

(ii) What information is left out for the blank column?
(a) Total cholesterol
(b) Triglycerides
(c) Low density cholesterol
(d) High density cholesterol
Answer:
(d) High density cholesterol

(iii) A person with high risk category have to be suggested a suitable diet? Which of the following are correct guidelines for the patient
(a) High sugar and starch
(b) Low salt and fats
(c) High proteins
(d) Low sugar and proteins
Answer:
(b) Low salt and fats

(iv) Apart from following a prescribed diet, some other changes should be brought in the lifestyle to avoid aggravation of symptoms in a patient who is already suffering from high blood cholesterol-
A. Yoga and exercise
B. Quitting smoking and alcohol
C. Walking and doing small chores on your own
D. Enjoying loud music
Which of the following is the correct option
(a) A ,C
(b) B,C,D
(c) A,B,C
(d) A, D
Answer:
(c) A,B,C

(v) Which of the following is correct for patient B?
(a) High total cholesterol but triglycerides in normal range
(b) Total cholesterol in normal range but triglycerides are high
(c) Total cholesterol in normal range but low density cholesterol are high
(d) Total cholesterol, triglycerides and low density cholesterol are in normal range
Answer:
(d) Total cholesterol, triglycerides and low density cholesterol are in normal range

19. Read the following and answer any four questions from 19 (i) to 19 (v) (4 x 1 = 4)

Most of the characters or traits of an organism are controlled by the genes. Genes are actually segments of DNA guiding the formation of proteins by the cellular organelles. These proteins may be enzymes, hormones, antibodies, and structural components of different types of tissues. In other words, DNA/ genes are responsible for structure and functions of a living body. Genotype of an individual controls its phenotype.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 5
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 6

(i) Select the statements that describe characteristics of genes
I. Genes are specific sequence of bases in a DNA molecule
II. A gene does not code for proteins
III. In individuals of a given species, a specific gene is located on a particular chromosome
IV. Each chromosome has only one gene
(a) I and II
(b) I and III
(c) I and IV
(d) III and IV
Answer:
(b) I and III

(ii) A Mendelian experiment consisted of breeding tall pea plants bearing violet flowers with short pea plants bearing white flowers. In the progeny, all bore violet flowers, but almost half of them were short. This suggests that the genetic makeup of tall plant can be depicted as
(a) TTWW
(b) TTww
(c) TtWW
(d) TtWw
Answer:
(c) TtWW

(iii) Two pea plants one with round green seeds (RRyy) and another with wrinkled yellow (rrYY) seeds produce Fj progeny that have round, yellow (RrYy) seeds. When F1 plants are selfed, the F2 progeny will have new combination of characters. Choose the new combination from the following.
I. Round, yellow
II. Round, green
Wrinkled, yellow IV. Wrinkled, green
(a) I and II
(b) I and IV
(c) II and III
(d) I and III
Answer:
(b) I and IV

(iv) A section of DNA providing information for one protein is called—
(a) Nucleus
(b) Chromosomes
(c) Trait
(d) Gene
Answer:
(d) Gene

(v) Which one of the following is present in the nucleus?
(a) Gene
(b) DNA
(c) Chromosomes
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

20. Read the following and answer any four questions from 20 (i) to 20 (v) (4 x 1 = 4)
Answer the question numbers 3(a) to 3(d) on the basis of your understanding of the following paragraph and the related studied concepts.

Atomic size refers to radius of atom. The atomic size may be visualised as the distance between the centre of the nucleus and the outermost shell of an atom.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 7

(i) How does atomic size vary along period 2 from left to right and why?
(a) Atomic size increases as atomic number increases
(b) Atomic size increases as number of protons increases
(c) Atomic size decreases as electrons added to same shell and with increase in number of protons, nuclei attracts electrons more
(d) Atomic size decreases as proton has higher positive charge than negative charge on electron and thus protons pulls electrons towards nucleus.
Answer:
(c) Atomic size decreases as electrons added to same shell and with increase in number of protons, nuclei attracts electrons more

(ii) How does atomic size vary in group 1 and group 17 and why?
(a) Atomic size increases because electrons added to the penultimate shell
(b) Atomic size increases because electrons added to next higher energy shell
(c) Atomic size decreases because electrons added to penultimate shell
(d) Atomic size decreases because electrons added to same shell
Answer:
(b) Atomic size increases because electrons added to next higher energy shell

(iii) Which group elements have largest size in periodic table?
(a) Group 1
(b) Group 2
(c) Group 17
(d) Group 18
Answer:
(d) Group 18

(iv) Which element of group 17 is most reactive?
(a) F
(b) Cl
(c) Br
(d) I
Answer:
(a) F

(v) Which of the following has higher distance between the centre of the nucleus and the outermost shell of an atom?
(a) Li
(b) C
(c) Be
(d) I
Answer:
(a) Li

Section-B

21. The resistance of a wire of 0.01 cm radius is 10Ω. If the resistivity of the material of the wire is 50 x 10-8 Ωm, find the length of the wire.
Answer:
62.8cm

22. Foetus derives its nutrition from the mother.
(i) Identify the tissue used for above purpose. Explain its structure.
(ii) Explain how wastes generated by developing embryo are removed.
OR
Why do we need to adopt contraceptive measures?

23. A coil of insulated copper wire is connected to a galvanometer. What will happen if a bar magnet is
(i) pushed into the coil
(ii) held stationary inside the coil?

24. Give reason for the following:
(i) Element carbon forms compounds mainly by covalent bonding.
(ii) Kerosene does not decolourise bromine water while cooking oils do.

25. An alpha particle (positively charged) enters a magnetic field at right angle to it as shown in figure. Explain with the help of relevant rule, the direction of force acting on the alpha particle.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 8
OR
Identify the poles of the magnet in the given figure (i) and (ii).
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 9

26. In a test tube A and B shown below, yeast was kept in sugar solution. What products of respiration would you expect in tubes A and B?
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 10

Section-C

27. Draw a circuit diagram of an electric circuit containing a cell, a key, an ammeter, a resistor of 4D. in series with a combination of two resistors (80 each) in parallel and a voltmeter across parallel combination. Each of them dissipates maximum energy and can withstand a maximum power of 16W without melting. Find the maximum current that can flow through the three resistors.
Answer:
1 A

28. Find the current drawn from the battery by the network of four resistors shown in the diagram.
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 11
Answer:
0.4A

29. In the electrolysis of water,
(i) Name the gas collected at anode and cathode
(ii) Why is the volume of gas collected at one electrode double than the other?
(iii) What would happen if dil H2S04 is not added to water?

30. A student records the observation to study the rate of respiration in three different people. Study the data collected and answer the questions given below:

Activity Person 1 (breathing in one minute) Person 2 (breathing in one minute) Person 3 (breathing in one minute)
(i) Walking 20 times 24 times 26 times
(ii) Running 35 times 37 times 34 times
(iii) Climbing 20 stairs by running 40 times 30 times 45 times

(i) Which variable is kept constant?
(ii) Which reading is anomalous?
(iii) Suggest one improvement in this experiment.

31. The electrons in the atoms of four elements A, B, C and D are distributed in three shells having 1, 3, 5 and 7 electrons in outermost shell respectively. State the period in which these elements can be placed in the modem periodic table. Write the electronic configuration of the atoms A and D and the molecular formula of compound formed when A and D will combine.

32. (i) Construct a terrestrial food chain comprising four trophic levels.
(ii) What will happen if we kill all the organisms in one trophic level?
(iii) Calculate the amount of energy available to the organisms at the fourth trophic level if the energy available to the organisms at the second trophic level is 2000 J.
Answer:
(iii) 2 J

33. “pH has a great importance in our daily life” explain by giving three examples.
OR
A compound which is prepared from gypsum has the property of hardening when mixed with a proper quantity of water. Identify the compound and write its chemical formula. Write the chemical equation for its preparation. Mention any one use of the compound.

Section – D

34. You are given balls and stick model of six carbon atoms and fourteen hydrogen atoms and sufficient number of sticks. In how many ways one can join the models of six carbon atoms and fourteen hydrogen atoms to form different molecules of C6H
OR
(i) Give a chemical test to distinguish between saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons.
(ii) What is meant by a functional group in an organic compound? Name the functional group present in
(a) CH3CH2OH
(b) CH3COOH
(iii) What is the difference in the molecular formula of any two consecutive members of a homologous series of organic compounds?

35. A student wants to project the image of candle flame on the wall of school laboratory by using a lens:
(i) which type of lens should be used and why?
(ii) at which distance in term of focal length F of the lens should be placed the candle flame so as to get
(a) a magnified and
(b) a diminished image respectively on the wall?
OR
(i) Complete the following ray diagrams:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 12
(ii) A ray of light travelling in air enters obliquely into water. Does the light ray bend towards or away from the normal? Why? Draw a ray diagram to show the refraction of light in this situation.

36. (i) To study the respiration of germinating seeds:
CBSE Sample Papers for Class 10 Science Set 5 for Practice 13

(a) Name two chemicals that are kept in the test tube to absorb carbon dioxide gas released in the conical flask.
(b) Explain why the level of water in the bent tube rises in the set up A
(c) State the observation in set up B:

(ii) What do the following transport:
(a) Xylem
(b) Pulmonary artery
(c) Pulmonary vein
(d) Vena cava

Microbes in Human Welfare Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 10

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Microbes in Human Welfare. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 10 Important Extra Questions Microbes in Human Welfare

Microbes in Human Welfare Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Which bacterium Is responsible for the formation of curd from milk?
Answer:
Lactobacillus but Agaricus (Lactic acid bacteria).

Question 2.
What is brewing?
Answer:
Brewing is a complex fermentation process, which involves the production of malt beverages such as beer, ale, porter, and stout with the help of strains of Saccharomyces cerevisiae.

Question 3.
Name the type of association that genus Glomus exhibits with the higher plant. (CBSE2014)
Answer:
Mycorrhiza- Symbiotic association.

Question 4.
Which one of the following is the baker’s yeast used in fermentation-Saccharum Barberi, Saccharomyces cerevisiae or Sonalika? (CBSE2009)
Answer:
Saccharomyces cerevisiae.

Question 5.
Milk starts to coagulate when Lactic Acid Bacteria (LAB) is added to milk as a starter. Mention two benefits that LAB provides. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:

  1. LAB checks the growth of disease-causing microbes.
  2. LAB converts milk into curd and also increases nutritional quality by increasing vitamin B12.

Question 6.
Give the scientific name of the source organism from which the first antibiotic was produced. (CBSE Sample paper 2018-19)
Answer:
Penicillium Notatum

Question 7.
Name the different vitamins which are produced by micro-organisms.
Answer:

  1. Riboflavin or Vitamin B2 is produced by yeast and bacteria.
  2. Vitamin B12 or cobalamine is produced by bacteria and actinomycetes.

Question 8.
Name the original wild strain of the mold by which vitamin B2 is produced.
Answer:
Ashbya Gossypii.

Question 9.
What is a single-cell protein (SCP)?
Answer:
Single-cell protein (SCP) refers to any microbial biomass produced by uni and multi-cellular organisms and can be used as food or feed additives.

Question 10.
Name a microbe used for statin production. How do statins lower blood cholesterol levels?
Answer:
Microbe:
Monascus Purpureus Mechanism: Statins are competitive inhibitors of enzymes required for cholesterol synthesis. Therefore, play role in decreasing cholesterol level in the body.

Question 11.
‘Swiss cheese’ is characterized by the presence of large holes. Name the bacterium responsible for it. (CBSE Delhi Outside 2019)
Answer:
Propionibacterium sharmanii

Question 12.
What for Nudeopolyhedra viruses (NVP) are being used nowadays? (CBSE, Delhi 2014, 2019C)
Answer:
Nudeopolyhedro viruses are being used to kill insects and other arthropods pests of crops. The viruses have no effect on plants and non-target animals. Thus used in biological control of pests.

Question 13.
How has the discovery of antibiotics helped mankind in the field of medicine?
Answer:
Antibiotics have helped mankind in treating most of the deadly bacterial and fungal diseases of humans.

Question 14.
Why is distillation required for producing certain alcoholic drinks?
Answer:
For increasing the alcohol strength or concentration of the drinks.

Question 15.
What is the primary sludge?
Answer:
All the solids that settle from the sewage on primary treatment constitute primary sludge.

Question 16.
What is the relationship between BOD and organic matter in sewage?
Answer:
The greater the BOD of wastewater more is the amount of organic matter in sewage.

Question 17.
Name two gases produced during secondary treatment by sewage.
Answer:

  1. Carbon dioxide and
  2. Hydrogen sulfide.

Question 18.
What are bioreactors?
Answer:
In the pilot plant, the glass vessels are replaced by stainless steel vessels. They are called bioreactors.

Question 19.
Name the bacteria which can be used for yogurt formation.
Answer:

  1. Lactobacillus bulsaricus.
  2. Streptococcus Thermophilus.

Question 20.
What is Bacitracin?
Answer:
It is an antibiotic obtained from Bacillus Licheniformis.

Question 21.
Name the group of organisms and the substrate they act on to produce biogas. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Methanogens such as Methanol bacterium act on activated sludge to produce biogas.

Question 22.
WrIte the scientific name of the microbe used for fermenting malted cereals and fruit juices. (CBSE 2011)
Answer:
Saccharomyces cerevisiae

Question 23.
Write an alternate source of protein for animal and human nutrition. (CBSE 2014)
Answer:
Single-cell proteins.

Question 24.
How are the members of the genus Glomus useful to organic farmers? (CBSE Delhi Outside 2019)
Answer:
Many members of the genus Glomus form mycorrhizae- symbiotic associations with roots of higher plants. The fungal component of these associations helps in the absorption of phosphorus from soil. It also makes the plant drought-resistant.

Microbes in Human Welfare Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
Expand the ‘LAB’. How are LABs beneficial to humans? (Write any two benefits) (CBSE 2019 C)
Answer:
LAB-Lactic Acid Bacteria Benefits:

  • Found in curd. They improve the nutritional quality of food.
  • Yogurt is prepared from milk by Lactobacillus Bulgaricus.

Question 2.
What is cyclosporin A? What is its importance?
Answer:
Cyclosporin A. It is an eleven-membered cyclic oligopeptide obtained through the fermentative activity of fungus Trichoderma Polysporum.

Importance. It has antifungal, anti-inflammatory, and immunosuppressive properties. It inhibits the activation of T-cells and therefore, prevents rejection reactions in organ transplantation.

Question 3.
How do antibiotics act?
Answer:
Antibiotics do not have identical effects on all harmful microbes. All of them inhibit growth or destroy bacteria, viruses, and fungi. Actually, antibiotic molecules should disrupt a vital link in the microbe’s metabolism and this link is their target or point of impact.

Question 4.
Write the various steps of fermentation.
Answer:
The major steps of fermentation are:

  1. Sterilization of the fermenter and medium in steam. It is carried out under pressure and high temperature.
  2. Inoculation of a selected strain of the yeast.
  3. Recovery of the product.

Question 5.
What are the two ways by which micro-organisms can be grown in bioreactors?
Answer:
Micro-organisms can be grown in the bioreactors in two ways:

  1. As a layer or film on the surface of the nutrient medium. It is known as a support growth system.
  2. By suspending cells or mycelia in a liquid medium contained in the growth vessel. It is known as a suspended growth system.

Question 6.
What is sewage? In which way can this be harmful?
Answer:
Sewage is used and wastewater consisting of human excreta, wash waters, industrial and agricultural wastes that enter the sewage system. In general, sewage contains 95.5% water and 0.1 to 0.5% organic and inorganic matter. They are very harmful to us due to the presence of a variety of micro¬organisms in them, most of which are highly pathogenic. Sewage has a high BOD value, which develops anaerobic conditions in water resulting in the death of water animals and emitting foul smell due to incomplete oxidation of organic materials in the sewage.

Question 7.
What is the key difference between primary and secondary sewage treatment?
Answer:
Primary treatment of wastes is the screening and removal of insoluble particulate materials, by addition of alum and other coagulants. It is the physical removal of 20-30% of organic materials present in sewage in particulate form. Secondary treatment of waste is the biological removal of dissolved organic matter through trickling filters, activated sludge, lagoons, extended aeration systems, and anaerobic digestors.

Question 8.
Draw a simple diagram to show an anaerobic sludge digester.
Answer:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Microbes in Human Welfare 1
Anaerobic sludge digester.

Question 9.
GIve the full form of Bt. Name the insects killed by It.
Answer:
The full form of Bt is Bacillus Ttiuringiensis. It kills a wide range of Insects Like moths, beetles, mosquitoes, aphids, and termites.

Question 10.
Why are biofertilizers or biopesticides preferred to chemical fertilizers or pesticides? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Biofertilizers or biopesticides are preferred to chemical fertilizers or pesticides because

  • They are safe to use and are biological in origin.
  • They do not spoil the quality of the soil and are target-specific.
  • They do not pollute the atmosphere and are non-poisonous.
  • They are less expensive and are biodegradable.

Question 11.
Name the blank spaces a, b, c, and d from the table given below: (CBSE 2008)

Type of microbe Scientific  name Product Medical application
(i) Fungus a Cyclosporin B
(ii) c Mascus Purpureus Statin d

Answer:
(a) Trichoderma polypore
(b) Organ transplantation (Immunosuppressant)
(c) Yeast
(d) Blood cholesterol-lowering agent

Question 12.
How does the addition of a small amount of curd to fresh milk help the formation of curd? Mention a nutritional quality that gets added to the curd. (CBSE Delhi 2010 and Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:

  1. Curd is prepared from milk.
  2. Microorganisms such as Lactobacillus and others commonly called lactic acid bacteria (LAB) grow in milk and convert it to curd.
  3. During growth, the LAB produces acids that coagulate and partially digest the milk proteins.
  4. A small amount of curd added into the fresh milk as inoculum or starter contains millions of LAB which at suitable temperatures multiply, thus converting milk to curd, which also improves its nutritional quality by increasing vitamin B12.
  5. In our stomach too, the LAB plays a very beneficial role in checking disease-causing microbes.

Question 13.
Name a free-living and symbiotic bacterium that serves as a biofertilizer. Why are they called so? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Free-living nitrogen-fixing bacteria Azotobacter and Bacillus Polymyxa Symbiotic nitrogen-fixing bacteria. Rhizobium.

These micro-organisms enrich the soil by fixing nitrogen. They enhance the availability of nutrients to crops, thus called biofertilizers.

Question 14.
(i) Why are fruit juices bought from the market clearer as compared to those made at home?
Answer:
Bottled juices are clarified by the use of pectinases and proteases.

(ii) Name the bioactive molecules produced by Trichoderma Polysporum and Monascus Purpureus. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
(a) Bioactive molecules produced by Trichoderma polypore are cyclosporin A. It is used as an immunosuppressive agent in organ- transplant patients.
(b) Bioactive molecules produced by Monascus Purpureus are statins. It is a blood cholesterol-lowering agent.

Question 15.
Your advice is sought to improve the nitrogen content of the soil to be used for the cultivation of a non-leguminous terrestrial crop.
(i) Recommend two microbes that can enrich the soil with nitrogen.
Answer:
Azospirillum, Azotobacter, Anabaena, Oscillatoria (Any two)

(ii) Why do leguminous crops not require such enrichment of the soil? (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Leguminous crops do not require such enrichment of the soil because they have a symbiotic association with Rhizobium bacteria which traps nitrogen directly from the atmosphere and provides it to the plant and in turn gets food and shelter.

Question 16.
What are ‘floes’, formed during secondary treatment of sewage? (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Floes are masses of bacteria, associated with fungal filaments to form mesh-like structures.

Question 17.
Write any two places where methanogens can be found. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:
Methanogens can be found in the following places:

  1. In anaerobic sludge (digester) of a sewage treatment plant
  2. In rumen (gut/stomach) of cattle or ruminants
  3. Marshy areas
  4. Flooded paddy fields
  5. Biogas plant Methane, H2S, and C02 are produced during microbial digestion of organic compounds in case of secondary treatment of sewage.
  6. The dung of the cattle produces methane gas in the biogas plants.

Microbes in Human Welfare Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Give examples to prove that microbes release gases during metabolism.
Answer:

  1. Large holes in ‘Swiss Cheese’ are due to the production of a large amount of C02 by a bacterium named Propionibacterium shamanic.
  2. The puffed-up appearance of dough is due to the production of C02 gas by yeast, Saccharomyces cerevisiae.
  3. Methane, H2S, and CO2 are produced during microbial digestion of organic compounds in the case of secondary treatment of sewage.
  4. The dung of the cattle produces methane gas in the biogas pLants.

Question 2.
Make a table showing industrial products obtained from activities of bacteria.
Answer:
industrial products obtained from use activities of Bacteria:

Products

Bacteria

Acetone, butanol Clostridium Aceto bretylium
Acetic acid, Vinegar Acetobacter acetic
Curing of tobacco Bacillus megatherium micrococcus
Curing of tea leaves Micrococcus conditions
Lactic acid Lactobacillus Delbreuckii
Lysine Micrococcus glutamic
Retting of fibers Clostridium but lyricism
Riboflavin (Vitamin B2) Clostridium but lyricism
Cobalamin (Vit. B17) Bacillus megatherium

Question 3.
What are Baculo viruses? Write their significance.
Answer:
Baculoviruses are those viruses, which attack insects and other arthropods, e.g. Nuclepolyhedrovirus.

Significance:

  • Baculoviruses are species-specific and narrow-spectrum insecticides.
  • They have no negative impacts on plants, birds, mammals, or even other non-target insects.
  • The desirable aspect In conservation of beneficial insects in overall integrated pest management (IPM) program as in an ecologically sensitive area.

Question 4.
Which nitrogen fixers are available on a commercial basis In the market? Also, name the beneficial crop.
Answer:

Products

Microbe used

Beneficial crop

1. Nitragin TM Rhizobium Soybean
2. Rhizocote Rhizobium Legumes
3. Nodosit Rhizobium Legumes

Question 5.
Distinguish between the roles of floes and anaerobic sludge digester in sewage treatment. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:
Floes are masses of bacteria associated with fungal filaments to form mesh-like structures. These microbes digest a lot of organic matter, converting it into microbial biomass and releasing a lot of minerals. Anaerobic sludge digester is a large tank in which anaerobic microbes digest the anaerobic mass as well as aerobic microbes of sludge. Biogas is produced by methanogens. It is inflammable and a source of energy.

Question 6.
Tabulate the list of common antibiotics, organisms producing them, and organisms sensitive to these antibiotics.
Answer:

Name of Antibiotic

Name of Producing Organism

Sensitive Organisms

(i) Penicillin Penicillium Most of the Gram+ve bacteria, Clostridium actinomycetes, Spirochaetae, and Corynebacterium.
(ii) Streptomycin Streptomyces griseus Gram + ve and Gram – ve bacteria; Mycobacterium tuberculosis
(iii) Bacitracin Bacillus licheniformis Treponema, Histoplasma, Clostridium.
(iv) Tetracycline and Chlorotetracycline Streptomyces aureofaciens Rickettsiae, Klebsiella pneumonia, Streptococcus.
(v) Synthromycin Streptomyces erythematous Gram+ve; Gram-ve bacteria and many viruses.
(vi) Chloromycetin Streptomyces Venezuelae Gram+ve; Gram-ve bacteria; Entamoeba, Borrelia.

Question 7.
Give a flow chart of sewage treatment.
Answer:
Flow chart of sewage treatment:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Microbes in Human Welfare 2

Flow chart of sewage treatment

Question 8.
List the events that lead to the production of biogas from wastewater whose BOD has been reduced significantly. (CBSE Dethi 2016)
Answer:

  1. During secondary treatment of wastewater, sewage fungus forms focus.
  2. BOD decreases. As it decreases to 10-15% of originaL sewage, the wastewater Is taken to a Large settling tank where the focus of sewage fungus settles down.
  3. The supernatant can be passed into water bodies or treated further.
  4. The organic sediment is passed into an anaerobic sludge digester where anaerobic microbes methanogens decompose organic matter.
  5. It is accompanied by the production of blogs and the formation of manure or compost.

Question 9.
Explain the basis of biological control of weeds.
Answer:
Basis of biological control of weeds:

  1. Biological control of weeds involves breeding of insects that would feed selectively a weed or use of certain micro-organisms which will produce diseases in the weeds and eliminate them.
  2. Certain crop plants do not allow the growth of weeds nearby. They are called smoother plants such as Barley, Rye, Sorghum, Millet, etc. They eliminate weeds through chemicals.
  3. In some cases, specially tailored plants called transgenic plants have been introduced which have tolerance against weeds.
  4. In India and Australia, the overgrowth of cacti was checked by the introduction of the cochineal insect (Cactoblastis cactorum).
  5. The latest technique is to use fungal spores to control weeds. These are suitable because they can be kept for a long time and also resist adverse conditions.

Question 10.
What are biofertilizers? What are the main sources of biological nitrogen fixation? Name two organisms that fix nitrogen symbiotically and two organisms that fix symbiotically.
Answer:
Biofertilizers are organisms that can bring about soil nutrient enrichment by their biological activity.

  • Sources of biofertilizers: Bacteria, cyanobacteria, and fungi.
  • Biological nitrogen fixation: The conversion of atmospheric nitrogen into nitrogenous compounds through the agency of living organisms is called biological nitrogen fixation.

Symbiotically nitrogen-fixing organisms:

  • Rhizobium leguminosarum, Frankia Bacillus radicicola.
  • Free-living/Asymbiotic nitrogen-fixing organisms-Cyanobacteria, Azotobacter.

Question 11.
(a) What is biogas? What are its components? What is the calorific value of biogas? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Biogas is a methane-rich fuel gas produced by anaerobic breakdown or digestion of biomass with the help of methanogenic bacteria.

Components of biogas: Methane, Carbon dioxide, Hydrogen sulfide, hydrogen, and nitrogen.
Calorific value 23-28 MJ/m3.

(b) Why is a slurry of cattle dung (gobar) added to bio-wastes in the tank of a gobar gas plant for the generation of biogas? (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:
Slurry consisting of excreta dung of cattle commonly called gobar is rich in methanogen bacteria. It is used for the generation of biogas. These bacteria called methane bacterium grow anaerobically and break down the cellulose of dung to liberate gases such as methane, C02, and H2.

Question 12.
(?) Name the toxin produced by B. Thuringiensis.
Answer:
∝-exotoxin, β-exotoxin, γ-exotoxin, and louse factor

(ii) Nitrogen fixers are available on a commercial basis in the market? Also, name the beneficial crop and microbes used in the following table.

Product

Microbe used

Beneficial crop

1. NitraginTM (A) Soybean
2. Rhizocote Rhizobium (B)
3. Nodosit Rhizobium (C)

Answer:
A. Rhizobium B. Legume C. Legume

(iii) Expand BOD and COD
Answer:
BOD- Biological Oxygen Demand COD- Chemical Oxygen Demand

Question 13.
By a flow chart showing the stages in anaerobic digestion during the production of biogas.
Answer:

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Microbes in Human Welfare 3
Stages in Anaerobic Digestion during biogas formation

Question 14.
Given below is a list of six microorganisms. State their usefulness to humans.
(i) Nucleopolyhedrovirus
(ii) Saccharomyces cerevisiae
(iii) Monascus Purpureus
(iv) Trichoderma polypore
(v) Penicillium Notatum
(vi) Propionibacterium shamanic. (CBSE Delhi 2016)
Answer:

Name of Micro-organisms

Uses

(i) Nucleopolyhedrovirus Used in biocontrol of insects
(ii) Saccharomyces cerevisiae Bread making, Ethanol making
(iii) Monascus Purpureus Produces Statin used as blood cholesterol-lowering agent
(iv) Trichoderma polypore Preparation of cyclosporin having antifungal, anti-inflammatory, immuno-suppressive properties
(v) Penicillium Notatum Production of antibiotic, Penicillin
(vi) Propionibacterium shamanic Preparation of large-holed swiss cheese.

Question 15.
Explain the different steps involved in the secondary treatment of sewage. (CBSE Sample paper 2018—19)
Or
Secondary treatment of sewage is also called biological treatment. Justify this statement and explain the process. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:

  1. Secondary treatment of sewage is a biological process that employs the heterotrophic bacteria naturally present in the sewage.
  2. The effluent from the primary treatment is passed into large aeration tanks, where it is constantly agitated and the air is pumped into it.
  3. This allows the rapid growth of aerobic microbes into ‘floes’ which consume the organic matter of the sewage and reduce the biological oxygen demand (BOD). The greater is the BOD of wastewater, the more is its polluting potential.
  4. When the BOD of sewage is reduced significantly, the effluent is passed into a settling tank, where the ‘floes’ are allowed to sediment forming the activated sludge.
  5. A small part of the activated sludge is pumped back into the aeration tanks.
  6. The remaining major part of the sludge is pumped into anaerobic sludge digesters, where the anaerobic bacteria digest the bacteria and fungi in the sludge-producing methane, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon dioxide,
    i. e. biogas. This is why secondary treatment of sewage is also called biological treatment.
  7. The effluent after secondary treatment is released into water-bodies like streams or rivers.

Question 16.
Microbes can be used to decrease the use of chemical fertilizers. Explain how this can be accomplished. (CBSE Delhi 2019)
Answer:

  1. Rhizobium bacteria present in the root nodules of leguminous plants (pea family) forms a symbiotic association and fixes atmospheric nitrogen into organic forms as nitrates/nitrites which are used by the plant as nutrient.
  2. Free-living bacteria in the soil Azospirillum and Azotobacter can fix atmospheric nitrogen thus enriching the nitrogen content of the soil.
  3. Many members of the genus Glomus (Fungi) form mycorrhizal symbiotic associations with higher plants. In these, the fungal symbiont absorbs phosphorus from soil and passes it to the plant.

Question 17.
(?) Organic farmers prefer biological control of diseases and pests to the use of chemicals for the same purpose. Justify.
Answer:
Chemical methods often kill both useful and harmful living beings indiscriminately. The organic farmer holds the view that the eradication of the creatures that are often described as pests is not only possible but also undesirable, for without them the beneficial predatory and parasitic insects which depend upon them as food or hosts would not be able to survive. Thus, the use of biocontrol measures will greatly reduce our dependence on toxic chemicals and pesticides.

(ii) Give an example of a bacterium, a fungus, and an insect that are used as biocontrol agents. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Insects = Ladybird and Dragonflies. Bacteria = Bacillus thuringiensis. Fungus = Trichoderma

Question 18.
The three microbes are listed below. Name the product produced by each one of them and mention their use.
(i) Aspergillus niger
(ii) Trichoderma polypore
(iii) Monascus Purpureus (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Or
(i) A patient had suffered myocardial infarction and clots were found in his blood vessels. Name a ‘clot buster’ that can be used to dissolve clots and the microorganism from which it is obtained.
(ii) A woman had just undergone a kidney transplant. A bioactive molecular drug is administered to oppose kidney rejection by the body. What is the bioactive molecule? Name the microbe from which this is extracted.
(iii) What do doctors prescribe to lower the blood cholesterol level in patients with high blood cholesterol? Name the source organism from which this drug can be obtained. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2019)
Answer:
(i) Aspergillus niger produces citric acid. Citric acid is used as a flavoring agent and as a food preservative.
(ii) Trichoderma Polysporum produces a bioactive molecule cyclosporin A. It is used as an immunosuppressive agent in organ transplant patients.
(iii) Monascus Purpureus produces statins. Statins are capable of competitive inhibition of enzymes required for cholesterol synthesis. Hence, it is used as blood cholesterol-lowering agents.
Or
(i) Streptokinase-‘Clot buster’ can be used to dissolve clots. It is obtained from the bacteria Streptococcus.
(ii) The bioactive molecule is Cyclosporin A which is used as an immunosuppressive agent in organ transplantation. It is produced by the fungus Trichoderma Polysporum.
(iii) Doctors prescribe Statins to lower blood cholesterol. It is obtained from the fungus Monascus Purpureus.

Question 19.
Baculoviruses are good examples of biocontrol agents. Justify giving reasons. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
Baculoviruses kill insects and other arthropods, hence they are used as biocontrol agents especially Nucleopolyhedrovirus.

Reasons for their use:

  • These viruses are species-specific and have narrow spectrum insecticidal applications.
  • They do not harm non-target organisms like other harmless insects, birds, animals, etc.
  • It is very useful in integrated pest management programs or treatment of ecologically sensitive areas.

Question 20.
Describe the primary and secondary treatment of domestic sewage before it is released for reuse. (CBSE, 2014)
Answer:
Treatment of domestic sewage. The municipal wastewaters are treated in Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) prior to disposal in water bodies.

It consists of 3 steps: primary, secondary, and tertiary.
1. Primary treatment. It includes physical processes, such as sedimentation, floatation, shredding (fragmenting and filtering). These processes remove most of the large debris.

2. Secondary treatment. It is a biological method. Activated sludge method. Sewage, after primary treatment, is pumped into aeration tanks or oxidation ponds. Here, it is mixed with air and sludge containing algae and bacteria. Bacteria consume organic matter. The process results in the release of C02 and the formation of sludge or biosolid. Algae produce oxygen for the bacteria. The water, which is now almost clear of organic matter, is chlorinated to kill microorganisms.

3. Tertiary treatment. It involves. removal of nitrates and phosphates. The water, after the above treatment, is then released. It can be reused.

Question 21.
Explain biological control of pests and plant pathogens with examples.
Answer:
The very familiar beetle with red and black markings the Ladybird, and Dragonflies are useful to get rid of aphids and mosquitoes, respectively.

Role of Bacillus Thuringinesis:
Bt Coming to microbial biocontrol agents that can be introduced in order to control butterfly caterpillars is the bacteria Bacillus thuringiensis (often written as Bt). These are available in sachets of dried spores which are mixed with water and sprayed onto vulnerable plants such as Brassica and fruit trees, where these are eaten by the insect larvae. In the gut of the larvae, the toxin is released and the larvae get killed.

The bacterial disease will kill the caterpillars, but leave other insects unharmed. Because of the development of the methods of genetic engineering in the last decade or so, scientists have introduced B. thuringiensis toxin genes into plants. Such plants are resistant to attack by insect pests. Bt-cotton is one such example which is being cultivated in some states of our country.

Biological control of plant pathogens: A biological control developed for use in the treatment of plant disease is the fungus Trichoderma. Trichoderma sp. are free-living fungi that are very common in soil and root ecosystems. They are effective biocontrol agents of several plant pathogens.

Baculoviruses are pathogens that attack insects and other arthropods. The majority of baculoviruses used as biological control agents are in the genus Nucleopolyhedrovirus. These viruses are excellent candidates for species-specific, narrow spectrum insecticidal applications.

They have been shown to have no negative impacts on plants, mammals, birds, fish, or even on non-target insects. This is especially desirable when beneficial insects are being conserved to aid in an overall IPM (integrated pest management) program, or when an ecologically sensitive area is being treated.

Question 22.
How do biofertilizers enrich the soil?
Answer:
Biofertilizers play a vital role to solve the problems of soil fertility and soil productivity.

  1. Anabaena azollae, a cyanobacterium, lives in symbiotic association with the free-floating water fern, Azolla. The symbiotic system Azolla-Anabaena complex is known to contribute 40-60 mg N ha-1 per rice crop. In addition to this, cyanobacteria add organic matter, secretes growth-promoting substances like auxins and vitamins, mobilizes insoluble phosphate, and thus improves the physical and chemical nature of the soil.
  2. Rhizobium Leguminoserum and Azospirillum fix atmospheric nitrogen as nitrates and nitrites.
  3. Mycorrhizae formed by an association of bacteria and roots of higher plants increase soil fertility.

Question 23.
Discuss the role of Microbes as Biofertilizers. (CBSE Delhi 2011, 2015, 2019)
Answer:
Role of microbes as biofertilizers:
Bacteria, cyanobacteria, and fungi (mycorrhiza) are the three groups of organisms used as biofertilizers.
1. Bacteria:
(a) Symbiotic bacteria Rhizobium.
(b) Free-living bacteria Azospirillum and Azotobacter.
(c) They fix the atmospheric nitrogen and enrich soil nutrients.

2.  Cyanobacteria, e.g. Anabaena, Nostoc, Aulosira, Oscillatoria, etc.
(a) They function as biofertilizers by fixing atmospheric nitrogen and
(b) Increasing the organic matter of the soil through their photosynthetic activity.

3. Fungi/mycorrhizae:
(a) Fungi form a symbiotic association with roots of higher plants (mycorrhizae), e.g. Glomus.
(b) The fungus absorbs phosphorus and passes it on to the plant.
(c) Other benefits of mycorrhizae are :

  • resistance to root-borne pathogens.
  • tolerance to salinity.
  • tolerance to drought.
  • the overall increase in the plant growth and development

Question 24.
You have been deputed by your school principal to train local villagers in the use of biogas plants. With the help of a labeled sketch explain the various parts of the biogas plant. (CBSE Outside Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Biogas plant:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Microbes in Human Welfare 4

Biogas plant

  1. The plant consists of a well-like underground tank made of bricks. This tank is called a digester.
  2. The roof of the digester is dome-shaped made of cement and bricks. The dome of the digester tank acts as a gas holder (or storage tank for biogas). Thus, the gas holder in this type of gas-plant is fixed.
  3. There is a gas outlet at the top of the dome for the supply of biogas.
  4. On the one side of the digester tank, there is a slopping inlet tank and on the other side, there is a rectangular outlet tank or overflow tank. Both these tanks are made of cement and bricks.
  5. The mixing tank is connected with a slopping inlet chamber (or tank) while the outflow tank is connected with a rectangular outlet chamber (or tank).
  6. The inlet-chamber is for introducing fresh dung slurry into the main digester tank whereas the outlet chamber is for taking out spent dung slurry after extraction of biogas.

Environmental Issues Class 12 Important Extra Questions Biology Chapter 16

Here we are providing Class 12 Biology Important Extra Questions and Answers Chapter 16 Environmental Issues. Important Questions for Class 12 Biology are the best resource for students which helps in Class 12 board exams.

Class 12 Biology Chapter 16 Important Extra Questions Environmental Issues

Environmental Issues Important Extra Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
What are pollutants?
Answer:
The substances causing pollution are termed pollutants.

Question 2.
What is the source of aerosols?
Answer:
Smoke, ash, soot.

Question 3.
What photochemical oxidants pollute the air?
Answer:
Peroxyacetyl nitrate, ozone, and aldehyde.

Question 4.
The use of lead-free petrol or diesel is recommended to reduce the pollutants emitted by automobiles. What role does leadership play?
Answer:
Lead inactivates the catalytic converter.

Question 5.
In which year was the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act amended to include noise as an air pollutant?
Answer:
In 1987.

Question 6.
Name the city in our country where the entire public road transport runs on CNG.
Answer:
Delhi.

Question 7.
It is a common practice to undertake desilting of overhead water tanks. What is the possible source of silt that gets deposited in the water tanks?
Answer:
The soil particles carried by water from a source of the water supply.

Question 8.
What is cultural eutrophication?
Answer:
Faster aging of a lake due to the presence of large amounts of industrial, agricultural wastes, and domestic sewage produced by human activities is called cultural or accelerated eutrophication.

Question 9.
List any two adverse effects of particulate matter on human health.
Answer:

  1. Breathing and respiratory problems like bronchitis, asthma, inflammation of lungs, etc.
  2. Cardiovascular disorders and premature death.

Question 10.
Why are tall chimneys recommended for factories?
Answer:
To reduce air pollution at ground level.

Question 11.
Name the biggest source of air pollution in large cities.
Answer:
Automobiles.

Question 12.
Why is CNG better than diesel? (CBSE Outside Delhi 2016)
Answer:
CNG burns most efficiently in automobiles and very little of it is left unburnt. It is cheaper and cannot be easily adulterated.

Question 13.
What is the frequency of infrasound and ultrasound?
Answer:

  1. Infrasound below 50 Hz.
  2. Ultrasound-Above 20000 Hz.

Question 14.
Name the layer of atmosphere that is associated with ‘good ozone’.(CBSE 2019)
Answer:
Stratosphere

Question 15.
What would have been the temperature at the surface of the earth without the greenhouse effect? (HOTS)
Answer:
18°C as compared to the present average of 15°C.

Question 16.
How much average global temperature will rise by the year 2100?
Answer:
1.4 – 5.8°C.

Question 17.
What are Dobson units? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Dobson units (DU) measure the thickness of ozone in a column of air from the ground to the top of the atmosphere.

Question 18.
Explain polar vortex.
Answer:
Antarctic air is completely isolated from the rest of the world by the natural circulation of wind called the polar vortex.

Question 19.
Name the world’s most problematic aquatic weed. What is the nature of the water body in which the weeds grow abundantly? (CBSE Delhi 2008)
Answer:

  1. Eichhornia
  2. Highly polluted freshwater bodies containing organic waste.

Question 20.
Write the name of the organism that is referred to as ‘Terror of Bengal’. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
Eichhornia (Water hyacinth).

Question 21.
State the cause of Accelerated Eutrophication. (CBSE Delhi 2014)
Answer:
Nutrient enrichment due to the addition of pollutants from industries and homes into water bodies causes accelerated eutrophication.

Environmental Issues Important Extra Questions Short Answer Type

Question 1.
An electrostatic precipitator in a thermal power plant is not able to generate a high voltage of several thousand. Write the ecological implication because of it. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
It will not be able to remove particulate matter present in the exhaust of thermal power plants. Hence it cannot control pollution as dust particles will be released into the air.

Question 2.
List four benefits to human life by eliminating the use of CFCs. Suggest two practices giving one example of each that helps protects rare or threatened species. (CBSE 2017)
Answer:
Benefits to human life by eliminating the use of CFCs:

  1. Ozone depletion will be prevented.
  2. The greenhouse effect will be controlled.
  3. Global warming will be controlled.
  4. It will prevent old climatic changes that take place due to a rise in temperature.

Two practices that help, protect rare or threatened species are:

  1. Ex-situ conservation: In this, organisms are taken out of their natural habitat and kept at a special care location. Example: Botanical garden, zoo, etc.
  2. In situ conservation: Here the species are conserved in their natural habitat. Example: Natural park, sanctuaries.

Question 3.
Why are microbes like Spirulina being produced on a commercial scale? Mention its two advantages. (CBSE Delhi 2018C)
Answer:
Spirulina is produced on a commercial scale due to the following reasons:

  1. Spirulina is a rich source of protein. It can be used to solve the problem of hunger and malnutrition.
  2. It also reduces environmental pollution as it utilizes the waste as raw material which otherwise pollutes the environment.

Question 4.
Classify pollution on the basis of origin.
Answer:
Types of pollution on the basis of origin:

  1. Natural, e.g. volcanic eruption.
  2. Anthropogenic, e.g. man-made such as industrial pollution.

Question 5.
What are the two main sources of air pollution?
Answer:

  1. Fixed sources: Which include large factories, electrical power plants, mineral smelters, small industries.
  2. Mobile sources: They include all sorts of transports.

Question 6.
What are the effects of carbon monoxide?
Answer:
Carbon monoxide (CO) is a product of the incomplete combustion of fossil fuels. Nearly 50% of all CO emission originates from automobiles. It is also present in cigarette smoke. CO is short-lived in the atmosphere and gets oxidized to CO2. Carbon monoxide is highly poisonous to most animals. When inhaled, CO reduces the oxygen-carrying capacity of the blood.

Question 7.
Write the names of four main gases which pollute the air.
Answer:
C02, CO, N02, and S02 pollute the air.

Question 8.
Differentiate between primary air pollutants and secondary air pollutants.
Answer:
Differences between primary air pollutants and secondary air pollutants:

Primary air pollutant Secondary air pollutant
1. Pollutant persists in the form in which it is released in the environment. 1. It is formed from another pollutant due to change or reaction.
2. Example. Glass, D.D.T., Carbon monoxide, Nitrogen oxide, Hydrocarbons. 2. Example. Ozone, Peroxyacyl nitrate (PAN)

Question 9.
What are the effects of air pollution? How can it be minimized?
Answer:
Effects of air pollution: Atmospheric pollution causes respiratory and vascular diseases in humans, produces fluorosis in livestock, adversely affects plants and buildings, and poses a threat to the climate.

Control of air pollution: Air pollution can be minimized by separating pollutants from harmless gases, or by converting them to harmless substances before releasing the industrial and motor vehicle exhausts into the atmosphere.

Question 10.
What is particulate matter? How does particulate matter affect the biological world?
Answer:
Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM): The solid particles or liquid droplets (aerosols) remain suspended in the air. For example, smoke, soot, dust, asbestos, etc. SPM above the size of 10 mm is trapped by nasal hair, pharyngeal, tracheal, and bronchial mucus. The same is coughed out or deposited in the nose as nasal scales. Smaller particles of SPM reach the alveoli.

There they may be attacked by phagocytes or pass into living cells. SPM causes irritation in the respiratory tract, bronchitis, and lung diseases. These particles may cause asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, etc. They also result in reduced visibility.

Question 11.
What is photochemical smog? How smog affects the biological world?
Answer:
1. Photochemical Smog: It is a secondary pollutant. It is yellowish-brown smog that is formed under oxidizing conditions and high temperatures over cities and towns that are releasing a lot of nitrogen oxides and unburnt hydrocarbons. In still air, the two interact photochemically to produce photochemical oxidants-ozone, PAN, aldehydes, and phenols. Photochemical smog does not have any appreciable amount of primary pollutants. It is also called Los Angeles smog.

2. Effect on the biological world: It causes bleaching of foliage of certain plants. It also causes silvering, glazing, and necrosis of the leaves. It causes respiratory problems in animals.

Question 12.
What is acid rain? What are its effects on plants?
Answer:
Acid rains: Sulphur dioxide and sulfur trioxide are produced by the oxidation of sulfur in fossil fuels. Similarly, nitrogen dioxide or nitrogen monoxide are released through vehicular emissions. These gases react with water and form sulphuric acid, sulfurous acid, or nitric acid. These acids when precipitated as rain or snow create acid rain or acid precipitation. The pH of acid rain is less than 5-6 and could be as low as 4. Acid rain adversely affects plant vegetation by causing chlorosis and necrosis.

Question 13.
Write the effects of hydrocarbons (HCs).
Answer:
Effects of hydrocarbons:

  1. Benzene and its derivatives are carcinogens.
  2. Formaldehyde causes indoor pollution. It contributes to photochemical smog. Inhaling formaldehyde can cause respiratory irritation.
  3. Some reactive HCs contribute to the formation of secondary pollutants.

Question 14.
What is the relation between epiphytic lichen and air pollution?
Answer:
Epiphytic lichens are reliable indicators of air pollution and can often be ranked on a sensitivity scale to estimate changing level of atmospheric pollution, especially of S02. The presence or absence of certain epiphytic lichens in a given locality and the pattern of their distribution can be related to the extent of pollution in the area.

Question 15.
How is air pollution responsible for changing the ill effects of ultraviolet radiation?
Answer:
Air pollution is enhancing the ill effects of UV radiation. Fluorocarbons are threatening and depleting the ozone layer of the stratosphere, thus allowing the UV radiations to reach this planet. The UV radiations cause serious damages to life by damaging nucleic acids in living organisms.

Question 16.
Mention any two examples of plants used as windbreakers in the agricultural fields.
Answer:
Windbreakers or shelterbelts provide shelter from wind and protect soil from erosion. Jamun and Imli and some other trees like Babul, Lawsonia, Thevetia, and Calotropis act as windbreakers in the agricultural field.

Question 17.
It is true that carpets and curtains/drapes placed on the floor or wall surfaces can reduce the noise levels. Explain briefly.
Answer:
Yes, it is true that placing carpets on the floor and curtains on the wall surface, windows, reduce the noise level. This is because the curtains and carpets on the wall surface act as muffling devices and absorb sounds of moderate level.

Question 18.
What is hybrid vehicle technology? Explain its advantages with a suitable example.
Answer:
The technology used to run vehicles on dual-mode like petrol or compressed natural gas is said to be hybrid vehicle technology. These vehicles run on either petrol or CNG. As CNG is a clean and green fuel so it is helpful to reduce environmental pollution and also to conserve petrol and other fossil fuels.

Question 19.
Is it true that if the dissolved oxygen level drops to zero the water will become septic? Give an example that could lower the dissolved oxygen content of an aquatic body.
Answer:
Yes, the water becomes septic if the dissolved oxygen drops to zero. Organic pollution (biodegradable) is an example.

Question 20.
Name any one of the greenhouse gases and their possible source of production on a large scale. What is the harmful effect of it?
Answer:
C02 and Methane. C02 levels are increasing due to the burning of fossil fuels leading to global warming.

Question 21.
It is a common practice to plant trees and shrubs near the boundary walls of buildings. What purpose do they serve?
Answer:
The plants growing near the boundary wall act as barriers to sound pollution and act as dust catchers.

Question 22.
Why has the National Forest Commission of India recommended a relatively larger forest cover for hills than the plains?
Answer:
National Forest Commission in its National Forest Policy (1988) has recommended 33 percent forest cover for the plains and 67 percent for the hills because plains mainly provide land for human settlements. Forests on the hills prevent soil erosion and landslides.

Question 23.
How can slash and burn agriculture become environment-friendly?
Answer:
Slash and burn agriculture can become environment-friendly if rows of trees and shrubs are left intact while clearing the area for cultivation. This will prevent soil erosion and the invasion of weeds. There will be a quicker recovery of the forest after the area is abandoned.

Question 24.
What is the main idea behind the “Joint Forest Management Concept” introduced by the Government of India?
Answer:
It is government-private entrepreneurship for upkeeping forests. The forest department prepares the plan, procures saplings and equipment for planting and plant protection. The locals take care of the plants till they become mature. For this, they get an honorarium and share in plant products. This sort of management provides livelihood to locals and protection to plants against stealing and illegal felling of trees.

Question 25.
What do you understand by snow blindness?
Answer:
Snow blindness is temporary blindness caused by inflammation of the cornea due to absorption of UV-B radiations. It is accompanied by photo burning and dimming of eyesight after which cataract develops. Regular exposure to UV-B radiations causes permanent damage to the cornea resulting in blindness.

Question 26.
What is water pollution?
Answer:
Water pollution: The addition of harmful materials to water is termed water pollution. The sources of inland water pollution are community wastewater (sewage) and wastes from industries and agricultural practices. Water pollutants include organic matter, pathogens, chemicals and minerals, solid particles, radioactive wastes, and heat.

Question 27.
What are two serious problems with the use of nuclear energy?
Answer:
Nuclear energy has two most serious problems:

  1. The accidental leakage of radioactivity
  2. The safe disposal of radioactive wastes.

Question 28.
Particulate and gaseous pollutants along with harmless gases are released from the thermal power plants.
(i) Name any two harmless gases released.
Answer:
Nitrogen and oxygen.

(ii) Name the most widely used device for removing particulate pollutants from the air. Explain how the device is used? (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Electrostatic precipitator: Working of electrostatic precipitator The device has electrode wires kept at very high voltage in order to produce corona that releases electrons. These electrons provide dust particles a negative charge. The device has a collecting plate that is grounded. So when air with dust rushes through the device, the negatively charged dust is trapped at the collecting plate.

Question 29.
Study the graph given below and answer the questions that follow:
(i) What is the relationship between dissolved oxygen and biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)?
(ii) Mention their effect on aquatic life in the river. (CBSE 2008)

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 1

Answer:
(i) BOD indicates the quantity of wastewater. BOD refers to the amount of dissolved oxygen required by bacteria in decomposing oxygen.

Thus greater the BOD, the lesser will be dissolved oxygen. A sudden decline in dissolved oxygen causes the death of many aquatic organisms.

(ii) There is a sharp decline in the dissolved organic waste downstream from the point of discharge. More the dissolved oxygen, the healthier will be the aquatic life and vice versa.

Question 30.
A crane had a DDT level of 5 ppm in its body. What would happen to the population of such birds? Explain giving reasons. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:

  1. Fish-eating bird crane has a DDT level of 5 ppm due to biomagnification.
  2. The high concentration of DDT disturbs calcium metabolism in birds.
  3. It causes thinning of eggshells and premature breaking of the egg.
  4. There will be a decline in the bird population.

Question 31.
Study the graph given below. Explain how is oxygen concentration affected in the river when the sewage is discharged into it. (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
The figure shows the changes as a result of sewage discharged into the river. Micro-organisms involved in the biodegradation of organic matter in the receiving water body consume a lot of oxygen. As a result, there is a sharp decline in dissolved oxygen downstream. It causes the death of a large number of fishes and other aquatic creatures.

Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 2

Question 32.
“Determination of Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) can help in suggesting the quality of a water body” Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
The quality of the water body depends upon the organic wastes present in it. More is the amount of organic wastes present, poorer is the quality of water body for human consumption. The number of organic wastes can be determined by the BOD of that water body, e.g. BOD of pure drinking water is less than one, below 1500 mg/liter for weak organic wastewater but is more than 4000 mg/liter for a highly polluted water body.

Question 33.
Discuss the role of women and communities in the protection and conservation of forests.
Answer:
Role of women and communities in the protection and conservation of forests:

  1. In 1731, the Bishnoi community led by a woman Amrita Devi obstructed the cutting of trees by hugging the tree and asked the workers of the king to cut her before cutting the tree. Her three daughters and hundreds of other Bishnois lost their lives in saving trees.
  2. Chipko movement started by Chandi Prasad Bhatt and Sunder Lai Bahuguna of Silyara in the Tehri region when workers of the contractor were not allowed to cut the trees by village people by hugging around them.

Question 34.
Explain the different steps involved during the primary treatment phase of sewage. (CBSE Delhi 2015)
Answer:
Primary treatment of wastewater in sewage treatment plants involves mechanisms like floatation, Alteration, and sedimentation so as to remove insoluble and stable solid wastes. The final product after primary treatment is called primary sludge.

Question 35.
How have human activities caused desertification? Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Desertification caused by human activities. The development of the fertile topsoil takes centuries. But it can be removed very easily due to human activities.

  • Over-cultivation
  • Unrestricted grazing
  • Deforestation
  • Poor irrigation practices.

All these human activities result in arid patches on land. When large barren patches extend and meet over time a desert is created.

Thus desertification is a major problem particularly due to increased urbanization.

Environmental Issues Important Extra Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
Define pollution. Compare the biodegradable and non-biodegradable pollutants.
Answer:
Pollution: “Environmental pollution is an unfavorable alteration of our surroundings largely as a by-product of man’s actions through direct or indirect effects of changes in energy patterns, radiation levels, chemical and physical conditions and abundance of organisms.”

Differences between biodegradable and non-biodegradable pollutants:

Biodegradable Pollutants Non-biodegradable Pollutants
1. These wastes can be broken down into harmless substances naturally. 1. These cannot be broken down into harmless substances naturally.
2. The disposal of biodegradable wastes is easy and therefore, maintains balance in the ecosystem. Example. Cattle dung 2. Their disposal is not easy and is a problem. Example. D.D.T., plastics.

Question 2.
What is air pollution? List various air pollutants.
Answer:
Air pollution: The release of harmful materials into the air is called air or atmospheric pollution. It is the degradation of air quality and atmospheric conditions.

Air pollutants include gaseous materials, suspended particles, and radioactive substances.
1. The gaseous pollutants of the air come from combustion in motor vehicles and industries. These include CO, C02, NO, N02, S02, S03, hydrocarbons, fluorides, and photochemical oxidants such as peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN), ozone (03), and aldehydes. PAN is a secondary pollutant formed in the air by the interaction between nitrogen oxides and hydrocarbons in the presence of sunlight. It is more toxic than the primary pollutants. An increase in toxicity by the reaction among pollutants is called synergism.

2. The particulate contaminants of air also come from industries and automobiles. These include fly-ash, soot, metal dust, cotton fibers, asbestos, fibers, lead, aerosols (chlorofluorocarbons or CFCs), polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), tobacco smoke, smog, pollen, spores, cysts, and bacteria.
(in) Radioactive substances released by nuclear explosions and war explosives are also very harmful air pollutants.

Question 3.
Define a pollutant. How many types of pollutants are there?
Answer:
Pollutant: It is a substance (e.g. dust, smoke), chemical (e.g. S02), or factor (e.g. heat, noise) that on release into the environment has an actual or potentially adverse effect on human interests. A pollutant can also be defined as a constituent in the wrong amount, at the wrong place, or at the wrong time.Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 3

Question 4.
What measures do you suggest to control pollution from automobile exhaust?
Answer:
Control of pollution from automobile exhaust:

  1. Efficient engines can reduce the number of unburnt hydrocarbons from vehicuLar emissions.
  2. Use of cataLytic converters to convert harmful gases to harmless.
  3. Use of good quality fuel.
  4. Unleaded petroL can reduce the amount of lead in the exhaust.
  5. The use of CNG (compressed natural gas) Lowers the toxic contaminants in the exhaust.

Question 5.
Blends of polyblend and bitumen, when used, help to increase road life by a factor of three. What is the reason?
Answer:
Polyblend is a fine powder of recycled modified plastic. The binding property due to increased cohesion and enhanced water-repelling property of plastic makes the road last longer besides giving added strength to withstand more loads.

This is because:

  • Plastic increases the melting point of the bitumen which would prevent it from melting in India’s hot and extremely humid climate, where temperature frequently crosses 45°C.
  • Rainwater will not seep through because of the plastic in the tar.

Question 6.
“Indiscriminate human activities have strengthened the greenhouse effect resulting in Global Warming.” Give the relative contribution of various Greenhouse Gases in the form of a pie chart and explain the rate of the energy of sunlight reaching the earth’s surface contributing towards Global Warming. (CBSE Sample Paper 2020)
Answer:
a)Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 4
(b) Rate of the energy of sunlight:

  • Clouds and gases reflect one-fourth of incoming solar radiations.
  • Some of the energy is absorbed by clouds and gases.
  • Thus only half of the solar energy falls on the surface of the earth.
  • The small amount of energy is reflected back.
  • Earth surface re-emits heat in the form of infrared radiations.
  • The major fraction of solar energy is absorbed by atmospheric gases.

Question 7.
How does a scrubber function?
Answer:
Scrubber: A scrubber can remove gases like sulfur dioxide. In a scrubber, the exhaust is passed through a spray of water or lime. Water dissolves gases and lime reacts with sulfur dioxide to form a precipitate of calcium sulfate or sulfite.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 5

Question 8.
Discuss the causes and effects of global warming.
Answer:
Global warming: The increase in global mean temperature due to the enhanced greenhouse effect is called global warming.

Effects of global warming:
1. Effect on weather and climate.
(а) The average temperature of the earth may increase by 1.4° to 5.8°C by the year 2100.
(б) Winter precipitation may decrease at lower altitudes.
(c) Frequency of droughts, floods may increase.
(d) Climatic change is a threat to human health in tropical and subtropical countries.

2. Sea level change. Sea level had been raised by 1 to 2 mm per year during the 20th century. It is predicted that by the year 2100, the global mean sea level can increase up to 0.88 m over the 1990 level. Global warming may contribute to sea-level rise due to the thermal expansion of the ocean.

3. Effect on a range of species distribution. Vegetation may extend 250-600 km poleward with a global rise in temperature by 2 to 5°C during the 21st century.

4. Effect on food production. Increased temperature will cause an eruption of plant diseases and pests and vast growth of weeds.

Question 9.
Show the relative contribution of greenhouse gases to total global warming.
Answer:
Greenhouse gases:
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 6
The relative contribution of various greenhouse gases to total Global warming.

Question 10.
Make a chart illustrating the kinds of water pollutants.
Answer:
Classification of water pollutants:Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 7

Question 11.
List four laws that enforce control of pollution.
Answer:
1. The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986: This act clearly brings the protection of air, water, and soil quality, and the control of environmental pollutants including noise under its purview.

2. The Insecticide Act, 1968: This act deals with the regulation of import, manufacture, sale, transport, distribution, and use of insecticides with a view to preventing risk to human health and other organisms.

3. The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974: This act deals with the preservation of water quality and the control of water pollution with a concern for the detrimental effects of water pollutants on human health and also on the biological world.

4. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981: The act deals with the preservation of air quality and the control of air pollution with a concern for the detrimental effects of air pollutants on human health and also on the biological world. In 1987, important amendments of the Air Act 1981 were made and the noise was recognized as an air pollutant.

5. Many countries have enacted legislation to control noise. India enacted the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and as per this, noise pollution has been declared as an offense.

Question 12.
A factory drains its wastewater into the nearby lake causing algal bloom.
(i) How was the algal bloom caused?
Answer:
An algal bloom is caused due to enrichment of water with nutrients such as nitrogen and phosphorus. As fertility increases plant life increases.

(ii) What would be the consequences?
Answer:
Water becomes unfit for aquatic fauna because of scum and unpleasant odors. The fish and other organisms die because of a shortage of oxygen.

(iii) Name the phenomenon that caused it. (CBSE2008)
Answer:
Eutrophication.

Question 13.
Explain accelerated eutrophication. Mention any two consequences of this phenomenon. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Accelerated eutrophication: The natural aging of a lake by the biological enrichment of its water is called eutrophication. However, if pollutants from man’s activities like effluents from industries and homes radically accelerate the aging process, it is called accelerated cultural eutrophication.

Consequences:

  • There is excess growth of algae causing algal bloom that gives an unpleasant odor.
  • There is a shortage of oxygen which causes the death of the fauna of the water body.
  • Ultimately death of the lake occurs.

Question 14.
How does algal bloom destroy the quality of a freshwater body? Explain. (CBSE Delhi 2013)
Answer:
Algal bloom destroys the quality of the freshwater body. Phosphorus and nitrates dissolved in polluted water act as nutrients for the green algal plants. These pollutants accelerate the growth of algae that may form a mat on the water surface. It is termed an algal bloom.

Effect:

  1. The algae use oxygen at night and deoxygenate the water enough to kill the fish and other aquatic animals.
  2. The algal mat on the water surface blocks light, making it unavailable for submerged plants.
  3. The algae and dead organisms feed the oxygen-consuming bacteria.
  4. Silt and decaying matters accumulate and finally fill the water body (lake or pond). This process is called senescence.
  5. It is a natural stage in the change of water body into dry land and it becomes barren. Ultimately death of the water body occurs.

Question 15.
How did a citizen group called Friends of Areata March, Areata, California, USA, help to improve the water quality of the marshland using Integrated Waste Water Treatment? Explain in four steps. (CBSE 2018)
Answer:
Wastewater including sewage can be treated in an integrated manner by utilizing a mix of artificial and natural processes, which are as follows:

  1. First of all the conventional sedimentation, filtering, and chlorine treatments are given. However, after this stage, a lot of dangerous pollutants like dissolved heavy metals still remain.
  2. To combat this, an innovative approach was taken. The biologists developed a series of six connected marshes over 60 hectares of marshland.
  3. Appropriate plants, algae, fungi, and bacteria were seeded into this area, which neutralizes, absorbs, and assimilates the pollutants. Hence, as the water flows through the marshes, it gets purified naturally.
  4. The marshes also constitute a sanctuary, with a high level of biodiversity in the form of fishes, animals, and birds.

Question 16.
List the control measures for minimizing air pollution.
Answer:
Control measures for minimizing air pollution:

  1. Simple combustible solid wastes should be burnt in incinerators.
  2. Automobiles must be either made to eliminate the use of gasoline and diesel oil or complete combustion is obtained in the engine so that harmful products are omitted.
  3. There should be a cut in the use of agricultural sprays.
  4. Excessive and undesirable burning of vegetation should be stopped.
  5. Smoking should be stopped.
  6. Use of electrostatic precipitators and filters in the factories to minimize atmospheric pollution.
  7. The use of tall chimneys can substantially reduce the concentration of pollutants at the ground level.
  8. Weather forecasts can help in controlling air pollution as the meteorological conditions affect the dispersion, dilution, and mixing of various emissions and proper operation of factory schedule, e.g. when atmospheric stagnation or calm is predicted, a power plant should switch over from coal to gas.
  9. Separation of pollutants from harmless gases.
  10. Dispersion of pollutants to innocuous (harmless) products before releasing into the atmosphere.

Question 17.
Why is the ozone layer in the stratosphere called a protective layer?
Answer:
Ozone layer as a protective layer: The ozone layer in the stratosphere is very useful to human beings because it absorbs the major part of harmful ultraviolet radiation coming from the sun. Therefore, it is called a protective layer. However, it has been observed that the ozone layer is getting depleted. One of the reasons for the depletion of the ozone layer is the action of aerosols spray propellants.

Chemicals such as fluorocarbons and chlorofluorocarbons are used as aerosol propellants. These compounds react with ozone gas in the atmosphere thereby depleting it. Scientists all over the world are worried about the destruction of the ozone layer. If the ozone layer in the atmosphere is significantly decreased, these harmful radiations would reach the earth and would cause many damages such as skin cancer, genetic disorders in man and other living forms. Efforts are being made to find substitutes for these chemicals that do not react with ozone.

Question 18.
Why industrial effluents are more difficult to manage than municipal sewage? Name a disease that is caused by heavy metal contamination.
Answer:
Industrial effluents released into water contain toxic substances, such as arsenic, cadmium, lead, zinc, copper, mercury, and cyanides, besides some salts, acids, and alkalies. All these materials can prove harmful to health. They may reach the human body. Minamata is a disease caused by heavy metal (Mercury) contaminated water.

Question 19.
What is deforestation? List the causes of deforestation.
Answer:
Deforestation: According to an estimate, almost 40% of forests have been lost in the tropics and 1% of forests in the temperate region. In India, at the beginning of the twentieth century, forests covered about 30% of land whereas, by the end of the century, it reduced to 19.4%. The National Forest Policy (1988) has recommended 33% forest cover for plains and 67% for hills.

Causes of Deforestation:

  • Forests are converted into agricultural land to feed the growing human population.
  • Forests are cleared for making homes and establishing industries.
  • Trees are felled for timber, firewood, etc.
  • Jhum cultivation in the north¬eastern states has contributed to deforestation.

Question 20.
List all the wastes that you generate, at home, school, or during your trips to other places that you could very easily reduce. Which would be difficult or rather impossible to reduce?
Answer:
List of wastes:

  1. Papers, clothes, polythene bags
  2. Disposable crockery
  3. Aluminum foil, cans
  4. Leftover of tiffins
  5. Wood
  6. Sewage

Wastes that can be reduced:

  1. Papers, clothes,
  2. Leftover of tiffins.

Wastes that cannot be reduced:

  1. Aluminum foil cans
  2. Disposable crockery
  3. Polythene bags

Question 21.
Why ozone hole form over Antarctica? How will enhanced UV radiations affect us?
Answer:
Ozone hole: During the period 1956-1970 the springtime O3 layer thickness above Antarctica varied from 280 to 325 Dobson unit. Thickness was sharply reduced to 225 DU in 1979 and 136 DU in 1985. Antarctic air is completely isolated from the rest of the world by the natural circulation of wind called the polar vortex. The decline in ozone layer thickness during that springtime is called ozone hole. It was first noted in 1985 over Antarctica.

Effects of UV radiation on humans:

  • In humans, the increase in UV radiation increases the incidence of cancer (including melanoma).
  • Reduces the functioning of the immune system.
  • The cornea absorbs UV-B radiations, and a high dose of UV-B causes inflammation of the cornea called snow blindness, cataract, etc. Exposure may permanently damage the cornea and cause blindness.

Question 22.
Write critical notes on:
(i) Eutrophication
Answer:
Eutrophication: The process by which a body of water becomes barren either by natural means or by pollution, extensively rich in dissolved nutrients. It results in the increased primary productivity that often leads to seasonal deficiency in dissolved oxygen. Less dissolved oxygen ultimately affects aquatic life.

Algal bloom: Phosphorus and nitrates dissolved in water act as nutrients and accelerate the growth of algae that may form a mat on the water surface. It is termed algal bloom.

Effects: The algae use oxygen at night and may deoxygenate the water enough to kill the fish and other animals. The algal mat at the water surface may block light to the submerged plants. The algae may die and sink, and feed the oxygen-consuming bacteria. They may be pushed onto the shore by wind and decompose, releasing foul gases, such as hydrogen sulfide. Silt and decaying matter may accumulate and finally fill the lake or pond. This process is called senescence. It is a natural stage in the change of a lake into dry land and it becomes barren.

(ii) Biological magnification (CBSE 2015, 2019 C)
Answer:
Biological magnification: The phenomenon in which the harmful pollutants (such as pesticides) enter the food chain and get concentrated more and more at each successive trophic level of organisms is called biological magnification.

This phenomenon is well known for mercury and DDT. The figure given ahead shows the biomagnification of DDT in an aquatic food chain. Zooplankton (tiny floating animals in the food chain), accumulated modest levels of DDT. However, small fish, forming the next level of the food chain, must eat zooplankton several times their own weight, and thus they accumulated more DDT.

In this manner, the concentration of DDT magnified at successive trophic levels, starting with 0.003 ppb (ppb = parts per billion) in water it ultimately reached 25 ppm (ppm = parts per million) in fish-eating birds. High concentrations of DDT disturb calcium metabolism in birds, which causes thinning of eggshells and their premature breaking eventually causing a decline in the bird population.
Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Environmental Issues Bio 8
Biomagnification of DDT in an aquatic food chain.

(iii) Groundwater depletion and ways for its replenishment. (CBSE 2012)
Answer:
Groundwater depletion and ways for its replenishment: Underground water is most pure and safe for drinking. It is getting polluted particularly in industrial towns. The common sources of underground water pollution are sewage and industrial effluents spilled over the ground. The fertilizers and pesticides used in fields also act as pollutants. Pollution is also increased due to seepage from refuse dumps, septic tanks, and seepage pits. Method to control. Sewage and factory wastes should be treated to clean them before their release into water sources.

Question 23.
List various measures for control of noise pollution.
Answer:
Control of noise pollution:

  1. Construction of soundproof rooms for noisy machines in industries.
  2. Radios and transistors should be kept at low volume.
  3. The use of horns with jarring sounds should be banned.
  4. Noise-producing industries, aerodromes, railway stations, etc. should be shifted away from the inhabited areas.
  5. Proper laws should be enforced to check the misuse of loudspeakers and public announcement systems,
  6. Need to enforce a silence zone around institutions like educational institutes, residential areas, hospitals, etc.
  7. Sound-absorbing techniques like acoustical furnishing should be extensively employed.
  8. Noise should be deflected away from the receiver by using mechanical devices.
  9. The green muffler scheme involves growing green plants along roadsides to reduce noise pollution.

Question 24.
What measures, as an individual, you would take to reduce environmental pollution? (CBSE Delhi 2011)
Answer:
Role of individuals in reducing pollution:

  1. Use of unleaded petrol or CNG in vehicles as fuel.
  2. Use of reformulated gasoline to save ozone in the atmosphere.
  3. The use of power generators in residential areas should be avoided.
  4. Plantation of trees.
  5. Excessive and unplanned use of fertilizers should be avoided.
  6. Biodegradable material should be used.
  7. Do not blow the horn with a jarring sound.
  8. Radio, transistors, T.V., Music systems should be kept at low volume to control noise pollution.

Question 25.
Discuss briefly the following:
(i) Radioactive wastes
Answer:
(i) Radioactive wastes: Radioactive wastes are of three types depending on the amount of radioactivity.
(a) Low-level radioactive wastes.
(b) Intermediate level radioactive wastes.
(c) High-level radioactive wastes.

The use of nuclear energy has two most serious problems. The first is accidental leakage and the second is safe disposal of radioactive wastes. Wastes from atomic power plants come in the form of spent fuels of uranium and plutonium. People working in such power plants, nuclear reactors, fuel processors, etc. are vulnerable to their exposure. These also undergo biological magnification and may reach 75,000 times in birds.

Radioisotopes. Many radioactive isotopes like C14, I125, P32, and their compounds are used in scientific researches. The wastewater of these research centers contains radioactive elements which may reach human beings through water and food chains.

Disposal of radioactive wastes. Such wastes are first concentrated to reduce the volume and then kept for 50-100 years in small ponds within the premises of nuclear power plants. This interim storage causes considerable decay of radioactivity and lessening of heat problem. It has been recommended that subsequent storage should be done in suitably shielded containers buried within the rocks, about 500 m deep inside Earth. However, this method of disposal is meeting stiff opposition from the public.

(ii) Defunct ships and e-wastes.
Answer:
Defunct ships and e-wastes: Defunct ships are a kind of solid waste requiring proper disposal. Such ships are broken down in developing countries because of cheap labor and scrap metal. They often contain toxic substances such as asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls, tributyltin, lead, and mercury.

Similarly, irreparable computers and electronic goods are known as electronic wastes of e-wastes. Most of them are shipped to developing countries for metals like copper, nickel, silicon, gold and are recovered by recycling. Recycling is the only solution for the treatment of such wastes, provided it is carried out in an environment-friendly manner. An international treaty called Basel Convention drafted in Basel (Switzerland) as a result of great demand from developing countries.

(iii) Municipal solid wastes.
Answer:
Municipal Solid Wastes: Solid wastes refer to everything that goes out in the trash. Municipal solid wastes are wastes from homes, offices, stores, schools, etc. that are collected and disposed of by the municipality. The municipal solid wastes generally comprise paper, food wastes, glass, metals, rubber, leather, textile, etc. Burning reduces the volume of the wastes, although it is generally not complete and open dumps often serve as the breeding ground for rats and flies.

Management of municipal solid wastes:

  1. Sanitary landfills were adopted as the substitute for open-burning dumps. In a sanitary landfill, wastes are dumped in a depression or trench after compaction and covered with dirt every day.
  2. Municipal solid wastes, containing biodegradable organic wastes, can be transformed into organic manure for agriculture.
  3. Sewage sludge and industrial solid wastes are used as landfills.
  4. Hazardous metal-containing wastes are used as bedding material for road construction.
  5. Other options are incineration of wastes and using emitted heat in electricity generation, and recycling various components of wastes.

Question 26.
What initiatives were taken for reducing vehicular air pollution in Delhi? Has the air quality improved in Delhi?
Or
Explain any three measures which will control vehicular air pollution in Indian cities. (CBSE 2009)
Answer:
Automobiles are the major sources of air pollution in Delhi because it has a very high number of cars.

Some specific measures taken to reduce vehicular air pollution are as follows.

  • Use of CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) for its public transport system.
  • Phasing out of old vehicles.
  • Use of unleaded petrol.
  • Use of low sulfur petrol and diesel.
  • Use of catalytic converter in vehicles.
  • Application of Euro II norms for vehicles.

Because of the above-mentioned steps taken up by the Government, the air quality of Delhi has improved with a substantial fall in carbon monoxide, oxides of sulfur, and nitrogen levels between 1997 and 2005.

Question 27.
Discuss briefly the following:
(i) Greenhouse effect
Answer:
Greenhouse effect: Earth’s temperature is maintained by reradiated infrared radiations by CO2, CH4, O3, NO, and N02 and slightly by water vapors in the atmosphere. These gases prevent heat from escaping to outer space, so are functionally comparable to glass panels of a greenhouse and are called greenhouse gases (GHGs) and phenomena called the greenhouse effect. The CO2 is added to the atmosphere mainly by burning fossil fuels, volcanic activities, etc.

Greenhouse gases are useful in keeping the earth warm with an average temperature of 15° C. In their absence, the surface temperature of the earth will be as low as 18° C. This temperature will freeze all water and kill most life. However, excess greenhouse gases are equally harmful. Over 7 × 1012 kg of CO2 is being added annually to the atmosphere by the burning of fossil fuels. As a result, the CO2 concentration of the atmosphere has risen from 0.028% in 1800 to .0359% in 1994. Now enhanced greenhouse effect is resulting in Global Warming.

(ii) Catalytic converters
Answer:
Catalytic converters: Catalytic converters, having expensive metals namely platinum-palladium and rhodium as catalysts, are fitted into automobiles for reducing the emission of harmful gases. As the exhaust passes through the catalytic converter, unburnt hydrocarbons are converted into carbon dioxide and water, and carbon monoxide and nitric oxide are changed to carbon dioxide and nitrogen gas, respectively. Motor vehicles equipped with catalytic converters should use unleaded petrol because leaded petrol inactivates the catalyst.

It has been established that the installation of catalytic converters can slash carbon monoxide emissions from 90 grams to 3.4 grams per mile run. So if half the vehicles on Delhi and Mumbai roads are made to install such catalytic converters, then total CO emission in India can be reduced by 70 percent.

(iii) Ultraviolet B
Answer:
Ultraviolet-B radiations: These are high energetic UV-radiations that are mostly blocked by the ozonosphere located in the stratosphere of the atmosphere. But due to the increased production of ozone-depleting substances (ODS) like CFCs, halons, etc., the ozone shield is becoming thinner and thinner. This is increasing the amount of UV-B radiations reaching the earth’s surface. These radiations are carcinogenic.

The cornea absorbs UV-B radiation. High dose of UV-B causes inflammation of the cornea called snow blindness cataract. Exposure may permanently damage the cornea.

Question 28.
Looking at the deteriorating air quality because of air pollution in many cities of the country, the citizens are very much worried and concerned about their health. The doctors have declared a health emergency in the cities where the air quality is very severely poor.
(i) Mention any two major causes of air pollution.
Answer:
Two causes of air pollution are:
(a) Burning of fossil fuels.
(b) Industrial effluents

(ii) Write the two harmful effects of air pollution on plants and humans.
Answer:
Harmful effects of air pollution are:
(a) It affects the respiratory system of humans and animals.
(b) It also reduces the growth and yield of crops and causes premature death of plants.

(iii) As a captain of your school Eco¬club, suggest any two programs you would plan to organize in the school so as to bring awareness among the students on how to check air pollution in and around the school. (CBSE2018)
Answer:
As a captain of your school Eco-club, I shall suggest:
(a) Encouraging public transport, i.e. buses, metro, etc and using CNG/electric vehicles instead of diesel and petrol vehicles.
(b) Planting more trees to curb pollution.

Question 29.
While studying pollution of water, a group of students observed mortality of fish in the river flowing through the city and also in the pond which was away from the city but was adjacent to the crop fields. They further found that drains of the city discharged sewage into the river and the water from farms flowed into the pond. Explain how these could be the cause of fish mortality. (CBSE Delhi 2019 C)
Answer:

  • Pollutants from man’s activities cause eutrophication in ponds and rivers.
  • The prime contaminants are nitrates and phosphate which act as plant nutrients.
  • They overstimulate the growth of algae causing the formation of a thick layer of scum on the surface and an unpleasant odor.
  • The dissolved oxygen in the water decreases. It is essential for all forms of aquatic life.
  • At the same time, other pollutants flowing from farms into pond poison the whole population of fish.
  • As the decomposition of dead fish occurs, the dissolved oxygen content of water further decreases.
  • Ultimately pond chokes to death.

Question 30.
A young sperm whale, 33-foot long was found dead off the coast. It had a large amount of human trash like trash bags, polypropylene sacks, ropes, net segments, etc. amounting to 29 kilograms in its digestive system. The whale died because of inflammation of the abdominal lining. Analyze the possible reasons for such mishaps and suggest measures that can be taken to reduce such incidents. (CBSE Sample Paper 2018-19)
Answer:

  1. We are increasing the use of non-biodegradable products. In most of the products we buy, there is at least one layer of plastic in it.
  2. We have started packaging even our daily use products like milk and water in polybags.
  3. In cities, fruits and vegetables are packed in polystyrene and plastic packaging and we contribute heavily to environmental pollution.
  4. Most of the wastes are dumped in water bodies without segregation and treatment. One has to reduce the generation of non-biodegradable wastes and stop the irresponsible dumping of wastes into water bodies.